2010
ALTIMA HYBRID
OWNER'S MANUAL
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOREWORD
READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-
iarity with controls and maintenance require-
ments, assisting you in the safe operation of your
vehicle.
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with
confidence. It was produced using the latest
techniques and strict quality control.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification
performance, safety or durability, and
may even violate governmental
could
affect
its
This manual was prepared to help you under-
stand the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-
ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this
manual before operating your vehicle.
WARNING
regulations. In addition, damage or per-
formance problems resulting from modi-
fications may not be covered under
NISSAN warranties.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-
MINDERS FOR SAFETY!
Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!
A separate Warranty Information Booklet
explains details about the warranties cov-
ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service
and Maintenance Guide” explains details
about maintaining and servicing your ve-
hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer
Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will
explain how to resolve any concerns you
may have with your vehicle, as well as
clarify your rights under your state’s lemon
law.
● NEVER drive under the influence of al-
cohol or drugs.
● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for conditions.
●
●
ALWAYS give your full attention to driving
and avoid using vehicle features or taking
other actions that could distract you.
Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle
best. When you require any service or have any
questions, they will be glad to assist you with the
extensive resources available to them.
ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-
priate child restraint systems. Preteen
children should be seated in the rear seat.
● ALWAYS provide information about the
proper use of vehicle safety features to
all occupants of the vehicle.
● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
This manual includes information for all options
available on this model. Therefore, you may find
some information that does not apply to your
vehicle.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
WARNING
All information, specifications and illustrations in
this manual are those in effect at the time of
printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change
specifications or design without notice and with-
out obligation.
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain
or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth de-
fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual. They
are used in the following ways:
APD1005
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”
or “Do not let this happen.”
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause death or serious
personal injury. To avoid or reduce the
risk, the procedures must be followed
precisely.
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries,
may contain perchlorate material. The fol-
lowing advisory is provided: “Perchlorate
Material – special handling may apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-
tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the
vehicle.
CAUTION
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
indicate movement or action.
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause minor or moder-
ate personal injury or damage to your ve-
hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-
cedures must be followed carefully.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
call attention to an item in the illustration.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BLUETOOTH is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed to
Visteon and Clarion.
XM Radio requires
subscription, sold
separately after first 90
days. Not available in
Alaska, Hawaii or
Guam. For more
information, visit
www.xmradio.com.
© 2009 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form, or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of Nissan North America, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your NISSAN
dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to
provide NISSAN directly with comments or
questions, please contact the NISSAN Con-
sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free
number:
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the
following information:
You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
For U.S. customers
– Your name, address, and telephone number
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
– Vehicle identification number (attached to the
top of the instrument panel on the driver’s
side)
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)
For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
– Date of purchase
– Current odometer reading
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name
– Your comments or questions
OR
For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEV
0
HEV Overview
Table of
Contents
Illustrated table of contents
1
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
2
Instruments and controls
3
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Starting and driving
4
5
6
In case of emergency
7
Appearance and care
8
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
9
Technical and consumer information
10
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEV Overview
Hybrid System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HEV-2
High voltage battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HEV-2
High voltage cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HEV-2
Road accident cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HEV-3
Emergency shut off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HEV-3
Energy Monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HEV-3
Power meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HEV-4
High voltage battery status meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . HEV-4
Energy flow (vehicles equipped with
Fuel Economy History (vehicles equipped
with navigation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HEV-5
Starting the Hybrid System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HEV-7
Efficient use of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HEV-7
Hybrid vehicle precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HEV-8
High voltage components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HEV-8
Hybrid vehicle characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HEV-9
navigation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HEV-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HYBRID SYSTEM
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY
WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE CAUTIONS
WARNING
The Hybrid System combines the power of a
gasoline engine and an electric motor to minimize
fuel consumption and emissions.
Your vehicle contains a sealed Nickel-
Metal hydride high voltage battery. If dis-
posed of improperly, it is hazardous to the
environment and there is a risk of severe
burns and electrical shock that may result
in serious injury or death.
● The hybrid system uses high voltage up
to 650 V. The system can be hot while
and after starting. Be careful of both the
high voltage and the high temperature.
Obey the caution labels attached to the
vehicle.
Depending on driving conditions, the vehicle runs
on a combination of the gasoline engine and the
electric motor, whichever is best for those condi-
tions.
Because the gasoline engine charges the high
voltage battery as needed, the battery does not
have to be charged from an outside source like an
all-electric vehicle.
● Never touch, disassemble, remove or
replace the high voltage parts, cables
and their connectors. High voltage
cables are orange. Touching, disassem-
bling, removing or replacing those parts
and cables can cause severe burns or
electric shock that may result in serious
injury or death.
The high voltage battery is used to drive the
electric motors in the Hybrid System.
The high voltage battery has a limited service life.
Contact your NISSAN dealer for information
about recycling or disposal of the battery.
● Never try to remove the service discon-
nect located in the trunk on the lower
right-hand side. The service disconnect
is used only when the vehicle is ser-
viced by trained technicians wearing
personal protection equipment and is
part of the high voltage system. Touch-
ing the service disconnect can cause
severe burns or electric shock that may
result in serious injury or death.
HEV-2 HEV Overview
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ROAD ACCIDENT CAUTIONS
WARNING
ENERGY MONITORS
The Hybrid System monitors the status of power
being sent to the traction motor and the battery
state of charge. The status is shown on the hybrid
power meter and high voltage battery status
meter. System status can also be shown on the
navigation system display (if so equipped) when
the screen is in the Energy Flow mode or
energy/fuel history mode.
● Never touch fluid leaks inside or out-
side the vehicle. The leak may be strong
alkaline electrolyte from the high volt-
age battery. If it contacts your skin or
eyes, wash it off immediately with a
large amount of water or if possible,
boric acid solution. Get immediate
medical attention to help avoid serious
injury.
● Pull your vehicle off the road, put the
transmission in the P (Park) position,
apply the parking brake and turn the
Hybrid System off.
● Check to see if there are exposed high
voltage parts and cables. Never touch
the parts and cables. See “High voltage
components”, later in this section for
the locations of the high voltage parts
and cables.
● If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicle,
leave the vehicle as soon as possible.
Never use a fire extinguisher that is not
meant for use on electric fires. Using
even a small amount of water may be
also dangerous.
● To avoid personal injury, do not touch
high voltage wiring, connectors and
high voltage parts (inverter unit, high
voltage battery etc.).
● If your vehicle needs to be towed, do it
with the front wheels raised. If the front
wheels are on the ground when towing,
the traction motor may generate elec-
tricity. This may damage the Hybrid Sys-
tem components and cause a fire.
● If exposed electric wires are visible in-
side or outside of your vehicle, an elec-
tric shock may occur. Never touch the
electric wires.
● Inspect the ground under the vehicle. If
liquid has leaked onto the ground, the
fuel system may have been damaged.
Leave the vehicle as soon as possible.
EMERGENCY SHUT OFF SYSTEM
The emergency shut off system automatically
turns off the high voltage current in certain frontal
collisions. This is to minimize the risk of electrical
short circuits. If the system activates, your vehicle
will not restart. To restart the Hybrid System,
contact a NISSAN dealer.
HEV Overview HEV-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you use the system with the Hybrid Sys-
tem off (ignition switch placed in the ACC
position) for a long time, it will use up all
the 12–volt battery power, and the engine
will not start.
Energy flow for various operating modes can be
displayed on the navigation system monitor. The
screen must be set to the Energy Flow mode or
the Fuel Economy History mode.
LIC1109
WIC1123
POWER METER
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY STATUS
METER
The power meter indicates the total amount of
power in the hybrid system.
The gauge indicates the amount of power in the
high voltage battery.
For additional information, see “Meters and
gauges”in the “Instruments and controls”section
of this manual.
For additional information, see “Meters and
gauges”in the “Instruments and controls”section
of this manual.
ENERGY FLOW (vehicles equipped
with navigation)
When you use this system, make sure the Hybrid
System is in the ready mode.
HEV-4 HEV Overview
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
When there is no energy flow in the vehicle.
FUEL ECONOMY HISTORY (vehicles
equipped with navigation)
The Fuel Economy History screen appears in the
display with the navigation system when the
screen is in the Fuel Economy History mode.
LHV0009
LHV00010
Press the INFO button on the control panel, then
touch the “Energy Flow” key on the screen.
This is an example of the Energy Flow display.
The Energy Flow display varies, depending on
the condition of the vehicle. The graphic does not
reflect the actual motion of the vehicle.
The Energy Flow will display:
●
●
●
●
When the vehicle is powered only by the
traction motor.
When the vehicle is powered by both the
traction motor and the gasoline engine.
When the vehicle is powered only by the
gasoline engine.
When the vehicle is regenerating and charg-
ing the high voltage battery.
HEV Overview HEV-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Regenerated energy in the past 30 minutes:
The regenerated energy in the past 30 min-
utes is indicated with symbols. One symbol
indicates 50 watt hours. The energy of 50
watt hours illuminates a 50 watt bulb for an
hour.
2. Fuel consumption in the past 30 minutes:
Fuel consumption in the past 30 minutes is
displayed.
3. Current fuel consumption (Latest column):
The current fuel consumption is calculated
and displayed based on distance and fuel
consumption.
LHV0009
LHV00011
NOTE:
Press the INFO button on the control panel, and
then touch the “Fuel Economy History”key on the
screen.
The Fuel Economy History can be displayed on
the navigation system monitor. The screen must
be set to the Energy Flow mode or the Fuel
Economy History mode. This displays the vehi-
cle’s average fuel consumption and regenerative
electric power at 5 minute intervals.
Information shown in the yellow column
means current (within 5 minutes) and infor-
mation shown in the blue columns means
past (more than 5 minutes).
The displayed values on the screen indicate gen-
eral driving conditions. Accuracy varies with driv-
ing habits and road conditions.
HEV-6 HEV Overview
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING THE HYBRID SYSTEM
EFFICIENT USE OF YOUR VEHICLE
Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
Depress the brake pedal and push the ignition
switch when the transmission is in the P (Park)
position to start the Hybrid System.
Drive your vehicle with smooth accelera-
tion and deceleration.
●
If the high voltage battery becomes dis-
charged, the engine will run for a longer
period of time. Do not keep the transmission
in the N (Neutral) position with the system in
the ready mode.
●
While driving, energy is recovered through
the regenerative brake as the vehicle decel-
erates. However, for most efficient use, do
not accelerate or decelerate your vehicle
more than necessary.
The READY light illuminates indicating that the
vehicle is ready to be driven. If the ambient tem-
perature is low, the READY may flash and may
take time until the READY light stays on. For
details, see “Starting the Hybrid System” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual.
NOTE:
The gasoline engine starts and stops auto-
matically. It may stop during low load driv-
ing, deceleration or when the vehicle is
stopped.
As long as the READY light remains on, you
can drive your vehicle using the traction
motor even with the gasoline engine
stopped.
●
●
Avoid abrupt acceleration and deceleration.
The power of the high voltage battery can be
checked on the high voltage battery status
meter. See “High voltage battery status
meter” in this section for details. Gradual or
non-abrupt acceleration and deceleration
will make more effective use of the traction
motor without having to use gasoline engine
power.
As long as the READY light remains on you can
drive your vehicle using the traction motor even
though the gasoline engine may not be running.
The gasoline engine may not stop auto-
matically in the following conditions:
●
●
●
During gasoline engine warm-up.
●
●
When parking, be sure to place the shift
selector in the P (Park) position. While driv-
ing, place the shift selector in the D (Drive)
position.
During high voltage battery charging.
During high or low high voltage battery
temperature.
The Hybrid System recharges the high volt-
age battery as necessary. However, the Hy-
brid System can not charge the high voltage
battery when the transmission is in the N
(Neutral) position even if the engine is run-
ning.
HEV Overview HEV-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HYBRID VEHICLE PRECAUTIONS
HIGH VOLTAGE COMPONENTS
WARNING
● The Hybrid System uses high voltage up
to 650 V. The system can be hot while
and after starting. Be careful of both the
high voltage and the high temperature.
Obey the caution labels attached to the
vehicle.
● Never touch, disassemble, remove or
replace the high voltage parts, cables
and their connectors. High voltage
cables are orange. Touching, disassem-
bling, removing or replacing those parts
and cables can cause severe burns or
electric shock that may result in serious
injury or death.
LHV0005
HEV-8 HEV Overview
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Air conditioner compressor location
2. Electric power steering location
3. 42V DC/DC converter
4. High voltage battery and 12V DC/DC
converter
● When you leave your vehicle, be sure to
turn off the Hybrid System.
● After the 12-volt battery is discon-
nected, run down, or replaced, the
gasoline engine may not stop even
while the vehicle is powered only by the
traction motor. If this condition contin-
ues for several days, take the vehicle to
your NISSAN dealer.
● Be sure to put the transmission in the P
(Park) position because the vehicle can
move when the READY light is on even
if the engine is stopped. When the
READY light is on, do not leave your
vehicle in a shift position other than the
P (Park) position. The vehicle will creep
and start abruptly if the accelerator
pedal is depressed by mistake. This may
cause serious injury or death.
5. Service disconnect
6. High voltage harnesses
7. Traction motor location
8. Inverter unit
The Hybrid System uses high voltage up to 650
V. High voltage components are indicated in the
illustration. High voltage cables are orange. The
system can be hot while and after starting. Be
careful of both the high voltage and the high
temperature.
● Do not load large amounts of water in
open containers (aquariums or buck-
ets) into the vehicle. If the water spills
onto the high voltage battery, it may
cause a short circuit and damage the
battery.
CAUTION
High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid
vehicles emit approximately the same amount of
electromagnetic waves as the conventional
gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic
appliances despite of their electromagnetic
shieldings. Unwanted noise may occur in the
reception of a mobile two-way radio.
● If the vehicle is parked for a long time,
the high voltage battery will discharge
gradually. To keep the high voltage bat-
tery in good condition, drive the vehicle
at least once every several months for
at least 30 minutes or ten miles. If the
high voltage battery becomes fully dis-
charged and the vehicle will not start
even with a jump-start to the 12-volt
system, contact your NISSAN dealer.
HYBRID VEHICLE
CHARACTERISTICS
WARNING
● Pay special attention to pedestrians
when the vehicle is powered only by the
traction motor. Because there is no en-
gine noise, pedestrians may not know
the vehicle is moving or about to move
and step into the direction of vehicle
travel.
Charging the high voltage battery while driving is
important. The vehicle cannot run if the high
voltage battery is discharged. In the N (Neutral)
position, the high voltage battery does not re-
charge. Leaving the transmission in the N (Neu-
tral) position for an extended period of time may
discharge the high voltage battery. The high volt-
age battery recharges when the shift selector is
in any position other than N (Neutral). Repeated
HEV Overview HEV-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
acceleration also consumes high voltage battery
power, resulting in poor acceleration. Battery
power can be restored by driving at a constant
speed.
When you put the shift selector in the B (Brake)
position and take your foot off the accelerator
pedal, engine braking will be applied. However,
during high speed driving you may feel that en-
gine braking is less effective than that of an
ordinary vehicle. This is normal.
Because the vehicle is powered by both the
gasoline engine and the traction motor, you may
hear a sound coming from the engine compart-
ment, high voltage battery, transmission or the
regenerative brakes. When the gasoline engine
starts and stops with the Hybrid System on, you
may feel a vibration. When accelerating rapidly,
the engine noise may rise. A noise may also be
heard while braking. These are normal character-
istics of the hybrid vehicle.
LHV0004
LHV0006
A
An air vent is located on the rear parcel shelf
᭺
to cool the high voltage battery. If the vent is
covered, the battery will overheat resulting in
reduced output performance of the Hybrid Sys-
tem.
CAUTION
Do not place objects over or into the air
vent. The high voltage battery may over-
heat and be damaged.
You may hear the noise of the cooling fan from the
air vent.
HEV-10 HEV Overview
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHV0007
LHV0008
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not load large amounts of water in
open containers (aquariums or buckets)
into the vehicle. If the water spills onto the
high voltage battery, it may cause a short
circuit and damage the battery.
Do not allow any liquid to get on or in the
air vent. It may cause a short circuit and
damage the high voltage battery.
HEV Overview HEV-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
HEV-12 HEV Overview
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0 Illustrated table of contents
Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3
Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5
Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-7
Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
1. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-21)
2. Rear seat belts (P. 1-9)
3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-34)
4. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-34)
5. Head Restraints (P. 1-6)
6. Front seat belts (P. 1-9)
7. Supplemental front-impact air bags
(P. 1-34)
8. Seats (P. 1-2)
9. Occupant classification sensor
(pattern sensor) (P. 1-42)
10. Seat belt with pretensioner (P. 1-47)
11. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system (P. 1-19)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
WII0100
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERIOR FRONT
1. Power windows (P. 2-40)
2. Windshield (P. 8-17)
3. Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-28)
4. Engine hood (P. 3-18)
5. Tie down (P. 6-13)
6. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-29)
7. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-24)
8. Tire pressure (P. 8-29)
9. Flat tire (P. 6-2)
10. Tire chains (P. 8-37)
11. Mirrors (P. 3-24)
12. Door locks, NISSAN Intelligent Key ™ ,
keys (P. 3-4, 3-2, 3-2)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
WII0179
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERIOR REAR
1. Antenna (P. 4-85)
2. Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch
(P. 2-29)
3. Interior trunk lid release, secondary
trunk lid release (P. 3-20, P. 3-19)
4. Trunk lid (P. 3-18)
5. Vehicle loading (P.9-12)
6. Exterior trunk lid release (P.3-13)
7. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-24)
8. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation
(P. 3-21, P. 9-28)
9. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-21)
10. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-6)
WII0104
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1. Secondary trunk lid release (P. 3-19)
2. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-43)
3. Sun visors (P. 3-23)
4. Interior lights, illuminated entry (P. 2-45)
5. HomeLinkா universal transceiver
(if so equipped) (P. 2-47)
6. Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) (P. 3-24)
7. Glove box (P. 2-38)
8. Front cup holders (P. 2-37)
9. Front console (P. 2-38)
10. Front seat (P. 1-2)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
WII0105
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
7.
Windshield wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-28)
8.
9.
Ignition switch (P. 5-7)
Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-33)
10. Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 2-15)
11. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-34)
12. Glove box (P. 2-38)
13. Navigation system* (if so equipped)
(P. 4-2)
14. Heater and air conditioner (P. 4-19)
15. Shift selector (P. 5-11)
16. Covered storage box (P.2-39)
17. Audio system controls (P. 4-22)
18. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls
(P. 3-23)
19. Vehicle information display controls
(P. 2-18)
20. Hood release (P. 3-18)
21. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ port (P. 3-2)
Trunk opener (P. 3-18)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).
WIC1601
1.
2.
3.
Vents (P. 4-18)
4.
5.
Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
Headlight/turn signal switch (P. 2-29)
Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped)/Bluetoothா Hands-free
Phone System (if so equipped)
(P. 4-82, 4-86)
Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-34, 2-33)
Cruise control main/set switch
(P. 5-15)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
6.
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
1. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-14)
2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-10)
3. Air cleaner (P. 8-17)
4. Fuse/fusible link box/jump-start location
(P. 8-19)
5. Fuse box (P. 8-19)
6. Inverter coolant reservoir (P. 8-9)
7. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-10)
8. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)
9. Drive belt location (P.8-15)
10. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)
11. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-14)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
LDI0577
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Illustrated table of contents 0-7
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS
Warning
light
Name
Page
2-10
Warning
light
Name
Page
2-12
2-13
2-13
2-13
2-14
2-14
1-49
2-15
Indicator
light
Name
Page
2-15
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) warn-
ing light
High temperature
warning light (red)
Electronically Con-
trolled Continuously
Variable Transmis-
sion (eCVT) position
indicator light
or
or
High voltage battery
warning light
Brake warning light
(red)
2-10
Hybrid system warn-
ing light
Front passenger air
bag status light
2-15
2-16
2-16
2-16
2-17
Low tire pressure
warning light
High beam indicator
light (blue)
12-volt battery
charge warning light
2-11
2-11
Master warning light
Low temperature
indicator light (blue)
Electric power
steering warning
light
Seat belt warning
light and chime
Malfunction Indica-
tor Light (MIL)
Supplemental air
bag warning light
Electronically con-
trolled brake warn-
ing light (yellow)
2-12
2-12
Ready operation
indicator light
(green)
Vehicle Dynamic
Control warning
light
Engine oil pressure
warning light
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indicator
light
Name
Page
2-17
2-17
2-17
Security indicator
light
Slip indicator light
Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights
Illustrated table of contents 0-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
0-10 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Front power seat adjustment
Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
(if so equipped for driver’s seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Center armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Three-point type seat belt with retractor. . . . . . . . . .1-12
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Small children. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Rear-facing child restraint installation using
LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Rear-facing child restraint installation using
the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28
Installing top tether strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31
Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34
Supplemental air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . . .1-48
Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS
● The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort. Seat
belts are most effective when the pas-
senger sits well back and straight up in
the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
being injured is increased.
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT
ARS1152
● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat properly. See “Precau-
tions on seat belt usage” later in this
section.
WARNING
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WRS0738
WRS0739
WRS0740
Forward and backward
Reclining
Seat lifter (driver’s side)
Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you
slide the seat forward or backward to the desired
position. Release the bar to lock the seat in
position.
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean
back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever
up and lean your body forward. Release the lever
to lock the seatback in position.
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust
the seat height until the desired position is
achieved.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage”later
in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined
to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park)
position.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reclining
Move the recline switch backward until the de-
sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback
forward again, move the switch forward and
move your body forward. The seatback will move
forward.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage”later
in this section). Also, the seatback can be re-
clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve-
hicle is stopped and the shift selector is in P
(Park).
WRS0751
●
Do not operate the power seat switch for a
long period of time when the Hybrid System
is not in the READY mode. This will dis-
charge the vehicle battery.
FRONT POWER SEAT
ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped for
driver’s seat)
Operating tips
Forward and backward
●
The power seat motor has an auto-reset
overload protection circuit. If the motor
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds,
then reactivate the switch.
Moving the switch forward or backward will slide
the seat forward or backward to the desired
position.
1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WRS0752
WRS0743
WRS0167
Seat lifter (driver’s seat)
Lumbar support (driver’s seat)
CENTER ARMREST
Push the front or rear end of the switch up or
down to adjust the angle and height of the seat
cushion.
The lumbar support feature provides lower back
support to the driver. Move the switch forward or
backward to adjust the seatback lumbar area.
Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING
Head restraints supplement the other ve-
hicle safety systems. They may provide
additional protection against injury in cer-
tain rear end collisions. Adjust the head
restraints properly, as specified in this
section. Check the adjustment after
someone else uses the seat. Do not attach
anything to the head restraint stalks or
remove the head restraint. Do not use the
seat if the head restraint has been re-
moved. If the head restraint was removed,
reinstall and properly adjust the head re-
straint before an occupant uses the seat-
ing position. Failure to follow these in-
structions can reduce the effectiveness of
the head restraints. This may increase the
LRS0893
WRS0921
The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped with head restraints. All of the head
restraints are adjustable.
Components
1. Head restraint
2. Adjustment notches
3. Lock knob
᭡ Indicates the seating position is equipped with
risk of serious injury or death in
collision.
a
a head restraint.
4. Stalks
5. Release knob
1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WRS0134
LRS0888
LRS0889
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint down.
Adjustment
Adjust the head restraint so the center is level
with the center of the seat occupant’s ears.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WRS0922
LRS0891
SPA1025
Install
Removal
Front-seat Active Head Restraints
1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes
in the seat. Make sure the head restraint is
facing the correct direction. The stalk with
1
Use the following procedure to remove the ad-
justable head restraints.
The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz-
ing the force that the seatback receives from the
occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement
of the head restraint helps support the occu-
pant’s head by reducing its backward movement
and helping absorb some of the forces that may
lead to whiplash-type injuries.
1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest
position.
the adjustment notches
must be installed
᭺
2
in the hole with the lock knob
.
᭺
2. Push and hold the lock knob and release
knob.
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the
head restraint down.
3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.
Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions
at low to medium speeds in which it is said that
whiplash injury occurs most.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an
occupant uses the seating position.
4. Store the head restraint properly so it is not
loose in the vehicle.
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head re-
straint before an occupant uses the seating
position.
Active Head Restraints operate only in certain
rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head
restraints return to their original position.
1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEAT BELTS
Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as
described in this section.
SSS0136
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-
justed and you are sitting upright and well back in
your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances
of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the
severity of injury may be greatly reduced.
NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your
passengers to buckle up every time you drive,
even if your seating position includes a supple-
mental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be worn
at all times when a vehicle is being driven.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0134
SSS0016
WARNING
WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times. Children should be properly re-
strained in the rear seat and, if appro-
priate, in a child restraint.
● The seat belt should be properly ad-
justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may
reduce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an acci-
dent. Serious injury or death can occur
if the seat belt is not worn properly.
1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely
fastened to the proper buckle.
● Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti-
vated, it cannot be reused and must be
replaced together with the retractor.
See your NISSAN dealer.
● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
● Removal and installation of preten-
sioner system components should be
done by a NISSAN dealer.
● Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
● All seat belt assemblies, including re-
tractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any collision
by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-
mends that all seat belt assemblies in
use during a collision be replaced un-
less the collision was minor and the
belts show no damage and continue to
operate properly. Seat belt assemblies
not in use during a collision should also
be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
● Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.
● If the seat belt warning light glows con-
tinuously while the ignition is turned
ON with all doors closed and all seat
belts fastened, it may indicate a mal-
function in the system. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
SSS0014
WARNING
● Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest.
Never put the belt behind your back,
under your arm or across your neck. The
belt should be away from your face and
neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
● No changes should be made to the seat
belt system. For example, do not modify
the seat belt, add material, or install
devices that may change the seat belt
routing or tension. Doing so may affect
the operation of the seat belt system.
Modifying or tampering with the seat
belt system may result in serious per-
sonal injury.
● All child restraints and attaching hard-
ware should be inspected after any col-
lision. Always follow the restraint
manufacturer’s inspection instructions
and replacement recommendations.
The child restraints should be replaced
if they are damaged.
● Position the lap belt as low and snug as
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could
increase the risk of internal injuries in
an accident.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREGNANT WOMEN
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and
always position the lap belt as low as possible
around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder
belt over your shoulder and across your chest.
Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-
dominal area. Contact your doctor for specific
recommendations.
WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times.
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.
WRS0738
Manual front seat shown
Fastening the seat belts
● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this
section.
1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow
the driver and passengers some freedom of
movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during
certain impacts.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode
(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child
restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt
cannot be extended again until the seat belt
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode
after the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re-
straints” later in this section for more information.
LRS0594
LRS0595
2
3
Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the tongue into the buckle until
you hear and feel the latch engage.
Position the lap belt portion low and snug
᭺
᭺
on the hips as shown.
The ALR mode should be used only for child
restraint installation. During normal seat
belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode
should not be activated. If it is activated, it
may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension.
4
Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the
shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder
and across your chest.
᭺
●
●
The retractor is designed to lock during
a sudden stop or on impact. A slow
pulling motion permits the seat belt to
move, and allows you some freedom of
movement in the seat.
The front passenger seat and the rear seating
positions three-point seat belts have two modes
of operation:
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
that the seatbacks are completely se-
cured in the latched position. If they are
not completely secured, passengers may
be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
If the seat belt cannot be pulled from
its fully retracted position, firmly pull
the belt and release it. Then smoothly
pull the belt out of the retractor.
●
●
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
check the operation as follows:
●
Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
quickly. The retractor should lock and re-
strict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check or
if you have any questions about seat belt opera-
tion, see a NISSAN dealer.
WRS0139
LRS0242
Unfastening the seat belts
Shoulder belt height adjustment (front
seats)
1
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on
the buckle. The seat belt automatically re-
tracts.
᭺
The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-
justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-
tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)
1
Checking seat belt operation
To adjust, pull out the adjustment button
and
᭺
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt
movement by two separate methods:
move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired
2
position , so the belt passes over the center of
᭺
the shoulder. The belt should be away from your
face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul-
der belt anchor into position.
●
When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the
retractor.
●
When the vehicle slows down rapidly.
1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
WARNING
WARNING
● After adjustment, release the adjust-
ment button and try to move the shoul-
der belt anchor up and down to make
sure it is securely fixed in position.
● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made
by the same company which made the
original equipment seat belts, should
be used with NISSAN seat belts.
Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such as
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires
and anchors work properly. If loose parts,
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the
webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-
sembly should be replaced.
● The shoulder belt anchor height should
be adjusted to the position best for you.
Failure to do so may reduce the effec-
tiveness of the entire restraint system
and increase the chance or severity of
injury in an accident.
● Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use could
result in serious personal injury in the
event of an accident.
● Never use seat belt extenders to install
child restraints. If the child restraint is
not secured properly, the child could be
seriously injured in a collision or a sud-
den stop.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it is
not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt
and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with
the installed seat belts is available that can be
purchased. The extender adds approximately 8 in
(200 mm) of length and may be used for either
the driver or front passenger seating position.
See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur-
chasing an extender if an extender is required.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
●
To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
mild soap solution or any solution recom-
mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.
Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
seat belts to retract until they are completely
dry.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHILD SAFETY
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
This is especially important because your
vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-
tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-
ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”
later in this section.
WARNING
Infants and children need special protec-
tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit
them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The
lap belt may not fit over their small hip
bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-
ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal
injury. Always use appropriate child
restraints.
In addition to the general information in this
manual, child safety information is available from
many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
government traffic safety offices, and community
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure
to learn the best way to transport your child.
INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed
in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-
mends that infants be placed in child restraints
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. You should choose a child restraint
that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-
facturer’s instructions for installation and use.
There are three basic types of child restraint
systems:
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-
tories require the use of approved child restraints
for infants and small children. See “Child Re-
straints” later in this section.
●
●
●
Rear-facing child restraint
Forward-facing child restraint
Booster seat
SMALL CHILDREN
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by
using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Teth-
ers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat
belt. See “Child Restraints” section for more in-
formation.
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.
Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less
than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing
child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints
are available for children who outgrow rear-
facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.
Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer
use a forward-facing child restraint.
Children that are over one year old and weigh at
least 20 lbs (9 kg) can be placed in a forward-
facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions for minimum and maximum weight
and height recommendations. NISSAN recom-
mends that small children be placed in child
restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. You should choose a child
restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for installation
and use.
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear seat.
Studies show that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than in
the front seat.
1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
LARGER CHILDREN
WARNING
Children who are too large for child restraints
should be seated and restrained by the seat belts
which are provided. The seat belt may not fit
properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5
cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and
80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to
obtain proper seat belt fit.
Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the cargo
area. The child could be seriously injured
or killed in a sudden stop or collision.
NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a
commercially available booster seat if the shoul-
der belt fits close to the face or neck or if the lap
portion of the seat belt goes across the abdo-
men. The booster seat should raise the child so
that the shoulder belt is properly positioned
across the top, middle portion of the shoulder
and the lap belt is low on the hips. A booster seat
can only be used in seating positions that have a
three-point type seat belt. The booster seat
should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certi-
fying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so
the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face
and neck, use the shoulder belt without the
booster seat.
ARS1098
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
– Infants and children should never be
held on anyone’s lap. Even the stron-
gest adult cannot resist the forces of
a collision.
– Child restraint anchor points are de-
signed to withstand loads from child
restraints that are properly fitted.
– Never use the anchor points for adult
seat belts or harnesses.
– Do not put a seat belt around both a
child and another passenger.
– A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the front
passenger seat.
– NISSAN recommends that all child
restraints be installed in the rear
seat. Studies show that children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat. If you
must install a forward-facing child
restraint in the front seat, see
“Forward-facing child restraint in-
stallation using the seat belts” later
in this section.
– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-
sible after fitting the child restraint.
– Infants and children should always
be placed in an appropriate child re-
straint while in the vehicle.
WRS0256
● When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion, loose objects can injure occu-
pants or damage the vehicle.
WARNING
● Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use and installa-
tion of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front
seat. An inflating air bag could seri-
ously injure or kill a child. A rear-
facing child restraint must only be
used in the rear seat.
CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can
become very hot. Check the seating sur-
face and buckles before placing a child in
the child restraint.
– The child restraint must be used and
installed properly. Always follow all
of the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
– Be sure to purchase a child restraint
that will fit the child and vehicle.
Some child restraints may not fit
properly in your vehicle.
1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child
restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-
tem. Some child restraints include rigid or
webbing-mounted attachments that can be con-
nected to these anchors. For details, see “LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-
tem” later in this section.
●
If the child restraint is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the child restraint is compatible with
your child. Choose a child restraint that is
designed for your child’s height and weight.
Always follow all recommended procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated. Canadian law requires the
top tether strap on forward-facing child
restraints be secured to the designated an-
chor point on the vehicle.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for
infants and children of various sizes. When se-
lecting any child restraint, keep the following
points in mind:
WRS0795
LATCH system lower anchor locations
●
Choose only a restraint with a label certifying
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible
child restraints. This system may also be referred
to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.
With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle
seat belt to secure the child restraint.
●
Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-
tions for proper use and installation of
child restraints could result in serious in-
jury or death of a child or other passen-
gers in a sudden stop or collision:
– Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations
shown in the illustration.
– Do not secure a child restraint in the
center rear seating position using
the LATCH lower anchors. The child
restraint will not be secured properly.
WRS0700
LRS0661
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
LATCH lower anchor location
LATCH lower anchor location
Installing child restraint LATCH lower
anchor attachments
– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-
ing your fingers into the lower anchor
area. Feel to make sure there are no
obstructions over the anchors such
as seat belt webbing or seat cushion
material. The child restraint will not
be secured properly if the lower an-
chors are obstructed.
The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear
of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is
attached to the seatback to help you locate the
LATCH lower anchors.
LATCH compatible child restraints include two
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
be connected to two anchors located at certain
seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-
tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to
secure the child restraint. Check your child re-
straint for a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the in-
structions provided by the child restraint manu-
facturer.
1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Top tether anchor
WARNING
Do not allow cargo to contact the top
tether strap when it is attached to the top
tether anchor. Properly secure the cargo
so it does not contact the top tether strap.
Cargo that is not properly secured or
cargo that contacts the top tether strap
may damage it during a collision. A child
could be seriously injured or killed in a
collision if the top tether strap is
damaged.
LRS0662
WRS0797
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
Top tether anchor point locations
The child restraint top tether strap must be used
when installing the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchor attachments or seat belts. See “Top
tether anchor” for installation instructions.
1
Anchor points
shelf.
are located on the rear parcel
᭺
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-
stalling a child restraint.
When installing a child restraint, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this manual and
those supplied with the child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WRS0801
WRS0802
LRS0673
Rear-facing web-mounted – step 2
Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
Rear-facing – step 3
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-
erly attached to the lower anchors.
3. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attach-
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2
through 4.
LRS0674
WRS0256
Rear-facing – step 4
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the LATCH attachment path. The child re-
straint should not move more than 1 inch (25
mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward
and check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is
not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment
as necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint or try installing by
using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable).
Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve-
hicles.
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision. Also, it can change the opera-
tion of the front passenger air bag. See
“Front passenger air bag and status light”
later in this section.
WRS0256
WRS0761
Rear-facing – step 1
Rear-facing – step 2
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-
stalling a child restraint.
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-
structions for belt routing.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear
seats:
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the front
seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LRS0669
LRS0670
WRS0762
Rear-facing – step 3
Rear-facing – step 4
Rear-facing – step 5
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
5. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while
pulling up on the seat belt.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1
through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint
mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-
stalling a child restraint.
WRS0763
WRS0799
Rear-facing – step 6
Forward-facing web-mounted – step 2
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint using the LATCH system:
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the seat belt path. The child restraint should
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-
erly attached to the lower anchors.
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point. See “Installing top tether strap” in this
section. Do not install child restraints that
require the use of a top tether strap in seat-
ing positions that do not have a top tether
anchor.
1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WRS0800
LRS0671
WRS0697
Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
Forward-facing – step 4
Forward-facing – step 5
3. The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
4. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attach-
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
5. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the LATCH attachment path. The child re-
straint should not move more than 1 inch (25
mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward
and check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is
not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment
as necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable headrest and it is interfering with
the proper child restraint fit, try another seat-
ing position or a different child restraint.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
7. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1
through 6.
The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-
straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit.
If the head restraint is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint when the child restraint
is removed. See “Head restraints” in this
section for head restraint adjustment, re-
moval and installation information.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING
WRS0699
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision. Also, it can change the opera-
tion of the front passenger air bag. See
“Front passenger air bag and status light”
later in this section.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint and it is interfering
with the proper child restraint fit, try another
seating position or a different child restraint.
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –
step 1
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-
stalling a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the
rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in
the rear-facing direction and therefore
must not be used in the front seat.
1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WRS0680
LRS0667
LRS0668
Forward-facing – step 3
Forward-facing – step 4
Forward-facing – step 5
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-
structions for belt routing.
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point (rear seat installation only). See “In-
stalling top tether strap” in this section. Do
not install child restraints that require the use
of a top tether strap in seating positions that
do not have a top tether anchor.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
9. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2
through 8.
WRS0681
WRS0698
Forward-facing – step 7
Forward-facing – step 6
7. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the seat belt path. The child restraint should
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while pulling up on the seat
belt.
1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, consult your NISSAN
dealer for details.
BOOSTER SEATS
Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not used
properly, the risk of a child being injured
in a sudden stop or collision greatly
increases:
WRS0475
LRS0798
Forward-facing – step 10
INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP
10. If the child restraint is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
– Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s face
and neck and the lap portion of the
belt does not cross the stomach.
First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchors (rear outboard seat positions only)
or the seat belt, as applicable.
status light
should illuminate. If this
light is not illuminated see ЉFront passenger
air bag and status lightЉ in this section.
Move the child restraint to another
seating position. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
1
1. Flip up the anchor cover
from the anchor
point which is located directly behind the
child seat.
᭺
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the child’s
arm.
2. Position the top tether strap over the top of
– A booster seat must only be installed
in a seating position that has a
lap/shoulder belt.
2
the seatback
.
᭺
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-
straint mode) is canceled.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
3
point on the rear parcel shelf
.
᭺
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LRS0455
LRS0453
LRS0464
●
Make sure the child’s head will be properly
supported by the booster seat or vehicle
seat. The seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a
1
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated.
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by
several manufacturers. When selecting any
booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
●
Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
low back booster seat
is chosen, the
᭺
vehicle seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a
2
The instructions in this section apply to booster
seat installation in the rear seats or the front
passenger seat.
high back booster seat
should be used.
●
Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.
᭺
●
If the booster seat is compatible with your
vehicle, place the child in the booster seat
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the booster seat is compatible with the
child. Always follow all recommended pro-
cedures.
1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Booster seat installation
CAUTION
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the
Automatic Locking Retractor mode when
using a booster seat with the seat belts.
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety”, “Child Restraint” and “Booster Seats”
sections before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the
rear seat or in the front passenger seat:
LRS0454
WRS0699
Front passenger position
3. The booster seat should be positioned on
the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
1. If you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, move the seat to the rear-
most position.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-
straint to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If
the head restraint is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint when the booster seat is
removed. See “Head restraints”in this sec-
tion for head restraint adjustment, removal
and installation information.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only
place it in a front-facing direction. Always
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
structions.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint and it is interfering
with the proper booster seat fit, try another
seating position or a different booster seat.
PRECAUTIONS ON
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-
tion contains important information concerning
the following systems:
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
●
Driver and passenger supplemental front-
impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag
System)
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.
●
●
●
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag
WRS0475
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-
mental air bag
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-
tions for properly fastening a seat belt
shown in “Three-point type seat belt with
retractor” earlier in this section.
Seat belt with pretensioner
Supplemental front-impact air bag system:
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help
cushion the impact force to the head and chest of
the driver and front passenger in certain frontal
collisions.
status light
may or may not illuminate,
depending on the size of the child and the
type of booster seat being used. See “Front
passenger air bag and status light” later in
this section.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag system: This system can help
cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvic
area of the driver and front passenger in certain
side-impact collisions. The supplemental side air
bag is designed to inflate on the side where the
vehicle is impacted.
1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-
mental air bag system: This system can help
cushion the impact force to the head of occu-
pants in front and rear outboard seating positions
in certain side-impact collisions. The curtain
side-impact air bags are designed to inflate on
the side where the vehicle is impacted.
These supplemental restraint systems are de-
signed to supplement the crash protection pro-
vided by the driver and front passenger seat belts
and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts
should always be correctly worn and the occu-
pant seated a suitable distance away from the
steering wheel, instrument panel and door finish-
ers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this section for
instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.)
WRS0031
● The seat belts and the front air bags are
most effective when you are sitting well
back and upright in the seat. The front
air bags inflate with great force. Even
with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-
tem, if you are unrestrained, leaning
forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-
tion in any way, you are at greater risk of
injury or death in a crash. You may also
receive serious or fatal injuries from the
front air bag if you are up against it
when it inflates. Always sit back against
the seatback and as far away as practi-
cal from the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel. Always use the seat belts.
WARNING
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position.
● The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact, rear
impact, rollover, or lower severity fron-
tal collision. Always wear your seat
belts to help reduce the risk or severity
of injury in various kinds of accidents.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.
● The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag status
light is lit or if the front passenger seat
is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” later in this
section.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
Advanced Air Bag System monitors the
severity of a collision and seat belt us-
age then inflates the air bags. Failure to
properly wear seat belts can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an
accident.
● The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor
(pattern sensor) that turns the front
passenger air bag OFF under some
conditions. This sensor is only used in
this seat. Failure to be properly seated
and wearing the seat belt can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an acci-
dent. See “Front passenger air bag and
status light” later in this section.
ARS1133
● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-
ing wheel. Placing them inside the
steering wheel rim could increase the
risk that they are injured when the front
air bag inflates.
1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ARS1041
ARS1042
ARS1043
WARNING
● Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them in
your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ARS1044
ARS1045
ARS1046
WARNING
● Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they
are not properly restrained. Pre-teens
and children should be properly re-
strained in the rear seat, if possible.
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. An in-
flating front air bag could seriously in-
jure or kill your child. See “Child re-
straints” earlier in this section for
details.
1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
● The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective when
you are sitting well back and upright in
the seat with both feet on the floor. The
side air bag and curtain air bag inflate
with great force. Do not allow anyone to
place their hand, leg or face near the
side air bag on the side of the seatback
of the front seat or near the side roof
rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the
front seats or rear outboard seats to
extend their hand out of the window or
lean against the door. Some examples
of dangerous riding positions are
shown in the previous illustrations.
SSS0101
WRS0032
WARNING
WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain
side-impact supplemental air bags:
● When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front seat.
If the side air bag inflates, you may be
seriously injured. Be especially careful
with children, who should always be
properly restrained. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
● The side air bags and curtain air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event of
a frontal impact, rear impact, rollover or
lower severity side collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce the
risk or severity of injury in various kinds
of accidents.
● Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with side
air bag inflation.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0159
SSS0162
1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag inflators
2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bags
3. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag modules
4. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
5. Supplemental front-impact air bag
modules
6. Crash zone sensor
7. Seat belt buckle switches on driver’s
and passenger’s side
8. Occupant classification sensor
(pattern sensor)
9. Occupant classification system control
unit
10. Seat belt with pretensioner
11. Side satellite sensor
WRS0909
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the front passenger, the occupant classification
sensor is also monitored. Based on information
from the sensors, only one front air bag may
inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity
and whether the front occupants are belted or
unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air
bag may be automatically turned OFF under
some conditions, depending on the information
provided by the occupant classification sensor. If
the front passenger air bag is OFF, the passenger
air bag status light will be illuminated (if the seat is
unoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, but
the air bag will be off). See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” later in this section for
further details. One front air bag inflating does not
indicate improper performance of the system.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the face and
chest of the front occupants. They can help save
lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an
inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions
or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide
restraint to the lower body.
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-
vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front
passenger seats. This system is designed to
meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-
lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,
all of the information, cautions and warn-
ings in this manual still apply and must be
followed.
Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts
should be correctly worn and the driver and pas-
senger seated upright as far as practical away
from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The
front air bags inflate quickly in order to help
protect the front occupants. Because of this, the
force of the front air bag inflating can increase the
risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is
against, the front air bag module during inflation.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is
located in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is
mounted in the dashboard above the glove box.
The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher
severity frontal collisions, although they may in-
flate if the forces in another type of collision are
similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.
They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper front air bag system opera-
tion.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
If you have any questions about your air bag
system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN
dealer. If you are considering modification of your
vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact
NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the
front of this Owner’s Manual.
The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise
may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a
fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual
stage air bag inflators. It also monitors informa-
tion from the crash zone sensor, the Air bag
Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors and
the occupant classification sensor (pattern sen-
sor). Inflator operation is based on the severity of
a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For
1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status light
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such
as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-
matically turned OFF.
The front passenger air bag status light
located on the instrument panel above the radio
controls. The light operates as follows:
is
●
●
Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The
OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF
and will not inflate in a crash.
is
The occupant classification sensor (pattern sen-
sor) is in the front passenger seat cushion and is
designed to detect an occupant and objects on
the seat. For example, if a child is in the front
passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag System is
designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in
accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child
restraint of the type specified in the regulations is
on the seat, the occupant classification sensor
can detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF.
Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,
child or child restraint as outlined in this
section: The
illuminates to indicate
that the front passenger air bag is OFF and
will not inflate in a crash.
WRS0475
●
Occupied passenger seat and the passen-
ger meets the conditions outlined in this
Front passenger air bag and status light
section: The light
that the front passenger air bag is opera-
tional.
is OFF to indicate
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
properly seated and using the seat belt as out-
lined in this manual should not cause the passen-
ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For
small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the
occupant does not sit in the seat properly (for
example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an
edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of
position), this could cause the sensor to turn the
air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and
wearing the seat belt properly for the most effec-
tive protection by the seat belt and supplemental
air bag.
WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF under some con-
ditions. Read this section carefully to
learn how it operates. Proper use of the
seat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-
essary for most effective protection. Fail-
ure to follow all instructions in this
manual concerning the use of seats, seat
belts and child restraints can increase the
risk or severity of injury in an accident.
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-
matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated
under some conditions as described below in
accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front
passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a
crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your
vehicle are not part of this system.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-
dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child
restraints and booster seats be properly installed
in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant
classification sensor is designed to operate as
described above to turn the front passenger air
bag OFF for specified child restraints as required
by the regulations. Failing to properly secure
child restraints and to use the ALR mode (child
restraint mode) may allow the restraint to tip or
move in an accident or sudden stop. This can
also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a
crash instead of being OFF. See “Child re-
straints” earlier in this section for proper use and
installation.
The light will not illuminate when the front pas-
senger seat is unoccupied.
The air bag system and passenger air bag status
light will take a few seconds to register a change
in the passenger seat status. However, if the seat
becomes unoccupied, the air bag status light will
remain off.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-
ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating
that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the
person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat
properly.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
, located in the meter and gauges area
light
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,
the passenger air bag status light may or may not
be illuminated, depending on the size of the child
and the type of child restraint being used. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that
the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be
that the child restraint or seat belt is not being
used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is
installed properly, the seat belt is used properly
and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
in the center of the instrument panel, will blink.
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Other supplemental front-impact air bag
precautions
WARNING
● Do not place any objects on the steer-
ing wheel pad or on the instrument
panel. Also, do not place any objects
between any occupant and the steering
wheel or instrument panel. Such ob-
jects may become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the front air
bags inflate.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the
passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a
crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
the object being detected by the occupant clas-
sification sensor. Other conditions could also
result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is
standing on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants
are seated and restrained properly.
If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-
minate even though you believe that the child
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are
properly positioned, the system may be sensing
an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is
OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the
system is OFF by using a special tool. However,
until you have confirmed with your dealer that
your air bag is working properly, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
Using the passenger air bag status light, you can
monitor when the front passenger air bag is au-
tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.
1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Do not place objects with sharp edges
on the seat. Also, do not place heavy
objects on the seat that will leave per-
manent impressions in the seat. Such
objects can damage the seat or occu-
pant classification sensor (pattern sen-
sor). This can affect the operation of the
air bag system and result in serious
personal injury.
● Tampering with the front air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
Tampering includes changes to the
steering wheel and the instrument
panel assembly by placing material
over the steering wheel pad and above
the instrument panel or by installing
additional trim material around the air
bag system.
● Work on and around the front air bag
system should be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
ment should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. The Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) wiring should not be
modified or disconnected. Unautho-
rized electrical test equipment and
probing devices should not be used on
the air bag system.
● Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classifica-
tion sensor. This can also affect the
operation of the air bag system and
result in serious personal injury.
● Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing mate-
rial on the seat cushion or by installing
additional trim material, such as seat
covers, on the seat that are not specifi-
cally designed to assure proper air bag
operation. Additionally, do not stow any
objects under the front passenger seat
or the seat cushion and seatback. Such
objects may interfere with the proper
operation of the occupant classifica-
tion sensor.
● A cracked windshield should be re-
placed immediately by a qualified re-
pair facility. A cracked windshield could
affect the function of the supplemental
air bag system.
● Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will be
hot. Do not touch them; you may se-
verely burn yourself.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the front air bag system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This is
to prevent accidental inflation of the
supplemental air bag or damage to the
supplemental air bag system.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect the
front air bag system. Tampering with
the seat belt system may result in seri-
ous personal injury.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
inflate if the forces in another type of collision are
similar to those of a higher severity side impact.
They are designed to inflate on the side where the
vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in cer-
tain side collisions.
practical from the door finishers and side roof
rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate
quickly in order to help protect the front occu-
pants. Because of this, the force of the side air
bag and curtain air bag inflating can increase the
risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is
against, these air bag modules during inflation.
The side air bags and curtain air bag will deflate
quickly after the collision is over.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper side air bag and curtain air
bag operation.
When the side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed
by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken
not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breathing con-
dition should get fresh air promptly.
The side air bags and curtain air bags op-
erate only when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.
LRS0259
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and roof-
mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag systems
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the chest and
pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain air
bags help to cushion the impact force to the head
of occupants in the front and rear outboard seat-
ing positions. They can help save lives and re-
duce serious injuries. However, an inflating side
air bag and curtain air bag may cause abrasions
or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air
bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.
WARNING
The side air bags are located in the outside of the
seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags
are located in the side roof rails. These systems
are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help
reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occu-
pants. However, all of the information, cau-
tions and warnings in this manual still ap-
ply and must be followed. The side air bags
and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in
higher severity side collisions, although they may
● Do not place any objects near the seat-
back of the front seats. Also, do not
place any objects (an umbrella, bag,
etc.) between the front door finisher
and the front seat. Such objects may
become dangerous projectiles and
cause injury if a side air bag inflates.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and passenger seated upright as far as
practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat
passengers should be seated as far away as
1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Right after inflation, several side air bag
and curtain air bag system components
will be hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.
● Work around and on the side air bag
and curtain air bag system should be
done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation
of electrical equipment should also be
done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wir-
ing harnesses* should not be modified
or disconnected. Unauthorized electri-
cal test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the side air bag
or curtain air bag system.
● If the vehicle becomes involved in a
frontal collision but a pretensioner is
not activated, be sure to have the pre-
tensioner system checked and, if nec-
essary, replaced by your NISSAN
dealer.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the side air bag and curtain air bag
systems. This is to prevent damage to or
accidental inflation of the side air bag
and curtain air bag or damage to the
side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the pretensioner system. This is to pre-
vent damage to or accidental activation
of the pretensioners. Tampering with
the pretensioner system may result in
serious personal injury.
* The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
● Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-
pension system or side panel. This
could affect proper operation of the
side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the side air bag and
curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to
the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.
● Work around and on the pretensioner
system should be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
ment should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the pretensioner system.
● Tampering with the side air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
For example, do not change the front
seats by placing material near the seat-
backs or by installing additional trim
material, such as seat covers, around
the side air bag.
Seat belts with pretensioners (front
seats)
● If you need to dispose of a pretensioner
or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.
WARNING
● The pretensioners cannot be reused af-
ter activation. They must be replaced
together with the retractor and buckle
as a unit.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The pretensioner system activates in conjunction
with the front air bag system. Working with the
seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt
when the vehicle becomes involved in certain
types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat
occupants.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the pretensioner system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
The pretensioner is encased within the seat belt
retractor. These seat belts are used the same way
as conventional seat belts.
When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-
leased and a loud noise may be heard. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
WRS0895
1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (located
on the sun visors)
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LABELS
After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow
the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to
reduce forces against the chest.
Warning labels about the supplemental front-
impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as
shown in the illustration.
If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner sys-
tem, the supplemental air bag warning
light
will not come on, will flash intermit-
tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on
after the ignition switch has been placed in the
ON or START position. In this case, the preten-
sioner system may not function properly. It must
be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the
nearest NISSAN dealer.
1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition is placed in the ON position,
the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates
for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This
means the system is operational.
Repair and replacement procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags
and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a
one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is
damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light
remains illuminated after inflation has occurred.
Repair and replacement of these supplemental
air bag systems should be done only by a
NISSAN dealer.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag and curtain air bag and
pretensioner systems need servicing:
●
●
●
The supplemental air bag warning light re-
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
When maintenance work is required on the ve-
hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
bags, pretensioners and related parts should be
pointed out to the person performing the mainte-
nance. The ignition should always be in the LOCK
position when working under the hood or inside
the vehicle.
The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
LRS0100
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LIGHT
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air
bag and curtain air bag or pretensioner systems
may not operate properly. They must be checked
and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest
NISSAN dealer.
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying in the instrument panel, moni-
WARNING
● Once a front air bag, side air bag, or
curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag
module will not function again and
must be replaced. Additionally, if any of
the front air bags inflate, the activated
pretensioners must also be replaced.
The air bag module and pretensioners
should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.
The air bag module and pretensioners
cannot be repaired.
tors the circuits of the supplemental front-impact
air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag and seat belt pretensioner
systems. The monitored circuits include the Air
bag Control Unit (ACU), crash zone sensor, sat-
ellite sensors, occupant classification system,
front air bag modules, side air bag modules,
curtain air bag modules, pretensioners and all
related wiring.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag and/or preten-
sioner systems will not operate in an ac-
cident. To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle checked by a
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
air bag systems and the pretensioner
system should be inspected by
a
NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to
the front end or side portion of the
vehicle.
● If you need to dispose of a supplemen-
tal air bag or pretensioners or scrap the
vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Incor-
rect disposal procedures could cause
personal injury.
1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
High voltage battery status meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Compass display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . 2-9
Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Vehicle information display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
How to use the vehicle information display . . . . . . .2-18
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Heated seats (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Map pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Sunglasses holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Covered storage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Cargo net (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Automatic moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Console light (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Personal Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
HomeLinkா universal transceiver (if so equipped). . . . .2-47
Programming HomeLinkா. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
Programming HomeLinkா for Canadian
Operating the HomeLinkா universal
transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Clearing the programmed information. . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Rolling code programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Reprogramming a single HomeLinkா button . . . . . .2-50
If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
7.
Windshield wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-28)
8.
9.
Ignition switch (P. 5-7)
Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-33)
10. Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 2-15)
11. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-34)
12. Glove box (P. 2-38)
13. Navigation system* (if so equipped)
(P. 4-2)
14. Heater and air conditioner (P. 4-19)
15. Shift selector (P. 5-11)
16. Covered storage box (P.2-39)
17. Audio system controls (P. 4-22)
18. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls
(P. 3-23)
19. Vehicle information display controls
(P. 2-18)
20. Hood release (P. 3-18)
21. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ port (P. 3-2)
Trunk opener (P. 3-18)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).
WIC1601
1.
2.
3.
Vents (P. 4-18)
4.
5.
Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
Headlight/turn signal switch (P. 2-29)
Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped)/Bluetoothா Hands-free
Phone System (if so equipped)
(P. 4-82, 4-86)
Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-34, 2-33)
Cruise control main/set switch
(P. 5-15)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
6.
2-2 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
METERS AND GAUGES
WIC1260
1. Speedometer
2. Odometer
3. Change button
WIC1602
1. Power meter
6. Vehicle Information Display
2. Speedometer
3. Fuel gauge
4. High voltage battery status meter
5. Odometer/twin trip odometer/trip com-
puter
Instruments and controls 2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.
Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
The odometer records the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of
individual trips.
WIC1261
LIC1107
Changing the display:
POWER METER
Pushing the change button changes the display
as follows:
The power meter indicates the total amount of
power in the Hybrid System. In the start position,
1
, the READY light illuminates and the vehicle
can be started and driven.
᭺
Trip
→ Trip
→ Trip
Resetting the trip odometer:
1
When the power meter is in the
Hybrid System is being charged.
range, the
᭺
Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec-
ond resets the currently displayed trip odometer
to zero.
2-4 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The
indicates that the fuel-filler door is
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
CAUTION
● If the low fuel warning appears on the
vehicle information display indicator
while driving with the low fuel level,
refill the fuel tank immediately and start
the hybrid system. Do not attempt to
start (READY mode) and/or drive the
vehicle if the fuel tank is empty. The
engine will not be able to start to re-
charge the high voltage battery and the
high voltage battery will become dis-
charged and may become damaged or
rendered inoperable.
WIC1603
LIC1060
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY STATUS
METER
FUEL GAUGE
● If the vehicle runs out of fuel,
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level
in the tank.
The gauge indicates the amount of power that is
left in the high voltage battery. The ideal battery
the
Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) may come on. Refuel immediately.
After a few driving trips, the
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
1
charge is within the normal range
when the
᭺
gauge needle points within the zone shown in the
illustration.
light should turn off. If the light remains
on after a few driving trips, have the
vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer.
The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
The low fuel warning light comes on when the
amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
● For additional information, see “Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL)” later in
this section.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-
ters E (Empty).
Instruments and controls 2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)
This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in-
dicates the direction of the vehicle’s heading.
You can also calibrate the compass by driving
your vehicle on your everyday route. The com-
pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three
complete circles.
With the ignition switch placed in the ON posi-
tion, press the
button as described in the
chart below to activate various features of the
automatic anti-glare rearview mirror.
COMPASS DISPLAY
Push the
button when the ignition switch is
Push and hold
Feature:
placed in the ON position. The direction will be
displayed.
(Push button again for about 1 sec-
ond to change settings)
the
button for about:
1 second
5 seconds
9 seconds
Compass display toggles on/off
Compass zone can be changed to
correct false compass readings
Compass enters calibration mode
LIC1487
Push the
button for about 1 second when
For information about the automatic anti-glare
feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview
mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-
ments” section.
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position to
1
toggle the compass display
display will indicate the direction of the vehicle’s
heading.
on or off. The
᭺
N: North
E: East
S: South
W: West
If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by
driving the vehicle in three complete circles at
less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).
2-6 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone variation change procedure
The difference between magnetic north and geo-
graphical north is known as variance. In some
areas, this difference can sometimes be great
enough to cause false compass readings. Follow
these instructions to set the variance for your
particular location if this happens:
1. Press and hold the
button for about 5
seconds. The current zone number will ap-
pear in the display. Release the button.
2. Find your current location on the zone map.
Refer to the illustration.
3. Press the
button repeatedly to toggle
through the zone numbers until the desired
number appears in the display. Once you
have selected a zone number, the display
will show a compass direction within a few
seconds.
NOTE:
Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.
Inaccurate compass direction:
The compass display is equipped with automatic
correction function. If the correct direction is not
shown, follow this procedure.
WIC0355
Instruments and controls 2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. With the display turned on, press and hold
the switch for about 9 seconds. The
CAUTION
● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,
which are attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet. They affect the op-
eration of the compass.
display will read “C.”
2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle
in three complete circles at a maximum
speed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).
● When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror as it may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter the
mirror housing.
3. After completing the circles the display
should return to normal.
●
If the compass deviates from the correct
indication soon after repeated adjustment,
have the compass checked at an authorized
NISSAN dealer.
●
The compass may not indicate the correct
compass point in tunnels or while driving up
or down a steep hill. (The compass returns
to the correct compass point when the ve-
hicle moves to an area where the geomag-
netism is stabilized.)
2-8 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Hybrid System warning light
Low tire pressure warning light
High beam indicator light (blue)
or
or
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light
Low temperature indicator light (blue)
Brake warning light (red)
12–volt battery charge warning light
Electric power steering warning light
Master warning light
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Ready operation indicator light (green)
Security indicator light
Seat belt warning light and chime
Supplemental air bag warning light
Electronically controlled brake warning light
(yellow)
Engine oil pressure warning light
Vehicle Dynamic Control warning light
Slip indicator light
High temperature warning light (red)
Electronically controlled Continuously Variable
Transmission (eCVT) position indicator light
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
High voltage battery warning light
Front passenger air bag status light
The following lights come on when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position before the
READY light comes on indicating the Hybrid Sys-
tem is activated:
CHECKING BULBS
,
or
,
,
,
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake
and place the ignition switch in the ON position
without starting the Hybrid System. The following
lights will come on:
,
,
,
,
.
or
,
,
,
.
Instruments and controls 2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following light comes on briefly and then
goes off:
normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See
ЉBrake systemЉ in the ЉStarting and drivingЉ sec-
tion.
Hydraulic brake system warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position and the Hybrid System is in the READY
mode, the light warns that the hydraulic brake
system is not functioning properly. If the brake
warning light comes on with the parking brake not
applied when the Hybrid System is in READY
position, perform the following:
or
Brake warning light
(red)
If any light fails to come on, it may indicate
a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the
electrical system. Have the system repaired
promptly.
This light preforms the following functions for the
parking brake and brake systems.
WARNING LIGHTS
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid
as necessary. See “Brake fluid”in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
●
●
●
Parking brake indicator
For additional information on warnings and indi-
cators, see “Vehicle information display” later in
this section.
Low brake fluid warning light
Hydraulic brake system warning light
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the
warning system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
or
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light
Parking brake indicator
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position and the Hybrid System is in the READY
mode, the light comes on when the parking brake
is applied.
If the hydraulic brake warning light comes on
when the parking brake is not applied and the
electronically controlled brake system warning
light also comes on, stop the vehicle immedi-
ately and call a NISSAN dealer.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light illuminates. After the Hybrid System
is in the READY mode, the ABS warning light
turns off.
Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position and the Hybrid System is in the READY
mode, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.
Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as
necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Maintenance
and do-it-yourself” section of this manual. If the
brake fluid level is correct, see “Hydraulic brake
system warning light” in this section.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the
Hybrid System is running, or while driving, it may
indicate the ABS is not functioning properly.
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-
tion is turned off. The brake system then operates
2-10 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Your brake system may not be working
properly if both the brake warning light
and electronically controlled brake sys-
tem warning light come on when the
Hybrid System is in READY mode and
the parking brake is not applied. Driving
could be dangerous. If you judge it to be
safe, drive carefully to the nearest ser-
vice station for repairs. Otherwise, have
your vehicle towed because driving
could be dangerous.
WARNING
CAUTION
● Your brake system may not be working
properly if the warning light is on. Driv-
ing could be dangerous. If you judge it
to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest
service station for repairs. Otherwise,
have your vehicle towed because driv-
ing it could be dangerous.
The charging system may not be function-
ing properly if the charge warning light
comes on while the Hybrid System is run-
ning. The Hybrid System will stop operat-
ing when the 12-volt battery becomes dis-
charged. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your NISSAN
dealer.
● Pressing the brake pedal with the igni-
tion switch placed in the OFF position
and/or a low brake fluid level may in-
crease your stopping distance and
braking will require greater pedal effort
as well as pedal travel.
Electric power steering
warning light
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator
WARNING
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake
warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) waning light illuminate, it may indicate the
ABS is not functioning properly. Have the brake
system checked, and if necessary, repaired by a
NISSAN dealer promptly. Avoid high-speed driv-
ing and abrupt braking. (See “Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) warning light” in this section.)
● If the brake fluid level is below the
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
● If the ignition switch is not placed in the
ON position and the Hybrid System is
not in the READY mode, the power as-
sist for the steering will not work. Steer-
ing will be harder to operate.
● When the power steering warning light
illuminates with the Hybrid System in
the READY mode, there will be no
power assist for the steering. You will
still have control of the vehicle but the
steering will be harder to operate. Have
the power steering system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
12–volt battery charge warning
light
If this light comes on while the Hybrid System is
running, it may indicate the 12-volt battery charg-
ing system is not functioning properly. See a
NISSAN dealer immediately.
Instruments and controls 2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the power steering warning light illumi-
nates. After the Hybrid System is in the READY
mode, the power steering warning light turns off.
This indicates the power steering system is op-
erational.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position and the Hybrid System is in the READY
mode, the light stays on for about 2 seconds. If
the light comes on at any other time, it may
indicate the regenerative brake and/or the elec-
tronically controlled brake systems are not func-
tioning properly. Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
Engine oil pressure warning
light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the
light flickers or comes on during normal driving,
pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine
immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other
authorized repair shop.
If the power steering warning light illuminates
while the Hybrid System is in the READY mode, it
may indicate the power steering system is not
functioning properly and may need servicing.
Have the power steering system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
If the hydraulic brake warning light also comes on
with the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-
hicle immediately and call a NISSAN dealer. For
additional information, see ЉBrake systemЉ in
ЉStarting and DrivingЉ section.
The engine oil pressure warning light is not
designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the
dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
When the power steering warning light illumi-
nates with the Hybrid System in the READY
mode, there will be no power assist for the steer-
ing but you will still have control of the vehicle. At
this time, greater steering effort is required to
operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp
turns and at low speeds.
CAUTION
WARNING
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause se-
rious damage to the engine almost imme-
diately. Such damage is not covered by
warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it
is safe to do so.
Your brake system may not be working
properly if both the brake warning light
and electronically controlled brake sys-
tem warning light come on when the Hy-
brid System is in READY mode and the
parking brake is not applied. Driving could
be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe,
drive carefully to the nearest service sta-
tion for repairs. Otherwise, have your ve-
hicle towed because driving could be
dangerous.
See “Power steering”in the “Starting and driving”
section.
High temperature warning light
(red)
Electronically controlled brake
warning light (yellow)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the high temperature warning light illu-
minates and then turns off. This indicates that the
high temperature sensor in the engine coolant
system is operational.
This light functions for both the regenerative
brake and electronically controlled brake sys-
tems.
2-12 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low
tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not
functioning properly.
Hybrid system warning light
CAUTION
If the high temperature warning light illu-
minates while the engine is running, it
may indicate the engine temperature is
extremely high. Stop the vehicle safely as
soon as possible. If the vehicle is over-
heated, continuing vehicle operation may
seriously damage the engine. See “If your
vehicle overheats”in the “In case of emer-
gency” section.
The hybrid system warning light comes on when:
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about 1 second
and turns off.
●
●
The amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
There is a problem with the traction motor or
other Hybrid System components.
Low tire pressure warning:
If the fuel gauge indicates the fuel level is low,
refill the fuel tank immediately. See “Fuel gauge”
earlier in this section. After the fuel tank is filled,
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position,
and the Hybrid System is in the READY mode,
the hybrid system warning light should be off.
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate.
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust the
tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom-
mended COLD tire pressure shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label located
in the driver’s door opening. The low tire
pressure warning light does not automati-
cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-
justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-
ommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low
tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pres-
sure gauge to check the tire pressure.
High-voltage battery warning
light
If the fuel gauge indicates a sufficient fuel level, or
if the hybrid system warning light comes on after
refilling the tank, there may be a problem with the
traction motor or other Hybrid System compo-
nents. Stop your vehicle immediately and contact
your NISSAN dealer.
This light may appear during the following condi-
tions:
●
The high voltage battery voltage drops due
to the shift selector being left in “N”.
– The Hybrid System will work properly if
the shift selector is placed in “P” and the
light goes off.
Low tire pressure warning light
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire
pressure of all tires except the spare.
●
The high voltage battery is discharged.
– If this light comes on when the READY
light is on, stop your vehicle and contact
your NISSAN dealer
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving”section and in the “In case of emergency”
section.
Instruments and controls 2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TPMS malfunction:
● If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,
pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Driving with under-inflated tires may
permanently damage the tires and in-
crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-
rious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could re-
sult in serious personal injury. Check
the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust
the tire pressure to the recommended
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label located
in the driver’s door opening to turn the
low tire pressure warning light OFF. If
the light still comes on while driving
after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire
may be flat. If you have a flat tire, re-
place it with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low
tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position. The light will remain on
after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
● The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
check the tire pressure regularly.
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section.
● If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the
TPMS may not operate correctly.
● Be sure to install the specified size of
tires to the 4 wheels correctly.
WARNING
● If the light does not illuminate with the
ignition switch placed in the ON posi-
tion, have the vehicle checked by a
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
Master warning light
This light comes on when various vehicle infor-
mation display warnings appear.
Seat belt warning light and
chime
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
The light and chime remind you to fasten your
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the
ignition switch is placed in the ON or START
position and remains illuminated until the driver’s
seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime
sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s
seat belt is securely fastened.
2-14 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if
the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened
when the front passenger’s seat is occupied. For
7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position, the system does not activate the
warning light for the front passenger.
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental
restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-
tensioners may not function properly. For addi-
tional details, see “Supplemental restraint sys-
tem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual.
seconds at above 22 mph. If the light remains on,
have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.
While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is
operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear
the system working when starting the vehicle or
accelerating, but this is normal.
Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system” section
for precautions on seat belt usage.
INDICATOR LIGHTS
WARNING
For additional information on warnings and indi-
cators, see “Vehicle information display” later in
this section.
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag systems
and/or pretensioner systems will not op-
erate in an accident. To help avoid injury
to yourself or others, have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible.
Supplemental air bag warning
light
Electronically controlled
Continuously Variable
Transmission (eCVT) position
indicator light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or
START position, the supplemental air bag warn-
ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then
turns off. This means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and preten-
sioner systems need servicing and your vehicle
must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:
Vehicle Dynamic Control
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this indicator light shows the shift selec-
tor position. See “Driving the vehicle” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual.
The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on
when you place the ignition switch in the ON
position and the Hybrid System is in the READY
mode. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds
if the system is operational.
●
●
●
The supplemental air bag warning light re-
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
Front passenger air bag status
light
The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
The front passenger air bag status light (
)
The light also comes on when the power of the
12-volt battery is reduced or the battery cable is
disconnected. The light will turn off automatically
after the vehicle is driven slightly for more than 5
will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be
OFF depending on how the front passenger seat
is being used.
The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
Instruments and controls 2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For front passenger air bag status light operation,
see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in
the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section of this manual.
Operation
Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in
one of two ways:
If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks
while the Hybrid System is in READY mode, it
may indicate a potential emission control mal-
function.
●
Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — An
emission control system malfunction has
been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If
the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten
or install the cap and continue to drive the
High beam indicator light
(blue)
The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come
on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,
or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make
sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons
(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
This blue light comes on when the headlight high
beams are on and goes out when the low beams
are selected.
vehicle. The
a few driving trips. If the
turn off after a few driving trips, have the
vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You
do not need to have your vehicle towed to
the dealer.
light should turn off after
light does not
The high beam indicator light also comes on
when the passing signal is activated.
Low temperature indicator
light (blue)
After a few driving trips, the
light should
turn off if no other potential emission control
system malfunction exists.
●
Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — An
engine misfire has been detected which may
damage the emission control system. To re-
duce or avoid emission control system dam-
age:
The low temperature indicator light illuminates
when the engine coolant temperature is low.
If this indicator light comes on steady for 20
seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when
the engine is not running, it indicates that the
vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-
tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-
ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test”in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the low temperature indicator light illu-
minates and then turns off after the engine cool-
ant has warmed up.
– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH
(72 km/h).
If the low temperature indicator light stays illumi-
nated after the engine has sufficiently warmed
up, it may indicate the low temperature sensor in
the engine coolant system is not functioning
properly and may need servicing. Have the sys-
tem checked, and if necessary repaired, by a
NISSAN dealer promptly.
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
– avoid steep uphill grades.
– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled or towed.
2-16 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking
and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected
by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.
Slip indicator light
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
This indicator light will blink when the traction
control system, Vehicle Dynamic Control System
or Anti-lock Braking System is limiting wheel
spin. Slippery road conditions may exist if the slip
indicator blinks on. If this happens, adjust your
driving accordingly.
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.
When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it
makes a high pitched scraping sound when the
vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake
pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without hav-
ing the emission control system checked
and repaired as necessary could lead to
poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,
and possible damage to the emission con-
trol system.
The slip indicator light also comes on when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position and
the Hybrid System is in the READY mode. The
light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the
system is operational. If the light does not come
on or does not go off, have the system checked
by a NISSAN dealer.
Key reminder chime
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened
while the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or
OFF position or placed in the OFF or LOCK
position with the Intelligent Key left in the Intelli-
gent Key port. Make sure the ignition switch is
placed in the LOCK position, and take the Intel-
ligent Key with you when leaving the vehicle.
Ready operation indicator light
(green)
Turn signal/hazard indicator
lights
The ready indicator light illuminates when the
Hybrid System is powered and the vehicle may
be driven.
Light reminder chime
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal
switch is activated.
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-
tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is
opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.
Security indicator light
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned
on.
This light blinks when the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position.
Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-
ing the vehicle.
The blinking security indicator light indicates that
the security systems equipped on the vehicle are
operational.
For additional information, see “Security sys-
tems” later in this section.
Instruments and controls 2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ door buzzer
The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if the
Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when
locking the doors. When the buzzer sounds, be
sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent
Key. See “NISSAN Intelligent Key™” in the “Pre-
driving checks and adjustments” section.
WIC1102
LIC1103
1
The vehicle information display
is located on
᭺
HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE
INFORMATION DISPLAY
the bottom of the speedometer. It displays such
items as:
Press the
button, located on the instru-
●
●
●
●
cruise control system information
Intelligent Key operation information
some indicators and warnings
other information
ment panel just behind the steering wheel, to
display the following modes:
MPG → MPG/MPH → Time/Miles → Range →
Exterior Temperature → Setting → Warning
For details about the Intelligent Key, see
“NISSAN Intelligent Key™” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section.
2-18 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIC1093
LIC1097
WIC1266
Fuel Economy mode
Average speed mode
Time/Miles (km) mode
The fuel economy mode can be selected to dis-
play the instant fuel economy since the last reset.
The average speed mode can be selected to
display the average miles per gallon and miles per
hour since the last reset.
The time/miles (km) mode can be selected to
show the time and distance driven since the last
reset.
Instruments and controls 2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIC1095
LIC1096
LIC1043
Range mode
Exterior Temperature mode
Setting mode
The range mode can be selected to give you an
estimation of the distance that can be driven
before refueling. The range is constantly calcu-
lated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank
and the actual fuel consumption.
The exterior temperature mode can be selected
to provide you with the temperature outside of
your vehicle.
The setting mode allows you to set reminders or
preferences for alerts, maintenance intervals or
language displays.
In the setting mode screen press
to:
to move
●
●
●
Alert
Maintenance
Display
and press
to select the menu.
2-20 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIC1044
LIC1046
LIC1045
Alert mode
Reset mode
Maintenance mode
The alert mode allows you to set alerts notifying
you of time to rest or icy conditions.
The reset mode can be selected in any screen
that allows for preferences to be programmed.
Once the screen is selected, you have the option
to reset the selected distances or time to a new
setting.
The maintenance mode allows you to set alerts
for the reminding of maintenance intervals for the
following:
The time to rest alert lets you know when you
have been traveling for a long time and may need
a break.
●
●
●
●
engine oil
oil filter
tires
The icy alert notifies you that icy driving condi-
tions may exist.
other
Set a desired interval by pushing
to high-
light the maintenance field and pressing
.
The reset mode will open up and allow you to
enter the desired distance.
Instruments and controls 2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIC1047
LIC1098
Display mode
Warning mode
The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when
selecting the “Language/Unit” key and
The warning mode can be selected to view any
warnings that may be present. Once the screen is
selected you have the option of skipping the
warning or viewing it in detail.
pressing
.
Language: English or French
Warnings can be present for issues such as an
open door or low fuel. For more information about
potential warnings see “Vehicle information dis-
play warnings and indicators”later in this section.
Unit: US — mile, °F, MPG
Metric — km, °C, L/100 km
You can select the language and unit using
the
button and pressing
.
The settings are automatically saved when you
exit the menu by pressing the BACK button or
any other mode button.
2-22 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WIC1558
4. Low windshield-washer fluid warning
5. No key warning
8. Cruise main switch indicator
9. Cruise set switch indicator
10. Hybrid system operation indicator
11. EV mode indicator
Vehicle information display warnings
and indicators
1. Door and trunk open warning
2. Push warning
6. Parking brake indicator
7. Shift P warning
3. Low fuel warning
Instruments and controls 2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ insertion indicator
13. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ removal indicator
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
2. When the door is closed with the Intelligent
Key left outside the vehicle and the ignition
switch is placed in the ACC or ON position.
A chime will also sound.
This warning illuminates when the windshield-
washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-
washer fluid as necessary. See “Windshield-
washer fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
14. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ battery discharge
indicator
Parking brake warning
Door and trunk open warning
This warning illuminates when the parking brake
is set and the vehicle is driven.
No key warning
This warning illuminates when a door or the trunk
has been opened when the engine is running.
This warning illuminates following two condi-
tions:
SHIFT P warning
Push warning
This warning may appear during the following
conditions:
1. When the ignition switch is pushed and the
Intelligent Key cannot be recognized by the
system. If this warning illuminates, you can-
not start the engine.
After the Shift P warning illuminates, the Push
warning will illuminate if the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC position when the shift selec-
tor is moved to the P (Park) position.
– the ignition switch is pushed to stop the Hy-
brid System with the shift selector in any po-
sition except in the “P” position,
Check for the following causes and perform
the assigned remedies:
See “Shift P warning”in this section for additional
information.
– the high voltage battery drops because the
transmission is in the “N” position,
– The battery of the Intelligent Key carried
with you is discharged completely. Re-
place the battery with a new one.
To turn off the Push warning, place the ignition
switch in the ON position and then in the LOCK
position.
– the driver’s door is opened with the shift se-
lector in “N”, “B” or “D”.
– The Intelligent Key carried with you is not
registered to the system. Use the regis-
tered Intelligent Key.
If this warning illuminates while the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position, move the shift
selector to the “P” position or place the ignition
switch in the ON position.
Low fuel warning
This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the
fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is
convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge
reaches E (Empty). There will be a small re-
serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel
gauge needle reaches E (Empty).
– You do not have an Intelligent Key with
you. Carry an Intelligent Key with you.
An inside warning chime will also sound. See
“NISSAN Intelligent Key™” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section.
2-24 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECURITY SYSTEMS
Cruise main switch indicator
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ insertion indica-
tor
This indicator illuminates when the cruise control
main switch is pushed. The indicator turns off
when the main switch is pushed again. When the
cruise main switch indicator illuminates, the
cruise control system is operational.
This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key
needs to be inserted into the Intelligent Key port.
(For example, the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged.)
If this indicator illuminates, insert the Intelligent
Key into the Intelligent Key port in the correct
direction. See “Push-button ignition switch” in
the “Starting and driving” section.
Cruise set switch indicator light
The light comes on while the vehicle speed is
controlled by the cruise control system. If the light
blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate
the cruise control system is not functioning prop-
erly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ removal indicator
This indicator illuminates when the driver’s door
is opened with the ignition switch placed in the
OFF position and the Intelligent Key placed in the
Intelligent Key port. A key reminder chime also
sounds.
LIC0301
Your vehicle may have two types of security sys-
tems:
Hybrid System operation indicator (ignition
switch placed in the LOCK or ACC position)
●
●
Vehicle security system
This indicator illuminates when the ignition switch
is placed in the LOCK, OFF, ACC or ON position
with the shift selector in the “P” position.
If this indicator illuminates, remove the Intelligent
Key from the Intelligent Key port and take it with
you when leaving the vehicle.
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
This indicator means that the Hybrid System will
start by pushing the ignition switch with the brake
pedal depressed.
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ battery discharge
indicator
The vehicle security system provides visual and
audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors
or trunk lid when the system is armed. It is not,
however, a motion detection type system that
activates when a vehicle is moved or when a
vibration occurs.
This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key
battery is running out of power.
EV mode indicator
If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery
with a new one. See “NISSAN Intelligent Key™”in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
This indicator illuminates when the Hybrid Sys-
tem is READY without the engine idling or when
the vehicle is driven without the gasoline engine
running.
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or
Instruments and controls 2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-
ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a
brief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key in
the vehicle, and always lock the vehicle when
unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and
park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.
cally shifts into the armed phase. The
security light begins to flash once every 3
seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-arm
time period, the driver’s door is unlocked by
the key or the keyfob, or the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or ON position, the sys-
tem will not arm.
The alarm is activated by:
●
opening the door or trunk lid without using
the key or Intelligent Key (even if the door is
unlocked by releasing the door inside lock
switch).
How to stop an activated alarm
Many devices offering additional protection, such
as component locks, identification markers, and
tracking systems, are available at auto supply
stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer
may also offer such equipment. Check with your
insurance company to see if you may be eligible
for discounts for various theft protection features.
The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s
door or the trunk lid with the key, pressing
●
Even when the driver and/or passen-
gers are in the vehicle, the system will
activate with all the doors, hood and
trunk lid locked with the ignition
switch placed in the LOCK position.
When placing the ignition switch in the
ACC or ON position, the system will be
released.
the
button on the Intelligent Key, or press-
ing the request switch on the driver’s or passen-
ger’s door with the Intelligent Key in range of the
door handle.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
How to arm the vehicle security
system
Vehicle security system activation
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the Hybrid System to start without the use
of a registered key.
1. Close all windows. (The system can be
The vehicle security system will give the following
alarm:
armed even if the windows are open.)
2. Remove the intelligent key from the vehicle.
Statement related to Section 15 of FCC
Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
tem
●
The headlights blink and the horn sounds
intermittently.
3. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lock all
doors. The doors can be locked with the
Intelligent Key, door handle request switch,
power door lock switch or mechanical key.
●
The alarm automatically turns off after ap-
proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm
reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with
again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking
the driver’s door or trunk lid with the key, or
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-
ing two conditions;
4. Confirm that the security indicator light
comes on. The security light stays on for
about 30 seconds. The vehicle security sys-
tem is now pre-armed. After about 30 sec-
onds the vehicle security system automati-
by pressing the
gent Key.
button on the Intelli-
2-26 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(1) This device may not cause harmful in-
terference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
If the light still remains on and/or the Hy-
brid System will not start, see a NISSAN
dealer for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System service as soon as possible. Please
bring all registered keys that you have
when visiting your NISSAN dealer for ser-
vice.
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-
PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-
SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD
VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-
ATE THE EQUIPMENT.
LIC0474
Security indicator light
The security indicator light blinks whenever the
ignition switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or
ACC position. This function indicates the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is opera-
tional.
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-
functioning, the light will remain on while the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
Instruments and controls 2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
2
Low — continuous low speed operation
᭺
● Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-
centrates with water to the manufactur-
er’s recommended levels before pour-
ing the fluid into the windshield-washer
reservoir tank. Do not use the
windshield-washer reservoir tank to
mix the washer fluid concentrate and
water.
3
High — continuous high speed operation
᭺
4
Push the lever up
tion of the wiper.
to have one sweep opera-
᭺
5
Pull the lever toward you
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.
to operate the
᭺
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solu-
tion may freeze on the windshield and
obscure your vision which may lead to an
accident. Warm the windshield with the
defroster before you wash the windshield.
LIC1061
SWITCH OPERATION
CAUTION
The windshield wiper and washer switch oper-
ates when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
● Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
● Do not operate the washer if the reser-
voir tank is empty.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the
following speed:
● Do not fill the window washer reservoir
tank with washer fluid concentrates at
full strength. Some methyl alcohol
based washer fluid concentrates may
permanently stain the grille if spilled
while filling the window washer reser-
voir tank.
1
Intermittent — intermittent operation can be
᭺
A
adjusted by turning the switch toward
᭺
B
(Slower) or
(Faster). Also, for vehicles
᭺
equipped with speed dependent wipers, the
intermittent operation speed varies in accor-
dance with the vehicle speed. (For example,
when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit-
tent operation speed will be faster.)
2-28 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
NOTE:
The top and bottom few rows of wires on
the rear window are not part of the rear
window defroster system. These wires
make up the antenna for the audio system.
LIC1064
WIC1460
Type A
To defrost the rear window glass and outside
mirrors (if so equipped), start the Hybrid System
and push the rear window defroster switch on.
The rear window defroster indicator light on the
switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn
the defroster off.
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting
1
When turning the switch to the
tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and
instrument panel lights come on.
posi-
᭺
The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after approximately 15 minutes.
2
When turning the switch to the
tion, the headlights come on and all the other
lights remain on.
posi-
᭺
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or dam-
age the rear window defroster.
Instruments and controls 2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-
1
tion
.
᭺
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. The autolight system automatically turns the
headlights on and off.
Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position and a door is opened and left open, the
headlights remain ON for 5 minutes. If another
door is opened during the 5 minutes, then the 5
minute timer is reset.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to
LIC1063
LIC1086
the OFF,
, or
position.
Type B
Autolight system (if so equipped)
CAUTION
The autolight system allows the headlights to be
set so they turn on and off automatically. The
autolight system can:
Use the headlights with the Hybrid System
running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
●
Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,
license plate and instrument panel lights au-
tomatically when it is dark.
●
●
Turn off all the lights when it is light.
Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds after
you place the ignition switch in the OFF
position and all doors are closed.
2-30 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature au-
tomatically turns off the headlights after a
period of time, you should turn the head-
light switch to the OFF position when the
engine is not running to avoid discharging
the vehicle battery.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
(Canada only)
The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-
duced intensity when the engine is started with
the parking brake released. The daytime running
lights operate with the headlight switch in the
LIC1068
LIC1087
Be sure you do not put anything on top of
the autolight sensor located on the top side
of the instrument panel. The autolight sen-
sor controls the autolight; if it is covered,
the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark
out and the headlights will illuminate. If
this occurs while parked with the Hybrid
System off and the ignition switch placed
in the ON position, your vehicle’s battery
could become discharged.
Headlight beam select
OFF position or in the
headlight switch to the
position. Turn the
position for full
1
To select the high beam function, push the
lever forward. The high beam lights come on
᭺
illumination when driving at night.
and the
light illuminates.
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-
nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when
the parking brake is released. The daytime run-
ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position.
2
Pull the lever back to select the low beam.
᭺
3
Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the
headlight high beams on and off.
᭺
Battery saver system
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position
while the headlight switch is in the
or
position, the headlights will turn off after
5 minutes.
Instruments and controls 2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
When the daytime running light system is
active, tail lights on your vehicle are not
on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your
headlights. Failure to do so could cause
an accident injuring yourself and others.
WIC1127
LIC1088
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Turn signal
The instrument cluster illuminates when the igni-
tion switch is placed in the ON position.
1
Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is com-
pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.
᭺
The instrument brightness control operates when
the headlight control switch is in the
Lane change signal
AUTO,
or
position.
2
To signal a lane change, move the lever up or
down to the point where the indicator light
begins to flash, but the lever does not latch.
᭺
Turn the control left or right to adjust the bright-
ness of the instrument panel lights when driving
at night.
2-32 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH
HORN
The flashers will operate with the ignition switch
placed in any position.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.
LIC0394
LIC1069
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
you must stop or park under emergency condi-
tions. All turn signal lights flash.
To sound the horn, push the center pad area of
the steering wheel.
WARNING
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system. Tam-
pering with the supplemental front air bag
system may result in serious personal
injury.
● If stopping for an emergency, be sure to
move the vehicle well off the road.
● Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the highway unless
unusual circumstances force you to
drive so slowly that your vehicle might
become a hazard to other traffic.
● Turn signals do not work when the haz-
ard warning flasher lights are on.
Instruments and controls 2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)
POWER OUTLET
CAUTION
● Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the
seat.
● Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-
ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat
may become overheated.
● Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the
heater.
LIC1070
LIC1543
● Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with a
dry cloth.
Instrument panel
The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.
The switches are located on the center console.
The power outlets are for powering electrical
accessories such as cellular telephones. They
are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum. The
console outlet is powered directly by the vehi-
cle’s battery.
● When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-
lar materials.
1. Start the Hybrid System.
2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as
desired. The indicator light in the switch will
illuminate.
● If any abnormalities are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn the
switch off and have the system checked
by your NISSAN dealer.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
automatically turning the heater on and off.
The indicator light will remain on as long as
the switch is on.
● The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the Hybrid Sys-
tem is not running.
3. When the seat is warmed or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch
off.
2-34 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STORAGE
● Use power outlets with the Hybrid Sys-
tem running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.
● Avoid using power outlets when the air
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defroster is on.
● Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned OFF.
● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug may
overheat or the internal temperature
fuse may open.
WIC1119
WIC1263
Console
● When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water to contact the
outlet.
MAP POCKETS
CAUTION
● The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.
● Only certain power outlets are designed
for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do
not use any other power outlet for an
accessory lighter. See your NISSAN
dealer for additional information.
● Do not use with accessories that ex-
ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
Instruments and controls 2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
● Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-
glasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the
sunglasses.
LIC0016
WIC1551
SEATBACK POCKETS
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
The seatback pockets are located on the back of
the driver’s and passenger’s seats. The pockets
can be used to store maps.
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.
WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed while
driving to prevent an accident.
2-36 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIC1075
WRS0167
WIC1216
Front
Rear
Soft bottle holder
CUP HOLDERS
Soft bottle holder
CAUTION
To open the front cup holders, push the cup
holder lid. To close, lower the cup holder lid and
push down until it clicks in place.
● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it
can scald you or your passenger.
CAUTION
● Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in
the vehicle and possibly injure people
during sudden braking or an accident.
The plastic insert may be removed to accommo-
date a larger cup size or for cleaning.
● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.
The rear cup holders are located in the fold-down
armrest in the rear seat back.
● Do not use bottle holder for open liquid
containers.
Instruments and controls 2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WIC1076
WIC1120
WIC1121
GLOVE BOX
CONSOLE BOX
Upper half
Lower half
Open the glove box by pulling the handle. When
Pull up on the passenger’s side latch to open the
lower half of the console box. A power outlet is
located inside the console box. The mat (if so
equipped) may be removed for cleaning.
1
2
locking
or unlocking
the glove box, use the
᭺
᭺
Pull up on the driver’s side latch to open the
upper half of the console box. The mat (if so
equipped) may be removed for cleaning.
master key.
WARNING
The upper half of the console box may be used for
storage of cellular phones. An access hole is
provided at the front of the upper half of the
console box for phone cord routing to the power
outlet.
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
2-38 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIC1597
LIC0748
WIC1264
COVERED STORAGE BOX
GROCERY HOOKS
CARGO NET (if so equipped)
Push the center of the lid to open.
The grocery hooks are located in the trunk and
can be used to hang a standard size plastic
grocery bag.
WARNING
Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, un-
secured cargo could cause personal
injury.
CAUTION
Do not apply a total load of more than 20
lbs (9 kg) to a single grocery hook.
The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargo
area from moving around while the vehicle is in
motion.
Instruments and controls 2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
● Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while
it is in motion and before closing the
windows. Use the window lock switch
to prevent unexpected use of the power
windows.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls and become
trapped in a window. Unattended chil-
dren could become involved in serious
accidents.
LIC0802
WIC1124
To install the cargo net, attach the net to the
retainers.
1. Window lock button
2. Power door lock switch
The power windows operate when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position, or for about
45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s
door is opened during this period of about 45
seconds, power to the windows is canceled.
3. Front passenger side (automatic switch,
To remove the cargo net, detach the net from the
cargo net retainers.
if so equipped)
4. Right rear passenger side
5. Left rear passenger side
6. Driver side automatic switch
2-40 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver’s side power window switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped with
switches to open or close all of the windows.
To open a window, push the switch to the first
detent and continue to hold down until the de-
sired window position is reached. To close a
window, pull the switch to the first detent and
continue to hold down until the desired window
position is reached.
WIC1265
LIC0718
Front passenger’s power window
Rear power window switch
switch
The rear power window switches open or close
only the corresponding windows. To open the
The passenger’s window switch operates only
the corresponding passenger’s window. To open
the window, push the switch to the first detent
and continue to hold it down until the desired
1
1
window, push the switch and hold it down . To
᭺
2
close the window, pull the switch up
.
᭺
Locking passengers’ windows
window position is reached
. To close the
window, pull the switch to the first detent and
᭺
When the window lock button is depressed, only
the driver’s side window can be opened or
closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock
function.
continue to hold it up until the desired window
2
position is reached
.
᭺
Instruments and controls 2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto-reverse function
When power window switch does not
operate
If the control unit detects something caught in the
window as it is closing, the window will be imme-
diately lowered.
If the power window automatic function (closing
only) does not operate properly, perform the fol-
lowing procedure to initialize the power window
system:
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
the window is closed by automatic operation
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position or for 45 seconds after the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Open the window more than halfway by
operating the power window switch.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window oc-
curs.
3. Pull the power window switch and hold it to
close the window, and then hold the switch
more than 3 seconds after the window is
closed.
LIC0410
Automatic operation
4. Release the power window switch. Operate
the window by the automatic function to
confirm the initialization is complete. The
power window automatically opens or
closes depending on if the automatic down
or up function is selected.
WARNING
To fully open a window equipped with automatic
operation, press the window switch down (only
driver’s side shown) to the second detent and
release it; it need not be held. The window auto-
matically opens all the way. To stop the window,
lift the switch up while the window is opening.
There are some small distances immedi-
ately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
the vehicle before closing the window.
5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for other
windows.
To fully close a window equipped with automatic
operation, pull the switch up to the second detent
and release it; it need not be held. To stop the
window, press the switch down while the window
is closing.
If the power window function does not operate
properly after performing the above procedure,
see a NISSAN dealer for assistance.
2-42 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MOONROOF (if so equipped)
To fully close the moonroof, push the switch
CAUTION
2
toward
.
᭺
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
from the moonroof before opening.
To open or close the moonroof part way, push the
switch in any direction while the moonroof is
sliding to stop it in the desired position.
● Do not place heavy objects on the
moonroof or surrounding area.
Tilting the moonroof
Resetting the moonroof switch
Close the moonroof by pushing the switch
The moonroof switch may not operate properly
and need to be reset if any of the following
conditions have occurred:
2
toward
. Release the switch, then push
᭺
2
the switch toward
moonroof up.
again to tilt the
᭺
●
●
the moonroof has been manually moved,
To tilt the moonroof down, push the switch
WIC1559
the moonroof motor has been removed and
reinstalled after the moonroof has been re-
positioned or adjusted,
1
toward
.
᭺
AUTOMATIC MOONROOF
WARNING
The moonroof will only operate when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. The auto-
matic moonroof is operational for about 45 sec-
onds, even if the ignition switch is placed in the
ACC or OFF position. If the driver’s door or the
front passenger’s door is opened during this
period of about 45 seconds, power to the moon-
roof is canceled.
●
●
the moonroof glass panel has been adjusted
or changed, or
● In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open moonroof.
Always use seat belts and child
restraints.
the electrical supply interrupted and/or
some malfunction has been detected.
● Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out of
the moonroof opening while the vehicle
is in motion or while the moonroof is
closing.
Use the following reset procedure to return the
moonroof operation to normal.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
Sliding the moonroof
2. Push and hold the moonroof switch
To fully open the moonroof, push the switch
2
toward
. Once the moonroof has
᭺
1
toward
.
reached the full tilt position, release the
switch. Push and hold the switch toward
᭺
Instruments and controls 2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the moonroof
occurs.
2
the
position again. After a delay of
᭺
WARNING
four seconds, the moonroof will make a small
movement and backup.
● In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open moonroof.
Always use seat belts and child
restraints.
3. Release the switch.
4. Within 5 seconds of releasing the switch,
push and continuously hold the switch
WARNING
● Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out of
the moonroof opening while the vehicle
is in motion or while the moonroof is
closing.
2
toward
. The moonroof will move
᭺
There are some small distances immedi-
ately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
the vehicle before closing the moonroof.
from the tilt position to the open position and
back to the close position.
NOTE:
CAUTION
If the switch is released at any time during
Step 4, the procedure must be restarted.
When closing:
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
If the control unit detects something caught in the
moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof
will immediately open backward.
from the moonroof before opening.
5. Release the switch. Do not place the ignition
switch in the OFF position for at least 2
seconds. The moonroof is now reset.
● Do not place heavy objects on the
moonroof or surrounding area.
When tilting down:
If the moonroof still does not operate properly,
have the moonroof system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
Sunshade
If the control unit detects something caught in the
moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-
mediately tilt up.
Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for-
ward or backward.
Auto-reverse function (when closing or
tilting down the moonroof)
If the moonroof does not close
If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and re-
peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep
pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds
after it happens; the moonroof will fully close
gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the
moonroof.
Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the
moonroof.
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto-
matic operation when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position or for about 45 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
2-44 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERIOR LIGHT
The lights will go off when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position, or the driver’s door is
closed and locked.
The lights will also go off after 30 minutes when
doors are open.
3
●
When the switch is in the OFF position
,
᭺
the interior light does not illuminate, regard-
less of door position.
NOTE:
The doorstep lights illuminate when the
driver and passenger doors are opened re-
gardless of the interior light switch posi-
tion. These lights will turn off automatically
after 30 minutes while doors are open to
prevent the battery from becoming dis-
charged.
WIC1550
WIC1476
CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped)
The interior light has a three-position switch and
operates regardless of ignition switch position.
The console light will turn on whenever the park-
ing lights or headlights are illuminated.
1
●
When the switch is in the ON position
,
᭺
NOTE:
the interior light illuminates, regardless of
door position. The light will go off after 30
minutes unless the ignition switch is placed
in the ACC or ON position.
The console light brightness can be adjusted
with the instrument brightness control.
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the Hybrid System stopped. This could
result in a discharged battery.
●
When the switch is in the center DOOR
2
position
, the front and rear personal
᭺
lights will illuminate under the following con-
ditions:
– Driver’s door is opened.
Lights remain on for a maximum of 30
seconds after driver’s door is closed.
Instruments and controls 2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PERSONAL LIGHTS
MAP LIGHTS
TRUNK LIGHT
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.
When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.
The light will go off after about 30 minutes if the
trunk lid is left open, unless the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or ON position.
For bulb replacement procedures, refer to “Exte-
rior and interior lights” in the “Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
LIC1083
WIC1494
Rear personal lights
To turn the map lights on, press the light lens. To
turn them off, press the lens again.
To turn the rear personal lights on, press the
switch. To turn them off, press the switch again.
NOTE:
NOTE:
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the Hybrid System stopped. This could
result in a discharged battery.
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the Hybrid System stopped. This could
result in a discharged battery.
2-46 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOMELINKா UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)
The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver provides a
convenient way to consolidate the functions of up
to three individual hand-held transmitters into
one built-in device.
WARNING
● Do not use the HomeLinkா Universal
Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and re-
verse features as required by federal
safety standards. (These standards be-
came effective for opener models
manufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-
rage door opener which cannot detect
an object in the path of a closing garage
door and then automatically stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features in-
creases the risk of serious injury or
death.
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver:
●
Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)
devices such as garage doors, gates, home
and office lighting, entry door locks and se-
curity systems.
●
Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No
separate batteries are required. If the vehi-
cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-
nected, HomeLinkா will retain all program-
ming.
WIC0986
PROGRAMMING HOMELINKா
Once the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver
is programmed, retain the original trans-
mitter for future programming procedures
(Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon
sale of the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver buttons
should be erased for security purposes. For
additional information refer to “Program-
ming HomeLinkா” later in this section.
1. To begin, press and hold the two outer
● During the programming procedure
your garage door or security gate will
open and close (if the transmitter is
within range). Make sure that people or
objects are clear of the garage door,
gate, etc. that you are programming.
HomeLinkா buttons (to clear the memory)
1
until the indicator light
blinks (after 20
᭺
seconds). Release both buttons.
2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter
1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the
HomeLinkா surface.
● Your vehicle’s Hybrid System should be
turned off while programming the
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver.
Instruments and controls 2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
grammed device, press and hold the pro-
grammed HomeLinkா button — releasing
when the device begins to activate.
ton, quickly and firmly press and release the
HomeLinkா button you’ve just programmed.
Press and release the HomeLinkா button up
to 3 times to complete the training.
5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkா blinks
rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid,
HomeLinkா has picked up a “rolling code”
garage door opener signal. You will need to
proceed with the next steps to train the
HomeLinkா to complete the programming
which may require a ladder and another per-
son for convenience.
8. Your HomeLinkா button should now be pro-
grammed. (To program the remaining
HomeLinkா buttons for additional door or
gate openers, follow steps 2-4 only.)
NOTE:
Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to
6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro-
gram button located on the garage door
opener’s motor to activate the “training
mode”. This button is usually located near
the antenna wire that hangs down from the
motor. If the wire originates from under a
light lens, you will need to remove the lens to
access the program button.
“clear”
HomeLinkா buttons.
all
previously
programmed
WIC0987
If you have any questions or are having difficulty
programming your HomeLinkா buttons, refer to
the HomeLinkா web site at: www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and
hold both the HomeLinkா button you want to
program and the hand-held transmitter but-
ton.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINKா FOR
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has
been completed.
NOTE:
Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-
held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec-
onds. To program your hand-held transmitter to
HomeLinkா, continue to press and hold the
HomeLinkா button (see steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-
gramming HomeLinkா”) while you press and re-
press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every
2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly
(indicating successful programming).
4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator
light on the HomeLinkா flashes, changing
from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing
blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.
When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both
buttons may be released. The rapidly flash-
ing light indicates successful programming.
To activate the garage door or other pro-
Once you have pressed and released the
program button on the garage door open-
er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you
have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.
Use the help of a second person for conve-
nience to assist when performing this step.
7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas-
ing the garage door opener’s program but-
2-48 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE:
●
position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3
inches (26 76 mm) away from the
●
●
The hand-held transmitter appears to pro-
gram the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver
but does not activate the garage door.
-
When programming a garage door opener,
etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-
ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos-
sible damage to the garage door opener
components.
HomeLinkா surface. Hold the transmitter in
that position for up to 15 seconds. If
HomeLinkா is not programmed within that
time, try holding the transmitter in another
position – keeping the indicator light in view
at all times.
Press and hold the trained HomeLinkா but-
ton. If the garage door opener has the rolling
code feature, the HomeLinkா indicator light
will flash rapidly, then remain on after 2 sec-
onds.
OPERATING THE HOMELINKா
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
If you continue to have programming difficulties,
please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs
Department. The phone numbers are located in
the Foreword of this manual.
To program the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver
to a garage door opener with the rolling code
feature, follow these instructions after completing
the “Programming HomeLinkா” (the aid of a sec-
ond person may make the following procedures
quicker and easier).
The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver (once pro-
grammed) may now be used to activate the ga-
rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap-
propriate programmed HomeLinkா Universal
Transceiver button. The red indicator light will
illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED
INFORMATION
1. Locate the training button on the garage
door opener motor unit. Exact location and
color of the button may vary by garage door
opener brand. If there is difficulty locating
the training button, reference the garage
door opener Owner’s Manual.
Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However,
to clear all programming, press and hold the two
outside buttons and release when the indicator
light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).
PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-
DIAGNOSIS
If the HomeLinkா does not quickly learn the hand-
held transmitter information:
ROLLING CODE PROGRAMMING
●
●
replace the hand-held transmitter batteries
with new batteries.
2. Press the training button on the garage door
opener motor unit (which may activate a
training light).
Rolling code garage door openers (or other roll-
ing code devices) which are “code protected”
and manufactured after 1996, may be deter-
mined by the following:
position the hand-held transmitter with its
battery area facing away from the
HomeLinkா surface.
●
Reference the garage door opener Owner’s
Manual for verification.
●
press and hold both the HomeLinkா and
hand-held transmitter buttons without inter-
ruption.
Instruments and controls 2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE:
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter
button.
FCC Notice:
This device complies with FCC rules part 15
and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera-
tion is subject to the following two condi-
tions:
Following step 2, there are 30 seconds in
which to initiate step 3.
4. The HomeLinkா indicator light will flash, first
slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator
light begins to flash rapidly, release both
buttons.
3. Firmly press and release the programmed
HomeLinkா button a second time to com-
plete the training process. (Some garage
door openers may require you to do this
procedure a third time to complete the train-
ing.)
(1) This device may not cause harmful in-
terference and (2) This device must accept
any interference that may be received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver button has
now been reprogrammed. The new device can
be activated by pushing the HomeLinkா button
that was just programmed. This procedure will
not affect any other programmed HomeLinkா
buttons.
The garage door opener should now recognize
the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver and acti-
vate when the HomeLinkா button is pressed. The
remaining two buttons may now be programmed
(if not yet programmed, follow steps 2 through 4
in the “Programming HomeLinkா” procedures
earlier in this section).
This transmitter has been tested and com-
plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment.
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the
codes of any non-rolling code device that has
been programmed into HomeLinkா. Consult the
Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-
facturer or dealer of those devices for additional
information.
DOC: ISTC 1763K1313
FCC I.D. CV2V67690
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HOMELINKா BUTTON
To reprogram a HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver
button, complete the following.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLinkா Univer-
sal Transceiver with your new transmitter
information.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkா but-
ton. Do not release the button until step 4
has been completed.
2. When the indicator light begins to flash
slowly (after 20 seconds), position the
hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76
mm) away from the HomeLinkா surface.
2-50 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
How to use the remote keyless entry
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Secondary trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19
Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Tilt/telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Tilt operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Telescopic operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Rearview mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KEYS
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
CAUTION
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be regis-
tered and used with one vehicle. The new keys
must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to
use with the Intelligent Key and NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System of your vehicle. Since the
registration process requires erasing all memory
in the Intelligent Key components when register-
ing new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys
that you have to the NISSAN dealer.
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the Intelligent
Key:
● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose
your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by
using the key number. NISSAN does not record
key numbers so it is very important to keep track
of your key number plate.
● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
WPD0363
● Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
1.
2.
Two Intelligent Keys
Mechanical keys (inside Intelligent
● Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
mediately wipe until it is completely dry.
Keys)
A key number is only necessary when you have
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate
from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer
can duplicate it.
3.
Key number plate
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™
● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where tem-
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent
Key which are registered to your vehicle’s Intelli-
gent Key components and NISSAN Vehicle Im-
mobilizer System components.
● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS
CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key installed
in the Intelligent Key slot.
You can only drive your vehicle using the master
keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System components in your vehicle.
These keys have a transponder chip in the key
head.
Valet hand-off
When you have to leave a key with a valet, give
them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me-
chanical key with you to protect your belongings.
The master key can be used for all the locks.
To prevent the glove box and the trunk from being
opened during valet hand-off, follow the proce-
dures below:
To protect belongings when you leave a key with
someone, give them the Intelligent Key only, not
the mechanical key.
1. Push the trunk cancel switch to the OFF
position.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
SPA1951
Mechanical key
Additional or replacement keys:
2. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-
gent Key.
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-
cate your existing key. As many as four NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used
with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to
your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-
cause the registration process will erase the
memory of all key codes previously registered
into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.
After the registration process, these components
will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration.
The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.
3. Lock the glove box and the rear seats with
the mechanical key.
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock
knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.
4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and
keep the mechanical key with you.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into
the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to
the lock position.
See “Trunk lid” in this section, “Storage” in the
“Instruments and controls”section and “Seats”in
the “Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the
doors, trunk lid and glove box.
See “Doors” and “Trunk lid” later in this section,
“Storage” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-
tion and “Seats” in the “Safety — Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system”section.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DOORS
Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time
of registration will no longer be able to start your
vehicle.
When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors can not be opened
using the inside or outside door handles. The
doors must be unlocked to open the doors.
Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which
contains an electrical transponder, to come into
contact with salt water. This could affect system
function.
WARNING
● Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat belts,
this provides greater safety in the event
of an accident by helping to prevent
persons from being thrown from the
vehicle. This also helps keep children
and others from unintentionally open-
ing the doors, and will help keep out
intruders.
WPD0444
Driver’s side
● Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
LOCKING WITH KEY
The power door lock system allows you to lock or
unlock all doors at the same time.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
1
Turning the key toward the front
locks all doors.
of the vehicle
᭺
2
Turning the key one time toward the rear
of the
᭺
vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,
(where the key can
only be removed and inserted) and turning it
3
returning the key to neutral
᭺
toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks
4
all doors
.
᭺
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Opening and closing windows (if so
equipped)
The driver’s door key operation allows you to
open and close windows equipped with auto-
matic operation at the same time.
●
To open the windows, turn the driver’s door
key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer
than 1 second after the door is unlocked.
●
To close the windows, turn the driver’s door
key toward the front of the vehicle for longer
than 1 second after the door is locked.
Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.
WPD0291
WPD0381
Inside lock
Door lock switch
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK
KNOB
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
To lock the door without the key, move the inside
To lock all the doors without a key, push the door
lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to
1
lock knob to the lock position , then close the
᭺
door.
1
the lock position . When locking the door this
᭺
way, be certain not to leave the key inside the
To unlock the door without the key, move the
2
vehicle.
inside lock knob to the unlock position
.
᭺
To unlock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s
2
side) to the unlock position
.
᭺
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. When activated, the hazard indicator will
flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard
indicator will flash once.
Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver’s or
front passenger’s side) is moved to the lock
position with the Intelligent Key in the port and
any door open, all doors will lock and unlock
automatically. With the Intelligent Key left in the
vehicle (not in the Intelligent Key port) and any
door open, all doors will unlock automatically and
a chime will sound after the door is closed.
5. The ignition switch must be placed in the
OFF and ON position again between each
setting change.
When the automatic door unlock system is deac-
tivated, the doors do not unlock when the ignition
is placed in the OFF position. To unlock the door
manually, use the inside lock knob or the power
door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s
side).
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
●
All doors lock automatically when the vehicle
speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).
LIC0716
●
All doors unlock automatically when the ig-
nition switch is placed in the OFF position.
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors
from being opened accidentally, especially when
small children are in the vehicle.
The automatic unlock function can be de-
activated or activated. To deactivate or acti-
vate the automatic door unlock system, perform
the following procedure:
The child safety lock levers are located on the
edge of the rear doors.
1. Close all doors.
1
When the lever is in the unlock position
, the
᭺
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step #2:
● Push and hold the power door lock switch
door can be opened from the outside or the
inside.
2
When the lever is in the lock position
,
᭺
the door can be opened only from the out-
side.
to the
position (UNLOCK) for more
than 5 seconds.
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™
WARNING
●
When the vehicle is parked near a parking
meter.
CAUTION
● Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufac-
turer for the possible influences before
use.
● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you when operating the vehicle.
In such cases, correct the operating conditions
before using the Intelligent Key function or use
the mechanical key.
● Never leave the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
Although the life of the battery varies depending
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is
approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-
charged, replace it with a new one.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-
ligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environ-
mental conditions may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Intelligent Key system under the
following operating conditions.
● The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are pressed.
The FAA advises the radio waves may
affect aircraft navigation and communi-
cation systems. Do not operate the In-
telligent Key while on an airplane. Make
sure the buttons are not operated unin-
tentionally when the unit is stored for a
flight.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-
charged, insert the Intelligent Key into the Intelli-
gent Key port to start the Hybrid System. Replace
the discharged battery with a new one as soon as
possible. For more details, see “Push-button ig-
nition switch” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
tion.
●
When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted, such as
a TV tower, power station and broadcasting
station.
The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locks
using the remote controller function or pushing
the request switch on the vehicle without taking
the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating
environment and/or conditions may affect the
Intelligent Key operation.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving
radio waves, if the key is left near equipment
which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-
nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-
tery life may become shorter.
●
When in possession of wireless equipment,
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,
and CB radio.
●
●
●
When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or
covered by metallic materials.
For information regarding replacement of a bat-
tery, see “Battery replacement” in the “Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section.
Be sure to read the following before using the
Intelligent Key:
When any type of radio wave remote control
is used nearby.
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered
and used with one vehicle. For information about
the purchase and use of additional Intelligent
Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.
When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
electric appliance such as a personal com-
puter.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-
gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the
unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate
the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing
procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the Intelligent
Key:
● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
● Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
● Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
mediately wipe until it is completely dry.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where tem-
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).
● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPA2038
WPD0375
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,
handle or rear bumper, the request switches may
not function.
OPERATING RANGE
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
PRECAUTION
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
operating range from the request switch
●
Do not push the door handle request switch
with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as
illustrated. The close distance to the door
handle will cause the Intelligent Key system
to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-
gent Key is outside the vehicle.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone
who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the
request switch to lock/unlock the doors.
1
.
᭺
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or
strong radio waves are present near the operat-
ing location, the Intelligent Key operating range
becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may
not function properly.
●
After locking with the door handle request
switch, verify the doors are securely locked
by testing them.
The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)
1
from each request switch
.
᭺
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left
inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the
Intelligent Key with you and then lock the
doors.
Do not pull the door handle before pushing
the door handle request switch. The door
will be unlocked but will not open. Release
the door handle once and pull it again to
open the door.
WPD0432
WPD0377
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™
OPERATION
Locking doors
1. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-
tion, place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position and make sure you carry the Intelli-
gent Key with you.
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking
the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you
can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door
handle request switch within the range of opera-
tion.
2. Close all doors.
1
3. Push any door handle request switch
᭺
while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
4. All doors and the trunk will lock.
5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and
the outside buzzer sounds twice.
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE:
CAUTION
The doors may not lock when the Intelli-
gent Key is in the same hand that is oper-
ating the request switch to lock the door.
Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or
your other hand.
● After locking the doors using the re-
quest switch, make sure that the doors
have been securely locked by operating
the door handles.
● When locking the doors using the re-
quest switch, make sure to have the
Intelligent Key in your possession be-
fore operating the request switch to
prevent the Intelligent Key from being
left in the vehicle.
CAUTION
The lockout protection may not function
under the following conditions:
● When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the instrument panel.
● The request switch is operational only
when the Intelligent Key has been de-
tected by the Intelligent Key.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the rear parcel shelf.
WPD0369
NOTE:
● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the glove box or a storage bin.
Lockout protection
●
Doors lock with the door handle request
switch while the ignition switch is not in the
LOCK position.
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-
dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection
is equipped with the Intelligent Key.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the door pockets.
●
Doors do not lock by pushing the door
handle request switch while any door is
open. However, doors lock with the me-
chanical key even if any door is open.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed on or
under the spare tire area.
When the driver’s side door is open, the doors
are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put
inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;
the lock will automatically unlock and the door
buzzer sounds.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side or near metallic materials.
●
Doors do not lock with the door handle
request switch with the Intelligent Key inside
the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you.
However, when an Intelligent Key is inside
the vehicle, doors can be locked with an-
other Intelligent Key.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
Locking the doors with the remote controller.
Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.
WPD0377
WPD0369
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 1
minute after pushing the request switch.
Unlocking doors
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
1
2. Push the door handle request switch
.
᭺
●
●
Opening any door.
3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the
outside buzzer sounds once.
Pushing the ignition switch.
The interior light timer illuminates for 30 seconds
when a door is unlocked and the room light
switch is in the DOOR position.
1
4. Push the door handle request switch
᭺
again within 5 seconds to unlock all doors.
If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the
doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning
the door handle to its original position will unlock
the door. If the door does not unlock after return-
ing the door handle, push the door handle re-
quest switch to unlock the door.
The interior light can be turned off without waiting
for 30 seconds by performing one of the follow-
ing operations.
●
Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion.
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When all doors are locked and the trunk lid is
closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk,
the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk will
open.
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can operate all
door locks using the remote keyless function of
the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function
can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away
from the vehicle. The operating distance de-
pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function will not func-
tion under the following conditions:
LPD0478
WPD0359
Opening the trunk lid
Locking doors
●
●
●
When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range.
A
1. Push the trunk opener request switch
for
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
tion.
᭺
more than 1 second while carrying the Intel-
ligent Key with you.
When the doors or the trunk are open or not
closed securely.
2. Close all doors.
2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will sound 4
times.
When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged.
3. Press the
Key.
button on the Intelligent
3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.
4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and
the horn beeps once.
CAUTION
Lockout protection
When locking the doors using the Intelli-
gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in
the vehicle.
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-
dentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection is
equipped with the Intelligent Key.
5. All doors will be locked.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The interior light illuminates for 15 seconds when
a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in
the DOOR position.
CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intelli-
gent Key, be sure that the doors have been
securely locked by operating the door
handles.
The light can be turned off without waiting for 15
seconds by performing one of the following op-
erations:
●
Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion.
●
●
Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.
Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.
Opening windows (if so equipped)
WPD0360
The Intelligent Key allows you to open windows
equipped with automatic operation simulta-
neously.
Unlocking doors
1. Press the
Key.
button on the Intelligent
●
To open the windows, press the
but-
ton on the Intelligent Key longer than 3
seconds after all doors are unlocked.
2. The hazard warning lights flash once.
3. Press the button again within 5 sec-
The door windows will open while pressing
the button on the Intelligent Key.
onds to unlock all doors.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 1
The door windows cannot be closed by
using the Intelligent Key.
minute after pressing the
button:
●
●
Opening any doors.
Pushing the ignition switch.
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.
Pushing the request switch on the driver or
passenger door with the Intelligent Key in
range of the door handle.
WPD0364
WPD0361
Releasing the trunk lid
Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention
Press the
button for longer than 0.5 sec-
onds to open the trunk lid. The trunk release
button will not operate when the ignition switch is
in the ON position or when the trunk cancel
switch is in the OFF position. See “Cancel
switch” in this section.
by pressing and holding the
button on the
Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25
seconds.
The panic alarm stops when:
●
It has run for 25 seconds, or
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.
WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-
pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent
Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being
stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and
outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in
the instrument panel.
WPD0362
When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is
displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the
Intelligent Key.
Silencing the horn beep feature
If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-
vated using the Intelligent Key.
See the troubleshooting guide that follows and
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to
confirm that the horn beep feature has been
deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are
programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent
Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle
system may respond differently than expected.
Symptom
Possible Cause
Remedy
The SHIFT P warning appears on the dis-
play and the inside warning chime sounds
continuously.
Shift the shift selector to the P position.
When pushing the ignition switch to stop
the Hybrid System
The shift selector is not in the P position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
The ignition switch is in the ACC position.
When opening the driver’s door to get out
of the vehicle
The inside warning chime sounds
continuously.
The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent Key
port.
Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelli-
gent Key port.
The NO KEY warning appears on the
display, the outside chime sounds 3 times
and the inside warning chime sounds for
approximately 3 seconds.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
When closing the door after getting out of
the vehicle
The NO KEY warning appears on the dis-
play and the outside chime sounds
continuously.
The ignition switch is in the ACC position
Move the shift selector to the “P” (Park)
and the shift selector is not in the “P” (Park) position and push the ignition switch to the
position.
OFF position.
When closing the door with the inside lock The outside chime sounds for approximately The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
knob placed in the LOCK position
3 seconds and all the doors unlock.
trunk.
The outside chime sounds for approximately
10 seconds and the trunk lid opens.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
When closing the trunk lid
The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOOD
TRUNK LID
WPD0441
LPD0394
1
Pull the hood lock release handle located
below the driver’s side instrument panel; the
hood springs up slightly.
᭺
OPENER OPERATION
WARNING
● Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving. Fail-
ure to do so could cause the hood to fly
open and result in an accident.
WARNING
2
Lift the lever at the front of the hood with your
fingertips and raise the hood.
● Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-
haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
᭺
3
Remove the support rod from the clamp.
● If you see steam or smoke coming from
the engine compartment, to avoid injury
do not open the hood.
᭺
4
Insert the support rod into the hole on the
5
passenger’s side of the hood.
᭺
᭺
When closing the hood, return the hood rod to its
original position. Lower the hood approximately
12 inches (30 cm) above the latch and release it.
This allows proper engagement of the hood latch.
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously in-
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.
To open the trunk lid, push the opener switch
down.
To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid
down securely.
LPD0186
WIC1130
NOTE:
Cancel switch
SECONDARY TRUNK LID RELEASE
You can open the trunk lid with the Intelli-
gent Key. Refer to “NISSAN Intelligent
Key™” in this section.
When the cancel switch located inside the glove
box is OFF, the trunk lid cannot be opened with
the trunk lid release switch or with the Intelligent
Key.
To open the trunk lid from the rear seat, fold down
the center armrest/cup holder to access the trunk
compartment access panel. Use your door key to
unlock and open the access panel. Pull the rear
1
seat trunk release handle . To close the trunk,
᭺
push the trunk lid down securely.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE:
To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illumi-
nated release handle until the lock releases and
push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is
made of a material that glows in the dark after a
brief exposure to ambient light.
In order to remove your key from trunk
compartment access panel, you must close
and lock the panel.
The handle is located inside the trunk compart-
ment on the interior of the trunk lid.
CAUTION
Do not leave the access panel open. Do
not store or place any items in the area
behind the seats. This area contains the
high voltage battery and other high volt-
age components. Storage of items in this
area could possibly short out the high
voltage battery and lead to Hybrid System
failure.
WPD0464
INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE
WARNING
Closely supervise children when they are
around cars to prevent them from playing
and becoming locked in the trunk where
they could be seriously injured. Keep the
car locked, with the rear seatback and
trunk lid securely latched when not in use,
and prevent children’s access to car keys.
The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides
a means of escape for children and adults in the
event they become locked inside the trunk.
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
WARNING
● Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain condi-
tions. You could be burned or seriously
injured if it is misused or mishandled.
Always stop the engine and do not
smoke or allow open flames or sparks
near the vehicle when refueling.
● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
automatically. Continued refueling may
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel
spray and possibly a fire.
LPD0397
LPD0449
● Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a
built-in safety valve needed for proper
operation of the fuel system and emis-
sion control system. An incorrect cap
can result in a serious malfunction and
possible injury. It could also cause the
malfunction indicator light to come on.
OPENER OPERATION
FUEL-FILLER CAP
The fuel-filler door release is located on the floor
to the left of the driver’s seat. To open the fuel-
filler door, pull up the release. There may be a
delay of up to 15 seconds before the fuel filler
door will open. To lock, close the fuel-filler door
securely.
The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the
cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn
the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are
heard.
1
Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder
refueling.
while
᭺
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to
attempt to start your vehicle.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING
● Do not fill a portable fuel container in
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death when filling portable fuel
containers:
CAUTION
● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.
● Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the
fuel-filler tube, then tighten until the
fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tighten
the fuel-filler cap properly may cause
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
the
Malfunction Indicator Light
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.
(MIL) to illuminate. Failure to tighten
the fuel-filler cap properly may cause
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are fill-
ing it.
the
Malfunction Indicator Light
LPD0398
(MIL) to illuminate. If the
light
TILT OPERATION
– Use only approved portable fuel con-
tainers for flammable liquid.
illuminates because the fuel-filler cap
is loose or missing, tighten or install the
cap and continue to drive the vehicle.
1
Pull the lever
all the way toward you and
᭺
2
adjust the steering wheel up or down
to the
᭺
desired position. Lock the wheel by releasing the
lever and ensure that the lever has returned to its
original position.
The
light should turn off after a
few driving trips. If the
light
does not turn off after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.
● For additional information, see the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
the “Instruments and Controls” section
earlier in this manual.
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SUN VISORS
3
Slide the extension sun visor (if so equipped)
in or out as needed.
TELESCOPIC OPERATION
᭺
1
Pull the lever
all the way toward you and
᭺
adjust the steering wheel forward or backward in
CAUTION
3
direction
, to the desired position. Lock the
᭺
Do not store the sun visor before returning
the extension to its original position.
wheel by releasing the lever and ensure that the
lever has returned to its original position.
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel any
closer to you than is necessary for proper
steering operation and comfort. The driv-
er’s air bag inflates with great force. If you
are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting
sideways or out of position in any way, you
are at greater risk of injury or death in a
crash. You may also receive serious or
fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up
against it when it inflates. Always sit back
against the seatback and as far away as
practical from the steering wheel. Always
use the seat belts.
WPD0435
1
To block glare from the front, swing down the
main sun visor.
᭺
2
To block glare from the side, remove the sun
visor from the center mount and swing the
sun visor to the side.
᭺
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIRRORS
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-
cally dims during night time conditions and ac-
cording to the intensity of the headlights of the
vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare
feature is activated when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
The indicator light will illuminate when the auto-
matic anti-glare feature is operating.
NOTE:
Do not hang any objects over the sensors
WPD0141
WPD0126
1
or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.
᭺
VANITY MIRRORS
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the
sensors, resulting in improper operation.
1
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor
down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity
mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the
mirror cover is open.
The night position
reduces glare from the
headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
᭺
2
Use the day position
hours.
when driving in daylight
᭺
WARNING
Use the night position only when neces-
sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For information on the compass display (if so
equipped), see “Compass display” in the “Instru-
ments and controls” section of this manual.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
WARNING
● Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
LPD0469
LPD0470
Type A-Without compass
Type B-With compass
To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again,
press:
Type A and Type B
2
The indicator light
will illuminate when the
᭺
●
the
|
button for inside mirrors without
automatic anti-glare feature is operating.
compass.
To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press:
●
the
compass.
button for inside mirrors with
●
the
compass.
O
button for inside mirrors without
The indicator light will turn on.
●
the
button for inside mirrors with
compass.
For information on HomeLinkா Universal Trans-
ceiver operation, see the “HomeLinkா Universal
Transceiver” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
The indicator light will turn off.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LPD0346
WPD0056
Electric control type
Manual folding outside mirrors (if so
equipped)
The outside mirror remote control only operates
when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or
ON position.
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.
Rotate the control lever to select the right or left
mirror. Adjust the mirror to the desired position by
moving the control lever.
Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,
defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-
tional information, see “Rear window and outside
mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
FM/AM/SAT radio with CD/DVD player
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) Player
Operation (models with Navigation System) . . . . . .4-57
USB interface (models without Navigation
How to use the INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
RearView Monitor (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Difference between predicted and actual
distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Heater and air conditioner (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
System) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60
USB interface (models with Navigation
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-62
iPodா* Player Operation without Navigation
System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66
iPodா* Player Operation with Navigation
System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-68
Music Box™ Hard Drive audio system
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71
Bluetoothா streaming audio (if so equipped). . . . . .4-78
CD care and cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-81
Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-85
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-85
Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System without
Making a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-108
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-108
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-109
Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-110
Phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-110
Bluetooth settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-111
Call volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-112
NISSAN Voice Recognition System
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-112
NISSAN Voice Recognition Standard Mode . . . . .4-113
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-116
Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-116
Giving voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-116
NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-86
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88
Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-90
Getting started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-91
List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-93
Speaker adaptation (SA) mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-97
Manual Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-99
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-100
Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-101
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-103
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-103
Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-103
Vehicle Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-105
Handset Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-107
Command Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-124
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-130
Speaker Adaptation function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-133
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —
COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
WARNING
● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-
tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,
fire, or electrical shock.
● Do not use this system if you notice any
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or
lack of sound. Continued use of the
system may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
● In case you notice any foreign object in
the system hardware, spill liquid on it,
or notice smoke or smell coming from
it, stop using the system immediately
and contact your nearest NISSAN
dealer. Ignoring such conditions may
lead to accidents, fire or electrical
shock.
LHA1400
5. INFO button (P. 4-5)
6. SETTING button (P. 4-6)
7. Volume control knob
1. Display screen
2. MAP button*
3. DEST button*
4. ROUTE button*
8.
(brightness control) button
4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*For Navigation system control buttons, refer to
the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual.
● To clean the display, never use a rough
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
kind of solvent or paper towel with a
chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.
When you use this system, make sure the engine
is running.
● Do not splash any liquid such as water
or car fragrance on the display. Contact
with liquid will cause the system to
malfunction.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will discharge the battery, and the
engine will not start.
To help ensure safe driving, some functions can-
not be operated while driving.
Reference symbols:
“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a
key shown only on the display. These keys can be
selected by touching the screen.
The on-screen functions that are not available
while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.
LHA1227
Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper-
ate the navigation system.
Touch screen operation
HOW TO USE THE TOUCH
SCREEN
Selecting the item:
WARNING
Touch an item to select. To select the “Naviga-
1
tion” key, touch the “Navigation” key
screen. Touch the “BACK”key
previous screen.
on the
CAUTION
᭺
● ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving.
2
to return to the
᭺
● The glass screen on the liquid crystal
display may break if it is hit with a hard
or sharp object. If the glass breaks, do
not touch the liquid crystalline material,
which contains a small amount of mer-
cury. In case of contact with skin, wash
immediately with soap and water.
● Avoid using vehicle features that could
distract you. If distracted, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause
an accident.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
Delete:
Deletes the last inputted character with one
touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to
delete all of the characters.
OK:
Completes the character input.
Touch screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft
cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a
small amount of neutral detergent with a soft
cloth. Never spray the screen with water or de-
tergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then wipe the
screen.
LHA1228
LHA1230
Adjusting the item:
Inputting characters:
1
Touch the “+” key
᭺
2
or the “Ϫ” key
the settings of an item.
to adjust
1
Touch the letter or number key
.
᭺
᭺
There are some options available when inputting
characters.
3
Touch the up arrow
᭺
to scroll up the page one
4
item at a time, or touch the double up arrow
scroll up an entire page.
to
᭺
●
●
●
Uppercase:
Shows uppercase characters.
5
Touch the down arrow
to scroll down the
᭺
Lowercase:
page one item at a time, or touch the double
6
Shows lowercase characters.
down arrow
to scroll down an entire page.
᭺
Space:
Inserts a space.
4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Menu Selections:
Shows the options to choose within that
menu screen (for example, Auto Interior Illu-
mination, etc.).
3. Up/Down Movement Indicator:
Shows that the arrows on the touch screen
may be used to move up or down on the
screen and select more options.
4. Screen Count:
Shows the number of menu selections avail-
able for the current menu, even if they are on
multiple pages (for example, 1/7).
5. Footer/Information Line:
WHA1401
LHA1416
Provides more information (if available)
about the menu selection currently high-
lighted (for example, Cabin lighting when
unlocking doors).
HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE
SCREEN
HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON
Press the INFO button; the display screen shows
vehicle and navigation information for your con-
venience.
Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis-
play screen in menus. Whenever a menu selec-
tion is made or menu item is highlighted, different
areas on the screen provide you with important
information. See the following for details.
Energy Flow
For information about Energy Flow, refer to “En-
ergy flow” in the “HEV Overview” section.
1. Header:
Shows the path used to get to the current
screen (for example, press the SETTING
button > then select the “Comfort” key).
Fuel Economy History
For information about Fuel Economy History, re-
fer to “Fuel Economy History” in the “HEV Over-
view” section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where am I?
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.
Traffic Info
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.
Weather Info
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.
Map Update
LHA1236
LHA1237
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.
HOW TO USE THE SETTING
BUTTON
Navigation Version
When the SETTING button is pressed, the Set-
tings screen will appear on the display. You can
select and/or adjust several functions, features
and modes that are available for your vehicle.
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.
Other options
For Voice Recognition settings, refer to “NISSAN
Voice Recognition system” in this section.
For GPS position, refer to the separate Naviga-
tion System Owner’s Manual.
4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHA1502
WHA1503
LHA1242
Brightness/contrast:
Display off:
Display settings
Select the “Brightness” key or the “Contrast” key
to adjust the brightness or contrast of the display
background. Touch the “+”or “-”key to adjust the
brightness to darker or brighter and the contrast
to lower or higher.
Select the “Display ON” key. The indicator of the
“Display ON” turns off and the message above
will be displayed briefly. When the audio, HVAC
(Heater and air conditioner), or any mode button
on the control panel is operated, the display turns
on for that operation. If one of the control panel
buttons is pressed, the display will not automati-
cally turn off until that operation is finished. Oth-
erwise, the screen turns off automatically after 5
seconds.
Select the “Display” key. On the screen above,
select the “Display Adjustment” key. The Display
Adjustment screen will appear.
The new settings are automatically saved when
you exit the setting screen by selecting the
“Back” key or any other mode button.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn the screen on:
●
Press the SETTING button and select the
“Display” key and then select the “Display
ON” key, or
●
Press the
button and the message
“resuming display” will appear and the “Dis-
play ON” key will be automatically turned on
(no amber indicator).
Background color:
Select the “Background Color” key; the display
color changes between day and night.
The new settings are automatically saved when
you exit the setting screen by selecting the
“Back” key or any other mode button.
LHA1240
LHA1241
Color theme:
Clock
Select the “Display” key, then select the “Color
Theme” key. The Color Theme select screen will
appear.
The following display will appear after pressing
the SETTING button, then selecting the “Clock”
key.
Select the key for the desired color. The appear-
ance of the background, arrows and bars will
change for all screens accordingly. You can
choose a black, blue or red color theme.
On-screen Clock:
When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-
nated), a clock is always displayed in the upper
right corner of the screen.
This clock will indicate the time almost exactly
because it is always adjusted by the GPS system.
4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clock Format (24h):
●
●
●
Newfoundland
Hawaii
When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-
nated), the clock format will change from the
default 12-hour display to a 24-hour display.
Alaska
After selection/settings, select the “Back” key or
any other mode button to accept the changes.
Offset (hour):
Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing the
hours.
Offset (minute):
Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing the
minutes.
Daylight Savings Time:
LHA1243
When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-
nated), daylight savings time is on. To turn off the
daylight savings time, touch the “ON” key; the
amber indicator light will go out.
Time Zone:
Select the “Time Zone” key; the Time Zone
screen will appear.
Select one of the following zones, depending on
the current location, by selecting the correct time
zone key to enable that time zone (indicator light
will illuminate for that location).
●
●
●
●
●
Pacific
Mountain
Central
Eastern
Atlantic
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1403
WHA1404
LHA1405
Comfort settings
Auto Interior Illumination: Select to turn on or
turn off the illumination of the interior lights when
any door is unlocked.
Others settings
Select the “Others” key, then select the “Com-
fort” key. The Comfort settings screen will be
displayed.
Select the “Others” key. Comfort settings, lan-
guage and units and Voice Recognition settings
will be displayed.
Light Sensitivity: Select to adjust the sensitivity
of the automatic headlights higher (right) or lower
(left). After selecting the item, touch the “+”or “-”
key to change the setting.
You can set the following operating conditions by
selecting the key for the desired item. The indica-
tor light (box at the right of the selected item)
alternately turns on and off each time the item is
touched.
Indicator light is illuminated — ON
Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF
4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light Off Delay: Select to change the duration
of the automatic headlight off timer. After select-
ing the item, touch the “+” or “-” key to change
the setting. The available delays are 0, 30, 45, 60,
90, 120, 150 and 180 seconds.
Speed Sensing Wiper Interval: Select to turn
on or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati-
cally according to the vehicle speed.
Selective Door Unlock: When this item is
turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked first
after the door unlock operation. When the door
handle request switch on the driver’s or front
passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked,
only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All
the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock
operation is performed again within one minute.
LHA1250
LHA1251
Language & Units:
Select Language:
Select the “Language & Units”key. Select the key
of the setting you wish to change.
Select the “English” key or the “Français” key to
change the language shown on the display.
When this item is turned to off, all the doors will
be unlocked after the door unlock operation is
performed once.
If you select the “Français” key, French language
will be displayed, so please use the French Own-
er’s Manual. To obtain a French Owner’s Manual,
please see “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual Or-
der Information” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section.
Intelligent Key Lock / Unlock: Select to turn
on or turn off the door lock/unlock function by
pushing the door handle request switch.
Return All Settings to Default: Select to
change all the comfort and convenience systems
to their default settings.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio settings
For audio settings, refer to “Audio System” in this
section.
Phone settings
For phone settings refer to “Bluetoothா Hands-
Free Phone System with Navigation System” in
this section.
Bluetoothா settings
For Bluetoothா phone settings, refer to
“Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System” in this section.
LHA1252
LHA1253
For Bluetoothா audio settings, refer to
“Bluetoothா Audio” in this section.
Select Units:
Switch beeps
Select the “US” (mi, °F, MPG) key or the “Metric”
(km, °C, L/100 km) key to change the units
shown on the display.
With this option on (indicator light illuminated), a
beep will sound if any control panel button is
pressed.
Volume & beeps settings
Navigation volume
For navigation volume settings, refer to the sepa-
rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for infor-
mation regarding these settings.
Voice Recognition:
BUTTON
For Voice Recognition settings, refer to “NISSAN
Voice Recognition system” in this section.
To change the display brightness, press
the
change the display to the day
night display.
button. Pressing the button again will
Phone volume
Navigation settings
or the
For phone volume settings refer to “Bluetoothா
Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation Sys-
tem” in this section.
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding these set-
tings.
If no operation is performed within 5 seconds, the
display will return to the previous display.
4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)
When the shift selector is shifted into the R
(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows the
view directly to the rear of the vehicle.
● When washing the vehicle with high-
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing wa-
ter condensation on the lens, a mal-
function, fire or an electric shock.
WARNING
● The system is designed as an aid to the
driver in detecting large stationary ob-
jects to help avoid damaging the ve-
hicle. The system will not detect small
objects below the bumper, and may not
detect objects close to the bumper or
on the ground.
● Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-
sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-
function or cause damage resulting in a
fire or an electric shock.
CAUTION
● The RearView Monitor is a convenience
but it is not a substitute for proper back-
ing. Always turn and check that it is safe
to do so before backing up. Always
back up slowly.
There is a plastic cover over the camera.
Do not scratch the cover when cleaning
dirt or snow from the cover.
LHA1254
Press and hold the
button for more than
two seconds to turn the display off. Press the
button again to turn the display on.
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
● Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-
tor differ from actual distance because
a wide-angle lens is used.
Lines which indicate the vehicle clearance and
distances to objects with reference to the
A
bumper line
are displayed on the monitor.
● Make sure that the trunk is securely
closed when backing up.
᭺
● Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is in-
stalled beside the license plate light.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
PREDICTED AND ACTUAL
DISTANCES
The distance guide line and the vehicle width
guide line should be used as a reference only
when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface. The
distance viewed on the monitor is for reference
only and may be different than the actual distance
between the vehicle and displayed objects.
LHA0437
They are indicated as reference distances to
objects. The lines and colors in the display indi-
A
cate distances from the back bumper line
the illustration.
in
᭺
1
1.5 ft (0.5 m) red
᭺
2
3 ft (1 m) yellow
᭺
3
7 ft (2 m) green
WHA1504
᭺
4
10 ft (3 m) green
Backing up on a steep uphill
᭺
The vehicle clearance lines are wider than
the actual clearance.
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis-
tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown closer than the actual distance.
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the
A
place
, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on
᭺
4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
B
the hill is the place
. Note that any object on
the hill is the place
. Note that any object on
᭺
᭺
the hill is viewed in the monitor farther than it
appears.
the hill is viewed in the monitor closer than it
appears.
WHA1505
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown farther than the actual distance.
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the
A
place
, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on
᭺
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
the position
if the object projects over the
᭺
actual backing up course.
LHA1272
Type A
WHA1506
Backing up behind a projecting object
C
The position
᭺
is shown farther than the position
᭺
B
C
in the display. However, the position
actually at the same distance as the position
The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to
is
᭺
A
.
᭺
4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
Do not adjust the Brightness or Contrast of
the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is
moving.
●
It may take some time until the RearView
Monitor is displayed after the shift selector
has been shifted to R (Reverse). Objects
may be distorted momentarily until the Rear-
View Monitor screen is displayed com-
pletely. When the shift selector is returned to
a position other than R (Reverse), it may take
some time until the screen changes. Objects
on the screen may be distorted until they are
completely displayed.
For vehicles with a touch screen (Type B):
●
To adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Display
ON/OFF and Color of the RearView Moni-
tor, press the SETTING button and then
select the “Display” key with the RearView
Monitor on. When the display adjustment
screen appears, touch the “–” or “+” key on
the desired item and adjust the level.
●
When the temperature is extremely high or
low, the screen may not clearly display ob-
jects. This is not a malfunction.
●
Do not adjust the Brightness, Contrast, and
Color of the RearView Monitor while the
vehicle is moving.
LHA1238
●
●
When strong light directly enters the cam-
era, objects may not be displayed clearly.
Type B
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
OPERATING TIPS
Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
screen. This is due to strong reflected light
from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.
The procedure for adjusting the quality of the
screen differs depending on the type of screen
present on the vehicle.
●
When the shift selector is shifted to R (Re-
verse), the monitor screen automatically
changes to the RearView Monitor mode.
However, the radio can be heard.
●
●
The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light. This is not a malfunction.
For vehicles without a touch screen (Type A):
●
To adjust the Brightness and Contrast,
press the ENTER button on the audio sys-
tem repeatedly until the desired setting is
displayed. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
adjust the display to the desired level.
The colors of objects on the RearView Moni-
tor may differ somewhat from those of the
actual object.
●
When the contrast of objects is low at night,
pressing the SETTING button or ENTER
button may not change the brightness.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VENTS
●
●
Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a
dark place or at night.
If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,
the RearView Monitor may not display ob-
jects. Clean the camera.
●
Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to
clean the camera. This will cause discolora-
tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent
and then wipe with a dry cloth.
●
●
Do not damage the camera as the monitor
screen may be adversely affected.
WHA0736
WHA0737
Do not use body wax on the camera window.
If body wax does get on the camera window,
wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp-
ened with mild detergent diluted with water.
Right and Left
Center
Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent
slides.
Open or close the vents by using the dial. Move
the dial toward the
to open the vents or
toward the to close them.
4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic)
WHA0688
WHA1171
Rear (if so equipped)
1. Driver temperature control dial
2. Air flow control buttons
3. Passenger temperature control dial
4. DUAL button
WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the Hybrid System is
in the READY mode. Even if the Hybrid
System is in the READY mode, the cool-
ing function will not operate if the high
voltage battery becomes discharged.
5. Rear defrost button
6. Front windshield defrost button
7. Fan speed dial/system OFF button
8. Air recirculation button
9. A/C ON/OFF button
10. AUTO button
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Turn the driver’s side temperature control
dial to the left or right to set the desired
temperature. Driver and passenger tem-
peratures can be set independently. Press
DUAL or turn the passenger temperature
control dial to the left or right to activate dual
climate control functions. Turn the passen-
ger’s side temperature control dial to the left
or right to set the desired passenger’s tem-
perature.
●
●
To quickly remove ice from the outside of the
windows, turn the manual fan control to HI.
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
As soon as possible after the windshield is
clean, push the AUTO button to return to the
auto mode.
●
When the
control is activated, the air
conditioner will automatically be turned on at
outside temperatures above 36°F (2°C).
This dehumidifies the air which helps defog
the windshield. The air recirculation mode
automatically turns off, allowing outside air
to be drawn into the passenger compart-
ment to further improve the defogging per-
formance.
●
Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F
(24°C) for normal operation.
● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
●
The temperature of the passenger compart-
ment will be maintained automatically. Air
flow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/off
are also controlled automatically.
Push the ignition switch to the ON position and
wait for the READY light to illuminate, then oper-
ate the controls to activate the air conditioner.
Rear window defroster switch
For more information about the rear window de-
froster switch, see “Rear window and outside
mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
●
A visible mist may be seen coming from the
vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is
cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-
function.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling or heating (auto)
MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging
This mode may be normally used all year round as
the system automatically works to keep a con-
stant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan
speed are also controlled automatically.
1. Push the defroster control button
to
turn the system on. The indicator light in the
button will illuminate.
Turn the fan control dial
manually control the fan speed.
left or right to
1. Push the AUTO button on.
2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or right
to set the desired temperature.
Press the
off.
/OFF button to turn the system
4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Push the AUTO button to return to automatic
control of the fan speed.
OPERATING TIPS
●
When the engine coolant temperature and
outside air temperature are low, the air flow
from the foot outlets may not operate for a
maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is
not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-
ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets
will operate normally.
Air recirculation
Push the air recirculation button
to recir-
culate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator
light on the switch will come on.
The air recirculation button will not be activated
when the air conditioner is in DEF or
mode.
Air flow control
Push the air flow control buttons to manually
control air flow and select the air outlet:
WHA0791
— Air flows from center and side
vents.
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
The sunload sensor, located on the top of the
instrument panel on the driver’s side, helps the
system maintain a constant temperature. Do not
put anything on or around this sensor.
— Air flows from defroster and foot
outlets.
— Air flows from defroster outlets.
To turn system off
Press the
/OFF button.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
AUDIO SYSTEM
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-
hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with
the environment in mind.
Reception conditions will constantly change be-
cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,
signal distance and interference from other ve-
hicles can work against ideal reception. De-
scribed below are some of the factors that can
affect your radio reception.
RADIO
With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON posi-
tion, press the PWR (power)/VOL (volume) knob
to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with
the engine not running, the ignition should be
placed in the ACC position.
This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-
quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-
tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants
will cause severe damage to your air conditioner
system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant
and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to come
from the audio system speakers. Storing the de-
vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-
nate the noise.
Radio reception is affected by station signal
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-
ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-
ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality
normally are caused by these external influences.
FM RADIO RECEPTION
Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-
hicle may influence radio reception quality.
A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-
mentally friendly” air conditioning system.
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi
(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM
having slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-
nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM
station reception even if the FM station is within
25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is
directly related to the distance between the
transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-
of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-
acteristics as light. For example, they will reflect
off objects.
Radio reception
WARNING
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-
dio reception. These circuits are designed to
extend reception range, and to enhance the qual-
ity of that reception.
The air conditioner system contains re-
frigerant under high pressure. To avoid
personal injury, any air conditioner ser-
vice should be done only by an experi-
enced technician with proper equipment.
However, there are some general characteristics
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even
when the finest equipment is used. These char-
acteristics are completely normal in a given re-
ception area and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
and/or drift.
4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Static and flutter: During signal interference from
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position
(usually in conjunction with increased distance
from the station transmitter), static or flutter can
be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the
treble control to reduce treble response.
SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
equipped)
When the satellite radio is used for the first time
or the battery has been replaced, the satellite
radio may not work properly. This is not a mal-
function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite
radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or
large building for satellite radio to receive all of
the necessary data.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective
characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected
signals reach the receiver at the same time. The
signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-
mentary flutter or loss of sound.
No satellite radio reception is available and “NO
SAT” is displayed when the SAT band option is
selected unless optional satellite receiver and
antenna are installed and an XMா satellite radio
service subscription is active. Satellite radio is
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can
bend around objects and skip along the ground.
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of
these characteristics, AM signals are also sub-
ject to interference as they travel from transmitter
to receiver.
Satellite radio performance may be affected if
cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio
signal.
If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite
antenna.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in
areas where no obstacles exist.
A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can
affect satellite radio performance. Remove the
ice to restore satellite radio reception.
LHA0099
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
CDs that are in poor condition or are
dirty, scratched or covered with finger-
prints may not work properly.
CHECK DISC:
Compact disc (CD) player (models
without Navigation System)
● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-
rectly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).
The following CDs may not work prop-
erly:
CAUTION
● Do not force a compact disc into the CD
insert slot. This could damage the CD
and/or CD player.
● Confirm that the CD is not bent or
warped and it is free of scratches.
● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
PRESS EJECT:
● Only one CD can be loaded into the CD
player at a time.
This is an error due to excessive tem-
perature inside the player. Remove the
CD by pressing the EJECT button. After
a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD
can be played when the temperature of
the player returns to normal.
●
Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunc-
tion:
●
●
Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter
● CDs that are not round
UNPLAYABLE:
During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the hu-
midity. If this occurs, remove the CD
and dehumidify or ventilate the player
completely.
The file is unplayable in this audio sys-
tem (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped)
CD).
● CDs with a paper label
● CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
CD/DVD combination player (models
with Navigation System)
●
●
This audio system can only play pre-
recorded CDs. It has no capability to
record or burn CDs.
●
●
The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
●
Do not force a disc into the CD/DVD
insert slot. This could damage the
CD/DVD player.
The CD player sometimes cannot func-
tion when the compartment tempera-
ture is extremely high or low.
Decrease/increase the temperature
before use.
If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.
●
Do not expose the CD to direct sun-
light.
4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the hu-
midity. If this occurs, remove the
CD/DVD and dehumidify or ventilate
the player completely.
● Recordable compact discs (DVD R,
DVD R DL)
Please Eject Disc:
This error may be due to the tempera-
ture inside the player getting too high.
Remove the CD/DVD by pushing the
EJECT button, and after a short time
reinsert the CD/DVD. The CD/DVD can
be played when the temperature of the
player returns to normal. If the error
persists, consult your local dealership.
● Rewritable
compact
discs
(DVD RW, DVD RW DL)
●
Do not use the following CDs/DVDs as
they may cause the CD/DVD player to
malfunction.
●
●
The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
The CD/DVD player sometimes cannot
function when the passenger compart-
ment temperature is extremely high.
Decrease the temperature before use.
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs
Unplayable File:
● CDs/DVDs that are not round
● CDs/DVDs with a paper label
● The file may be copy protected.
● The file is not MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A
or DIVX type.
●
Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” or “DVD Video”
logo on the disc or packaging.
● CDs/DVDs
scratched, or have abnormal edges
that
are
warped,
Region Invalid
● This audio system can only play pre-
recorded CDs/DVDs. It has no capa-
bilities to record or burn CDs/DVDs.
● The DVD is not for region 1 or all
regions.
●
●
Do not expose the CD/DVD to direct
sunlight.
●
If the CD/DVD cannot be played, one of
the following messages will be dis-
played.
● Use DVDs with a region code “1”,
“ALL” or “1 included” for your DVD
entertainment system. (The region
CDs/DVDs that are of poor quality,
dirty, scratched, covered with finger-
prints, or that have pinholes may not
work properly.
A
is displayed as a small sym-
code
Disc Read Error:
᭺
bol printed on the top of the DVD
● Confirm that the CD/DVD is inserted
correctly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).
B
.) This vehicle-installed DVD
player cannot play DVDs with a re-
gion code other than “1” or “ALL”.
●
The following CDs/DVDs are not guar-
anteed to play:
᭺
● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
● Confirm that the CD/DVD is not bent
or warped and it is free of scratches.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
This copyright protected technology
cannot be used without a permit from
Macrovision Corporation. It is limited
to personal use, etc., as long as the
permit from Macrovision Corporation
is not issued.
●
During cold weather or rainy days, the player
may malfunction due to the humidity. If this
occurs, remove the USB memory stick and
dehumidify or ventilate the player com-
pletely.
●
●
The player sometimes cannot function when
the passenger compartment temperature is
extremely high. Decrease the temperature
before use.
●
●
●
Modifying or disassembling is prohib-
ited.
Dolby digital is manufactured under li-
cense from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.
Do not leave the USB memory in a place
prone to static electricity or where the air
conditioner blows directly. The data in the
USB memory may be damaged.
Dolby and the double D mark “
”
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories,
Inc.
●
●
Prepare the USB device by yourself be-
cause it is not equipped with the vehicle.
●
DTS and DTS Digital Surround “
are registered trademarks of Digital
Theater Systems, Inc.
”
The USB device cannot be formatted with
this system. If you want to format the USB
memory, use your personal computer.
Universal Serial Bus (USB) memory (if
so equipped)
●
●
Partitioned USB devices may not be played
correctly.
This system supports various USB memory
sticks, USB hard drives and iPodா players. There
are some USB devices which may not be sup-
ported with this system.
LHA0484
Some characters used in other languages
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed
properly on the vehicle center screen.
NISSAN recommends using English lan-
guage characters with USB devices.
Copyright and trademark
●
The technology protected by the U.S.
patent and other intellectual property
●
Make sure that the USB device is connected
correctly into the USB connector.
rights
owned
by
Macrovision
Corporation and other right holders is
adopted for this system.
●
Do not force the memory stick or USB cable
into the USB connector.
4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
●
Do not connect the USB device if the con-
nector or cable is wet. Allow the cable
and/or connectors to dry completely before
connecting the USB device.
●
If you are using an iPodா (3rd Generation
with Dock connector), do not use very long
names for the song title, album name or artist
name to avoid the iPodா resetting itself.
●
Do not place the Bluetoothா audio device in
an area surrounded by metal or far away from
the in-vehicle Bluetoothா module to prevent
tone quality degradation and wireless con-
nection disruption.
Large video podcast files cause slow re-
sponses in the iPodா. The vehicle center
display may momentarily black out, but it will
soon recover.
iPodா is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
●
●
While an audio device is connected through
the Bluetoothா wireless connection, the bat-
tery power of the device may discharge
quicker than usual.
Bluetoothா streaming audio (if so
equipped)
If the iPodா automatically selects large video
podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the
vehicle center display may momentarily
black out, but it will soon recover.
●
Some Bluetoothா audio devices may not be
recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.
This system supports the Bluetoothா Audio
Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).
●
It is necessary to set up the wireless con-
nection between a compatible Bluetoothா
audio device and the in-vehicle Bluetoothா
module before using the Bluetoothா audio.
BLUETOOTH is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed to
Clarion.
●
●
Audiobooks may not play in the same order
as they appear on the iPodா.
The iPodா nano (1st Generation) may re-
main in fast forward or rewind mode if it is
connected during a seek operation. In this
case, please manually reset the iPodா.
●
●
Operating procedure of the Bluetoothா au-
dio will vary depending on the devices. Make
sure how to operate your audio device be-
fore using it with this system.
●
●
The iPodா nano (2nd Generation) will con-
tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is discon-
nected during a seek operation.
The Bluetoothா audio may be stopped under
the following conditions:
● Receiving a call on the Hands-Free
Phone System.
An incorrect song title may appear when the
Play Mode is changed while using the iPodா
nano (2nd generation).
● Checking the connection to the hands-
free phone.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
conversion) per second.
Compact Disc with MP3 or WMA
(models without Navigation System)
Terms:
Multisession — Multisession is one of the
methods for writing data to media. Writing
data once to the media is called a single
session, and writing more than once is called
a multisession.
●
MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well-known compressed digital audio
file format. This format allows for near “CD
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the
file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with
virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3
compression removes the redundant and
irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the
human ear doesn’t hear.
●
ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
contains information about the digital music
file such as song title, artist, encoding bit
rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-
mation is displayed on the Artist/song title
line on the display.
* Windowsா and Windows Mediaா are regis-
tered trademarks and trademarks in the United
States of America and other countries of Mi-
crosoft Corporation of the USA.
●
WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a
compressed audio format created by Mi-
crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA
codec offers greater file compression than
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.
WHA1078
Playback order chart
●
Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback order:
Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA
files is as illustrated.
●
●
●
The names of folders not containing MP3 or
WMA files are not shown in the display.
If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software.
Therefore, the files might not play in the
desired order.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specification chart:
Supported media
CD, CD-R, CD-RW
Supported file systems
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
Version
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
MP3
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
8 kHz - 48 kHz
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
Supported
versions*1
WMA
Version
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
32 kHz - 48 kHz
48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR
Tag information
Folder levels
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
128 characters
Text character number limitation
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:
UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)
Displayable character codes*2
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide:
Symptom
Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
Cannot play
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for
folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Poor sound quality
Bit rate may be too low.
It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.
before the music starts
playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Music cuts off or skips
Skipping with high bit rate
files
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
Moves immediately to the
next song when playing
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there
will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.
Songs do not play back in
the desired order
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
AAC/M4A
—
Advanced Audio Coding
●
ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
contains information about the digital music
file such as song title, artist, album title,
encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.
ID3 tag information is displayed on the
Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.
CD, DVD or USB with Compressed
Audio Files (models with Navigation
System)
(AAC) is a lossy audio compression format.
Audio files that have been encoded with
AAC are generally smaller in size and deliver
a higher quality of sound than MP3.
The file types supported by this system are MP3,
WMA, AAC/M4A and ATRAC3.
●
●
ATRAC3, ATRAC3 Plus — Adaptive Trans-
form Acoustic Coding (ATRAC) is a lossy
audio compression format developed by
Sony.
Explanation of terms:
* Windowsா, Windows Mediaா and Windows
Vistaா are registered trademarks or trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the United States of
America and/or other countries.
●
MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well known compressed digital audio
file format. This format allows for near “CD
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track can reduce the file size by ap-
proximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1 kHz,
Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no percep-
tible loss in quality. The compression re-
duces certain parts of sound that seem in-
audible to most people.
Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
●
●
Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
conversion) per second.
Multisession — Multisession is one of the
methods for writing data to media. Writing
data once to the media is called a single
session, and writing more than once is called
a multisession.
●
WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a
compressed audio format created by Mi-
crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA
codec offers greater file compression than
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.
4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback order:
Music playback order of a CD, DVD or USB
device with compressed audio files is as illus-
trated.
●
The folder names of folders not containing
compressed audio files are not shown in the
display.
●
●
If there is a file in the top level of the
disc/USB, “Root Folder” is displayed.
The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software, so
the files might not play in the desired order.
WHA1374
Playback order chart
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specification chart:
Supported media
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVD R, DVD RW, DVD R DL, USB 2.0
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVD R, DVD RW, DVD R DL, ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vistaா operating system-based computer) are not supported.
Supported file systems
UDF Bridge (UDF 1.02 + ISO9660), UDF 1.5, UDF 2.0
* VDF 1.5/VDF 2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.
USB memory: FAT16, FAT32
Version
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
MP3
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
8 kHz - 48 kHz
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4
WMA*2 Version
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
Supported
versions*1
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
32 kHz - 48 kHz
32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4
AAC
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
8 kHz - 96 kHz
16 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4
ATRAC Version
ATRAC3, ATRAC3 Plus
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER 2.4 (MP3 only)
Tag information (Song title and artist name)
WMA tag (WMA only)
Folder levels
Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
128 characters
Text character number limitation
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:
UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF 16 BOM Little Endian), 07: SHIFT-JIS
Displayable character codes*3
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.
*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.
4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide:
Symptom
Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the CD/DVD/USB device was inserted correctly.
Check if the CD/DVD is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Cannot play
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.AAC”, “.M4A” or “.AA3” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of charac-
ters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of the compressed audio file writ-
ing application or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the CD/DVD/USB device is protected by copyright.
Check if the CD/DVD is scratched or dirty.
Poor sound quality
It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the CD/DVD/USB device, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts
before the music starts
playing.
playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Music cuts off or skips
Skipping with high bit rate
files
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
Moves immediately to the
next song when playing
If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like “.MP3”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the
player will skip to the next song.
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.
Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on the USB device.
Songs do not play back in
the desired order
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compressed Video Files (models with
Navigation System)
Explanation of terms:
●
DivX – DivX refers to the DivXா codec
owned by Div, Inc. used for a lossy compres-
sion of video based on MPEG-4.
●
AVI – AVI stands for Audio Video Interleave.
It is standard file format originated by Mi-
crosoft Corporation. A .divx encoded file can
be saved into the .avi file format for playback
on this system if it meets the requirements
stated in the table in this section. However,
all .avi files are not playable on this system
since different encodings can be used other
than the DivXா codec.
●
●
ASF – ASF stands for Advanced Systems
Format. It is file format owned by Microsoft
Corporation. Note: Only .asf files that meet
the requirements stated in the table in this
section can be played.
Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital video files.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Requirements for Supporting Video Playback:
Media
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD, DVD R, DVD RW, DVD RW DL, USB 2.0 Memory
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD,
DVD R, DVD RW, DVD RW
DL
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet, UDF Bridge (UDF1.02+ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported.
* VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.
File Systems
USB Memory
.divx, .avi
FAT16, FAT32
Video Codecs
Audio Codecs
Video Codec
Audio Codec
Maximum Average
Maximum Peak
Minimum
DivX3, DivX4, DivX5, DivX6
MP3, MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3, AC3, LPCM
File Types
Bit Rates
Resolution
.asf
ISO-MPEG4
G.726
.divx, .avi
.divx, .avi
.asf
4 Mbps
8 Mbps
32 x 32
Maximum
720 x 480
32 x 32
Minimum
Maximum
720 x 576
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. RADIO button
13. CD button
14. DISP button
15. PRESET A·B·C button
16. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
17.
pause/mute button
FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)
For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-
tion precautions” earlier in this section.
Audio main operation
PWR/VOL control knob
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, then press the PWR/VOL control knob.
If you listen to the radio with the engine not
running, place the ignition in the ACC position.
The mode (radio or CD) that was playing imme-
diately before the system was turned off resumes
playing.
LHA0728
1. SEEK/TRACK button
2. CD insert slot
3. TUNE/FF·REW button
6. CLOCK button
7. AUX IN jack
8. SCAN button
9. RDM/RPT button
10. PWR/VOL control knob
11. AUX button
When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.
Pressing the PWR/VOL control knob again turns
the system off.
4.
CD eject button
Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to the right to
increase volume or to the left to decrease volume.
5. AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE, FADE
and BALANCE)
4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO button (Bass, Treble, Fade and Bal-
ance)
DISP (display) button:
Clock set
Pressing the DISP (display) button will show text
about CD information in the audio display.
1. Press and hold the CLOCK button for ap-
proximately 2 seconds.
Press the AUDIO button to change the mode as
follows:
If the text information is to long to fully be dis-
played on the screen; press and hold the DISP
button for longer than 1.5 seconds to scroll
through the rest of the text.
2. The display will show “H-Seek M-Tune”.
Bass → Treble → Fade → Balance → Beep
3. Press the SEEK/TRACK button
ON/OFF → Audio → Bass
or
to adjust the hours.
TUNE/FF·REW
To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance press
the AUDIO button until the desired mode ap-
4. Press
or
button
CD display mode
pears
in
the
display.
Press
the
to adjust the minutes.
To change the text displayed while playing a CD
with text, press the DISP button. The DISP button
will allow you to scroll
TUNE/FF·REW
or
to adjust Bass
5. Press the CLOCK button again to exit the
clock set mode.
and Treble to the desired level. You can also use
the TUNE/FF·REW button to adjust Fade and
Balance mode. Fade adjusts the sound level be-
tween the front and rear speakers and Balance
adjusts the sound between the right and left
speaker.
through CD text as follows: Track number and
Track time → Album title → Song title.
The display will return to the regular clock display
after 10 seconds, or you may press the CLOCK
button again to return to the regular clock display.
●
●
●
●
Track number displays the track number se-
lected on the disc.
pause/mute button:
To turn the Beep sound off or on, press the
AUDIO button until Beep is displayed. Press the
Track time displays the amount of time the
track has played.
To mute or pause the audio sound, press
TUNE/FF·REW button
or
until the
the
pause/mute button. Press the
Album title displays the title of the CD being
played.
desired mode is displayed. This turns on or turns
off the beep sound when audio buttons are
pressed.
button again to resume the audio sound.
FM/AM radio operation
FM/AM band select:
Song title displays the title of the selected
CD track.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedly
until the radio or CD display reappears. Other-
wise, the radio or CD display will automatically
reappear after about 10 seconds.
Clock operation
Pressing the RADIO button will change the band
as follows:
Pressing the CLOCK button displays the clock
with the radio on or off. Press the CLOCK button
again to turn off the clock display.
AM ←→ FM
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the RADIO button is pressed while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
radio will come on at the station last played.
cient signal strength. When scanning, SCAN
blinks in the display. Pressing the SCAN button
again during this 5 second period stops scan
tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.
Compact disc (CD) player operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, and carefully insert the compact disc
into the slot with the label side up. The compact
disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts
to play.
If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO
button is pressed, the compact disc will auto-
matically be turned off and the last radio station
played will come on.
Station memory operations:
18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio to
the A, B and C preset button in any combination
of AM or FM stations.
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates during
FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
signal is weak, the radio automatically changes
from stereo to monaural reception.
CD button:
1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to change
between storage banks. The radio displays
the icon A, B or C to indicate which set of
presets are active.
When the CD button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns
off and the last used compact disc starts to play.
TUNE/FF·REW (tuning)
button:
2. Tune to the desired station using manual
TUNE or SEEK tuning. Press and hold any of
the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6)
until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes
when the select button is pressed.)
TUNE/FF·REW
(Fast Forward, Rewind)
button:
Press the TUNE/FF·REW button
or
for manual tuning. To move quickly through the
channels, hold the tuning buttons down.
When the TUNE/FF·REW button
or
SEEK (tuning) button:
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
is pressed while the compact disc is playing, the
compact disc plays at an increased speed while
fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is
released, the compact disc returns to normal play
speed.
Press the SEEK/TRACK button
or
to tune from high to low or low to high frequen-
cies and stop at the next broadcasting station.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-
ner.
SCAN (tuning) button:
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Press the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in the
display window. Scan tuning begins from low to
high frequencies. Scan tuning stops for 5 sec-
onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi-
4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Random Disc: The order of the tracks on the disc
will be mixed during play.
AUX (Auxiliary) button:
SEEK/TRACK button:
The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The
AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard
analog audio input such as from a portable cas-
sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop com-
puters.
Repeat Track: The track that is currently playing
will be repeated.
When
is pressed while the compact disc
is playing, the next track following the present
one starts to play from the beginning.
SCAN (CDs) button:
Press
several times to skip several tracks.
Press the SCAN button less than 1.5 seconds to
scan all tracks of the current disc for 10 seconds
per track. The SCAN icon is flashed during scan
mode.
Press the AUX button to play a compatible device
when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.
Each time the button is pressed, the CD ad-
vances 1 additional track. The track number ap-
pears in the display window. (When the last track
on the compact disc is skipped, the first track is
played.)
The scan mode is canceled once it scans through
all tracks on the disc, or if the SCAN button is
pressed during scan mode.
When
is pressed, the track being played
several
returns to the beginning. Press
CD EJECT:
times to skip back several tracks. Each time the
button is pressed the CD moves back 1 track.
When the
button is pressed with a com-
pause/mute button:
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected.
To pause the sound while a CD is playing, press
When the
button is pressed while the
the
pause/mute button. “Pause” is shown
compact disc is playing, the compact disc will
eject and the system will turn off.
on the display. Press the
resume playing the CD.
button again to
CD IN indicator:
RDM/RPT button:
When the RDM/RPT button is pressed while the
compact disc is being played, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
A CD icon indicator appears on the display when
a CD is loaded with the system on.
Random Disc ←→ Repeat Track ←→ Normal
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. AM-FM button
13. RPT button
14. VOL/ON-OFF control knob
15. RDM button
*No satellite radio reception is available
when the AUX button is pressed to ac-
cess satellite radio stations unless op-
tional satellite receiver and antenna are
installed and an XMா satellite radio ser-
vice subscription is active. Satellite ra-
dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so
equipped)
For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-
tion precautions” earlier in this section.
Audio main operation
WHA1475
VOL/ON·OFF control:
1. SCAN button
2. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
3. CD insert slot
4. Display screen
5. iPod MENU button
7. SEEK/CATEGORY button
8. SETTING/ENTER button, SCROLL/
TUNE knob
9. AUX IN jack
10. AUX button
11. CD button
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and push the VOL/ON·OFF control knob
while the system is off to call up the mode (radio
or CD) that was playing immediately before the
system was turned off.
6.
CD eject button
4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF
control knob.
Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the
volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-
sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. When this feature
is active, the audio volume changes as the driving
speed changes.
Setting control knob (Audio, Display and
Clock):
Press the SETTING button to adjust the audio,
display and clock settings as follows:
LHA1270
LHA1271
Bass → Treble → Fade → Balance → Speed
Sensitive Volume (SSV) (if so equipped) →
Brightness → Contrast → On-screen Clock →
Clock Adjust → Bass
Once the desired setting is displayed on the
screen, turn the SCROLL/TUNE knob left or right
to adjust the chosen setting. Press the SETTING
button to move to the next setting or wait approxi-
mately five seconds to exit the setting adjustment
mode.
Audio settings:
Speed Sensitive Volume (if so equipped):
Adjust the bass, treble, fade and balance by
selecting the desired setting with the SETTING
button and then adjusting the level with the
SCROLL/TUNE knob. Balance adjusts the
sound between the left and right speakers. Fade
adjusts the sound between the front and rear
speakers.
To change the Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)
level from 1 to 5, or to turn the feature off entirely,
choose the Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV) set-
ting with the SETTING button and then adjust the
level with the SCROLL/TUNE knob. Speed Sen-
sitive Volume (SSV) adjusts the volume of the
audio system as the vehicle’s driving speed
changes.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1272
LHA1273
LHA1274
Display settings:
On-screen Clock:
Clock adjust:
To adjust the brightness or contrast of the display
screen, press the SETTING button until the cho-
sen setting is displayed. Use the SCROLL/TUNE
knob to adjust the display to the desired level.
The clock is shown in the upper right corner of
the screen. To turn this feature off or to re-enable
the clock display after it has been turned off,
press the SETTING button until the On-screen
To adjust the time, perform the following steps:
1. Press the SETTING button repeatedly until
the Clock Adjust mode is displayed on the
screen.
Clock
mode
is
displayed.
Use
the
SCROLL/TUNE knob to toggle the feature on or
off.
2. The hours will begin blinking. Adjust the
hours by turning the SCROLL/TUNE knob
left or right and press the ENTER button.
3. The minutes will begin blinking. Adjust the
minutes by turning the SCROLL/TUNE knob
left or right and press the ENTER button.
4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iPodா MENU button
When the AUX button is pressed while the igni-
tion switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
radio will come on at the station last played.
SCAN tuning:
This button can only be used for iPodா opera-
tions. See “iPodா player operation without Navi-
gation System” later in this section for details
about the function of this button.
Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-
casting station for 5 seconds. SCAN will appear
on the screen while the radio is scan tuning.
The last station played will also come on when
the VOL/ON-OFF control knob is pressed to turn
the radio on.
Pressing the button again during this 5 second
period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will
remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is
not pressed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning
moves to the next station.
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
*When the AUX button is pressed, the satellite
radio mode will be skipped unless an optional
satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an
XMா satellite radio service subscription is active.
Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.
AM·FM button:
Press the AM·FM button to change the band as
follows:
1 to 6 Station memory operations:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for
FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for
the AM band.
If another audio source is playing when the
AM·FM button is pressed, the audio source play-
ing will automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will begin playing.
If a compact disc is playing when the AUX button
is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be
turned off and the last radio station played will
come on.
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the AM·FM select button.
The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on
the screen during FM stereo reception. When the
stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio auto-
matically changes from stereo to monaural re-
ception.
SCROLL/TUNE knob (Tuning):
2. Tune to the desired station using manual,
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any
of the desired station memory buttons (1 –
6) until a beep sound is heard.
Turn the SCROLL/TUNE knob to the left or right
for manual tuning.
SEEK tuning:
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
SAT band select:
Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button
Pressing the AUX button will change the band as
follows:
or
to tune from low to high or high to low
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-
ner.
frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting
station.
AUX → XM1* → XM2* → AUX (satellite, if so
equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
SEEK/CATEGORY
(Reverse or Fast Forward)
button:
Compact disc (CD) player operation
Press and hold the SEEK/CATEGORY
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and carefully insert the compact disc
into the slot with the label side up. The compact
disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts
to play.
button
or
for 1.5 seconds while the
compact disc is playing to reverse or fast forward
the track being played. The compact disc plays at
an increased speed while reversing or fast for-
warding. When the button is released, the com-
pact disc returns to normal play speed.
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
SEEK/CATEGORY button:
CD button:
LHA1275
When the CD button is pressed with the system
off and the compact disc loaded, the system will
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.
CD/MP3 display mode:
Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button
while
a CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press the
While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain text
may be displayed on the screen if the CD has
been encoded with text information. Depending
on how the MP3/WMA CD is encoded, informa-
tion such as Artist, Song and Folder will be dis-
played.
When the CD button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will
automatically be turned off and the compact disc
will start to play.
SEEK/CATEGORY button
several times
to skip backward several tracks.
Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button
while
a CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance
one track. Press the SEEK/CATEGORY
The track number and the total number of tracks
in the current folder or on the current disc are
displayed on the screen as well. For example, the
first track out of fourteen total is currently playing.
button
several times to skip forward sev-
eral tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped, the
first track on the disc is played. If the last track in
a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first
track of the next folder is played.
4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCROLL/TUNE knob (MP3/WMA CD only):
RDM button:
Press the AUX button to play a compatible device
plugged into the AUX IN jack. The AUX button is
also used to switch the audio system to a source
plugged into the USB input jack in the center
console. When a device is plugged into the AUX
IN jack while another device is plugged into the
USB input jack, the AUX button is used to toggle
between the two functions.
When the RDM button is pressed while a com-
pact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
If an MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is play-
ing, turn the SCROLL/TUNE knob to change
folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back a
folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a
folder.
CD:
1 DISC RDM ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 DISC RDM → 1 FOLDER RDM → OFF
1 DISC RDM: all tracks on the disc will be played
randomly.
RPT button:
For more information about the USB input jack,
see “USB interface” in this section.
When the RPT button is pressed while a com-
pact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
EJECT button:
CD:
When the
button is pressed with a com-
1 FOLDER RDM: all tracks in the current folder
will be played randomly.
1 TRK RPT ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and
the last source will be played.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
When the
button is pressed twice with a
1 FOLDER RPT → 1 TRK RPT → OFF
1 TRK RPT: the current track will be repeated.
compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected further for easier CD removal. If the disc
is not removed within 20 seconds, the disc will
reload.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on
the screen unless no pattern is applied.
1 FOLDER RPT: the current folder will be re-
peated.
AUX button:
The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The
AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard
analog audio input such as from a portable cas-
sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop
computer.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-
cator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on
the screen unless no pattern is applied.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*No satellite radio reception is available
when the XM button is pressed to ac-
cess satellite radio stations unless op-
tional satellite receiver and antenna are
installed and an XMா satellite radio ser-
vice subscription is active. Satellite ra-
dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH CD/DVD
PLAYER (if so equipped)
For all operation precautions, see ЉAudio opera-
tion precautionsЉ in this section.
Audio main operation
VOL/ON·OFF control:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and push the VOL/ON·OFF control knob
while the system is off to call up the mode that
was playing immediately before the system was
turned off.
LHA1391
1. OPEN/TILT button (Screen tilts down to
expose CD/DVD insert slot)
2. Display screen
3. SETTING button
4. AUDIO button/control knob
5. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
6.
Seeking button
To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF
control knob.
7. VOL/ON·OFF control knob
8. DISC·AUX button
9. XM button*
10. FM·AM button
11.
Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the
volume.
button
4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)
for audio. The audio volume changes as the driv-
ing speed changes.
AUDIO control knob (Bass, Treble, Balance
and Fade):
Press the AUDIO control knob to change the
mode as follows:
Bass → Treble → Balance → Fade
To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, press
the AUDIO control knob until the desired mode
appears in the display. Turn the tuning knob to
adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. You
can also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade and
Balance modes. Fade adjusts the sound level
between the front and rear speakers and Balance
adjusts the sound between the right and left
speakers.
LHA1236
LHA1256
Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV):
To change the SSV mode from OFF to 5, press
the SETTING button. Select the “Audio” key to
display the audio settings screen. Select the “–”
key or “+” key to change the SSV level.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the AUDIO control knob re-
peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears.
If the control knob is not pressed for approxi-
mately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will
automatically reappear.
While in this screen you can also adjust the other
audio settings by selecting the corresponding
key.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, select the “Back” key.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
●
Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
song name.
Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
album name.
Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
artist’s name.
Some of this text might not display while playing a
regular CD.
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM/AM band select:
Pressing the FM·AM button will change the band
as follows:
LHA1257
LHA1258
Display album cover art:
CD, DVD or USB with compressed audio
files
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
When the FM·AM button is pressed while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
radio will come on at the station last played.
When an audio source encoded with album
cover art is played, the album cover art can be
displayed on the screen. To toggle this feature on
or off, touch the “Display Album Cover Art” key.
When the feature is activated, the amber indica-
tor next to the word ON will illuminate.
While listening to a CD or compressed audio
files, certain text might be able to be displayed
(when CD encoded with text is being used).
The last station played will also come on when
the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.
Depending on how the CD or compressed audio
files are encoded, the following text might be
displayed:
If a compact disc is playing when the FM·AM
button is pressed, the compact disc will auto-
matically be turned off and the last radio station
played will come on.
●
Folder displays the name of the current
folder being accessed.
●
File displays the name of the file currently
playing.
4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The FM stereo indicator STEREO will illuminate
during FM stereo reception. When the stereo
broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automati-
cally change from stereo to monaural reception.
TUNE/FOLDER (Tuning) knob:
2. Tune to the desired station using
the
seeking button. Press and
To manually tune the radio, turn the
TUNE/FOLDER knob to the right or left.
hold any of the desired station memory but-
tons (1 – 6) until the preset number is up-
dated on the display and the sound is briefly
muted.
Seeking button:
XM band select:
Press the XM button to change the band as
follows:
For AM or FM:
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
Press the
tune from high to low frequencies and stop at the
next broadcasting station. Press the side
of the seeking button to tune from low to high
frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting
station.
side of the seeking button to
XM1* → XM2* → XM3* → XM1 (satellite, if so
equipped)
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-
ner.
When the XM button is pressed while the ignition
switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will
come on at the station last played.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
For XM:
The last station played will also come on when
the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.
Press the
or
side of the seeking
List (AM and FM)
button to go to the first channel of the previous or
next category.
*When the XM button is pressed, the satellite
radio reception will not be available unless an
optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-
stalled and an XMா satellite radio service sub-
scription is active. Satellite radio is not available
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
Select the “List” key to see a list of the presets in
the AM, FM1 or FM2 preset banks.
1 to 6 Station memory operations:
Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelve
stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1, 6
for FM2). Eighteen channels can be set for the
XM radio (6 for XM1, 6 for XM2, 6 for XM3 – if so
equipped).
If a compact disc is playing when the XM button
is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be
turned off and the last radio station played will
come on.
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM select button, or choose
the satellite band XM1, XM2 or XM3 using
the XM button.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
– Turn the Alert ON to indicate whenever a
favorite artist or song is playing on XM.
The audio system must be playing XM
radio for this feature to work.
– Delete a favorite artist or song.
●
●
Categories – Displays a category list for XM
radio. Select a category to select the first
channel for that category.
Direct Tune – Tune to a channel by entering
the channel number.
Radio data system (RDS):
RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data
information service transmitted by some radio
stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-
rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but
many stations are now considering broadcasting
RDS data.
LHA1375
LHA1413
Menu (XM, if so equipped)
Select the “Menu” key to see a list of options:
Compact disc (CD) player operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. The CD/DVD insert slot is located be-
hind the display screen. To insert a CD, press the
OPEN/TILT button on the audio unit. The display
screen will automatically move down to expose
the CD/DVD insert slot. Insert the CD into the
slot with the label side facing up. The CD will be
guided automatically into the slot and begin play-
ing. To return the display screen to its upright
position after the CD is inserted, press the
OPEN/TILT button again.
●
●
●
Preset List – Displays the list of presets.
Press and hold the key on the touchscreen
to save a preset.
RDS can display:
●
●
●
Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.
Station name, such as “The Groove”.
Customize Channel List – deselect chan-
nels to skip while using the TUNE/FOLDER
knob.
Music or programming type such as “Clas-
sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.
Favorite Artist & Songs
●
Station specific text.
– Tags the current artist or song playing on
XM as a favorite.
If the station broadcasts RDS information, the
text information is automatically displayed.
If the radio is already operating, it will automati-
cally turn off and the compact disc will play.
4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the system has been turned off while the com-
pact disc was playing, pressing the
VOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the compact
disc.
the button is pressed. (When the last track on the
compact disc is skipped through, the first track
will be played.)
Seeking (Rewind and Fast
Forward) button:
DISC·AUX button:
When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the
system off and the compact disc loaded, the
system will turn on and the compact disc will start
to play.
Press and hold the
button or the
while a compact disc is playing; the compact disc
will play while rewinding or fast forwarding. When
the button is released, the compact disc will
return to normal play speed.
side of the seeking
side of the seeking button
When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the
compact disc loaded but the radio playing, the
radio will automatically be turned off and the
compact disc will start to play.
TUNE/FOLDER knob
LHA1258
While playing a CD with compressed audio files,
turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob right or left to play
the next or previous folder.
CD menu
Seeking button:
Touch the “Menu” key on the display while a CD
or CD with compressed audio files is playing to
bring up a list of options. Depending on the type
of CD being played, the following options may be
available:
When the
side of the seeking button is
pressed while a compact disc is playing, the track
being played returns to its beginning. Press sev-
eral times to skip back through tracks. The com-
pact disc will go back the number of times the
button is pressed.
When the
side of the seeking button is
pressed while the compact disc is playing, the
next track will start to play from its beginning.
Press several times to skip through tracks. The
compact disc will advance the number of times
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1259
LHA1262
LHA1260
Normal - Plays all tracks on the CD in sequential
order until stopped.
●
Folder List
●
Play Mode
The folders on the disc are displayed. Select the
key of a folder name to begin playing tracks from
that folder.
This option allows you to alter the play pattern of
the CD. Touch the key of the mode you wish to
apply. The modes change the play pattern as
follows:
1 Track Repeat - the current track is repeated.
1 Disc Random- tracks from the entire disc are
played randomly.
1 Folder Repeat (compressed audio files CD
only) - the current folder is repeated.
1 Folder Random (compressed audio files CD
only) - tracks from the current folder are played
randomly.
4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1261
LHA1267
LHA1415
●
Track List
●
●
Title Text Priority
CD EJECT button:
The tracks on the disc are displayed. Select the
key of a track name to begin playing that track.
Record to Music Box, Automatic Recording,
Recording Quality
To eject a CD, press the OPEN/TILT button to
lower the display screen. Once the screen is in
the lowered position, press the
For more information about these options, see
“Music Box™ Hard Drive Audio System” in this
section.
button to
1
the left of the CD/DVD insert slot . The CD will
᭺
be ejected.
When the
button is pressed while the CD
is being played, the CD will eject and the system
will turn off.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before connecting a device to the auxiliary input
jacks, turn off the power of the portable device.
With a compatible device connected to the aux-
iliary input jacks, press the DISC·AUX button
repeatedly until the AUX mode appears in the
display. The output from the device will be played
through the display (when the vehicle is in the (P)
Park position and the parking brake engaged)
and audio system.
LHA1414
WHA1393
AUX settings
AUX (auxiliary) input jacks
Select the “Settings” key.
The auxiliary input jacks are located inside the
1
center console
. NTSC compatible devices
᭺
The display mode can be set to Normal, Wide or
Cinema. The volume setting can be set to Low,
Medium or High.
such as video games, camcorders and portable
video players can be connected to the auxiliary
input jacks. Audio devices, such as some MP3
players, can also be connected to the system
through the auxiliary input jacks.
The auxiliary input jacks are color coded for iden-
tification purposes:
●
●
●
Red – right channel audio input
White – left channel audio input
Yellow – video input
4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC (DVD)
PLAYER OPERATION (models with
Navigation System)
CAUTION
● Only operate the DVD while the vehicle
engine is running. Operating the DVD
for extended periods of time with the
engine OFF can discharge the vehicle
battery.
Precautions
Start the engine when using the DVD entertain-
ment system.
● Do not allow the system to get wet.
Excessive moisture such as spilled liq-
uids may cause the system to
malfunction.
Movies will not be shown on the front display
while the vehicle is in any drive position to reduce
driver distraction. Audio is available when a movie
is played. To view movies on the front display,
stop the vehicle in a safe location, move the shift
selector to the P (Park) position and apply the
parking brake.
● While playing VIDEO-CD media, this
DVD player does not guarantee com-
plete functionality of all VIDEO-CD
formats.
LHA1394
WARNING
● The driver must not attempt to operate
the DVD system or wear the head-
phones while the vehicle is in motion so
that full attention may be given to ve-
hicle operation.
● Do not attempt to modify the system to
display a movie on the front screen
while the vehicle is being driven. Doing
so may distract the driver and may
cause a collision and serious personal
injury or death.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To eject a DVD, press the OPEN/TILT button to
lower the display screen. Once the screen is in
the lowered position, press the
the left of the CD/DVD insert slot
will be ejected.
button to
. The DVD
1
᭺
DISC-AUX button
Park the vehicle in a safe location for the front
seat occupants to operate the DVD drive while
watching the images.
Press the DISC-AUX button until the DVD mode
is active on the display.
When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed auto-
matically.
LHA1415
LHA1376
DVD operation keys
Playing a DVD
The operation screen will be turned on when the
DISC-AUX button is pressed while a DVD is
playing. The operation screen will turn off auto-
matically after a period of time. To turn it on again,
press the DISC-AUX button.
When the DVD is playing without the operation
screen being shown, you may use the touch-
screen to select items from the displayed video.
When the operation screen is being shown, use
the touchscreen to select an item from the dis-
played menus.
Inserting/Ejecting the DVD
The CD/DVD insert slot is located behind the
display screen. To insert the DVD, press the
OPEN/TILT button on the audio unit. The display
screen will automatically move down to expose
the CD/DVD insert slot. Insert the DVD into the
slot with the label side facing up. The DVD will be
guided automatically into the slot and begin play-
ing. To return the display screen to its upright
position after the DVD is inserted, press the
OPEN/TILT button again.
PAUSE:
Select the
sume playing the DVD, use the
key to pause the DVD. To re-
key.
4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Top Menu:
●
●
●
Title Search (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR)
The scene with the specified title will be
displayed the number of times the “+” or “-”
side is selected.
PLAY:
Select the
When the “Top Menu” key is selected while the
DVD is playing, the top menu specific to each
disc will be displayed. For details, see the instruc-
tions attached to the disc.
key to start playing the DVD or
resume playing the DVD after it has been paused.
Group Search (DVD-AUDIO, VIDEO CD)
The scene with the specified group will be
displayed the number of times the “+” or “-”
side is selected.
STOP:
DVD settings
Select the
key to stop playing the DVD.
Select the “Settings” key to adjust the following
settings:
10 Key Search (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO CD,
CD-DA, DVD-VR)
NEXT/PREVIOUS
CHAPTER:
key to skip the chapter(s) of the
●
Key (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO)
Displays the operation keys for the specific
DVD menu.
Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the
number entry screen. Input the number you
want to search for and select the “OK” key.
The specified Title/Chapter or Group/Track
will be played.
Select the
disc forward. Select the
chapter(s) of the disc backward. The chapters
will advance forward or backward the number of
times the respective key is touched.
key to skip the
– Select the directional keys to move the
cursor on the DVD menu.
– Select the “Enter” key to fix the selected
menu item.
●
●
Select No. (VIDEO CD)
CM SKIP:
Select the “Select No.” key to open the
number entry screen. Input the number you
want to search for and select the “OK” key.
The specified scene will be played.
– Select the “Move” key to move the loca-
tion of the operation keys on the screen.
This function is only for DVD-VIDEO and DVD-
VR. Select the
or
key to fast forward
– Select the “Back” key to return to the
previous menu screen.
or rewind a set interval of time based on the CM
settings. For more information, see “DVD set-
tings” in this section.
Angle (DVD-VIDEO)
If the DVD contains different angles (such as
moving images), the current image angle
can be switched to another one. Select the
“Angle” key and use the “+” or “-” key to
change the angle.
– Select the “Hide” key to hide the opera-
tion keys.
Next/Prev:
This function is only for DVD-AUDIO. Select the
“+”or “-”key to advance or rewind the still image.
The still image will advance or rewind the number
of times the key is touched.
●
Title Menu (DVD-VIDEO)
Some menus specific to each disc will be
shown. For details, see the instructions at-
tached to the disc.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO)
●
●
●
●
Display
Adjust the image quality of the screen by
selecting the preferred adjustment items.
When this item is turned on, an angle mark
will be shown on the bottom of the screen if
the scene can be seen from a different angle.
Audio
Choose the preferred language for the au-
dio.
Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO)
DVD menus are automatically configured
and the contents will be played directly
when the “Menu Skip”key is turned on. Note
that some discs may not be played directly
even if this item is turned on.
Subtitle (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR)
Choose the preferred language for the sub-
titles.
Display Mode (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO CD,
DVD-VR)
Choose from the “Full”, “Wide”, “Normal” or
“Cinema” mode.
●
●
●
CM Skip (DVD-VIDEO)
Select the “CM Skip” key to choose the
setting time for CM backward and forward
operations. Use the “+” or “-” key to choose
a setting time of 15, 30 or 60 seconds.
LHA1357
●
●
●
Title List (DVD-VR)
Choose the preferred title from the list.
USB INTERFACE (models without
Navigation System) (if so equipped)
DRC (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR)
Play Mode
Choose the preferred play mode.
DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) auto-
matically adjusts the soundtrack volume
level to maintain a more even sound to the
speakers.
Connecting a device to the USB input
jack
PG/PL Mode (DVD-VR)
Choose from the “PG” or “PL” mode.
The USB input jack is located in the center con-
1
sole. Open the protective cover
on the USB
᭺
DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO CD)
Select the “DVD Language” key to open the
number entry screen. Input the number cor-
responding to the preferred language and
select the “OK” key. The DVD top menu
language will be changed to the one speci-
fied.
jack, then insert the USB device into the jack.
When a compatible storage device is plugged
into the jack, compatible audio files on the stor-
age device can be played through the vehicle’s
audio system.
4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEEK/CAT (Reverse or
Fast Forward) buttons:
Audio file operation
AUX button:
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the AUX button to switch to
the USB input mode. If another audio source is
plugged in through the AUX IN jack on the radio,
the AUX button toggles between the two
sources.
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons
or
for 1.5 seconds while an audio file on
the USB device is playing to reverse or fast
forward the track being played. The track plays at
an increased speed while reversing or fast for-
warding. When the button is released, the audio
file returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/CAT buttons:
Press the SEEK/CAT button
dio file on the USB device is playing to return to
the beginning of the current track. Press the
while an au-
LHA1280
Play information
SEEK/CAT button
backward several tracks.
several times to skip
Information about the audio files being played
can be displayed on the display screen of the
vehicle’s audio system. Depending on how the
audio files are encoded, information such as
Folder, Song and Artist will be displayed.
Press the SEEK/CAT button
dio file on the USB device is playing to advance
one track. Press the SEEK/CAT button
while an au-
several times to skip forward several tracks. If the
last track in a folder on the USB device is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is played.
The track number and number of total tracks in
the folder are displayed on the screen as well. For
example, the fourth track out of twelve total is
currently playing.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDM button:
The current play pattern of the USB device is
displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
When the RDM button is pressed while an audio
file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
TUNE/SCROLL knob:
If there are multiple folders with audio files on the
USB device, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
change folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip
back a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip
ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of audio
files on the USB device, turning the
TUNE/SCROLL knob in either direction will re-
turn to the first track on the USB device.
ALL RDM → 1 FOLDER RDM → OFF
ALL RDM: all tracks on the USB device will be
played randomly.
1 FOLDER RDM: all tracks in the current folder
will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
LHA1357
The current play pattern of the USB device is
displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
USB INTERFACE (models with
Navigation System)
RPT button:
Connecting a device to the USB input
jack
When the RPT button is pressed while an audio
file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
The USB input jack is located in the center con-
1
sole. Open the protective cover
on the USB
᭺
jack, then insert the USB device into the jack.
1 FOLDER RPT → 1 TRACK RPT → OFF
1 TRACK RPT: the current track will be repeated.
When a compatible storage device is plugged
into the jack, compatible audio and video files on
the storage device can be played through the
vehicle’s audio system and center display screen.
1 FOLDER RPT: the current folder will be re-
peated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-
cator on the display will turn off.
When there are both audio and movie files in the
USB memory, the mode select screen is dis-
4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
source is playing and a USB memory device is
inserted, press the DISC-AUX button repeatedly
until the center display changes to the USB
memory mode.
Press the
an audio file on the USB device is playing to
advance one track. Press the side of the
seeking button several times to skip forward sev-
eral tracks. If the last track in a folder on the USB
device is skipped, the first track of the next folder
is played.
side of the seeking button while
If the system has been turned off while the USB
memory was playing, push the ON-OFF/VOL
control knob to restart the USB memory.
Folder selection:
Seeking (Reverse or Fast
Forward) button:
To change to another folder in the USB memory,
turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob or choose a folder
displayed on the screen using the touchscreen.
Press and hold the
side of the seeking
button for 1.5 seconds while an audio file on the
USB device is playing to reverse the track being
LHA1378
played. Press and hold the
side of the
played. Use the touchscreen to select the pre-
ferred type of file. When there is only type of file in
the USB memory, that audio or movie operation
screen is displayed and starts to play.
seeking button for 1.5 seconds while an audio file
on the USB device is playing to fast forward the
track being played. The track plays at an in-
creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding.
When the button is released, the audio file re-
turns to normal play speed.
When you play a file with limited playing time, the
confirmation screen will be displayed before
starting to play the file. Confirm the playing time
and select “yes” to start playing.
Seeking button:
Audio file operation
Press the
side of the seeking button while
DISC-AUX button:
an audio file on the USB device is playing to
return to the beginning of the current track. Press
the side of the seeking button several
times to skip backward several tracks.
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the DISC-AUX button to
switch to the USB input mode. If another audio
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
Folder List/Track List
Displays the folder or track list. The “Movie
Playback” key is also displayed in this list
screen and enables you to switch to the
movie playback mode.
Play Mode
Choose the preferred play mode using the
touchscreen.
LHA1294
LHA1379
Menu:
Movie file operation
There are some options available during play-
back. Select one of the following that are dis-
played on the screen, if necessary. Refer to the
following information for each item.
Park the vehicle in a safe location for the
front seat occupants to operate the USB
memory while watching the images.
DISC-AUX button:
●
Movie Playback
When the DISC-AUX button is pushed with the
system off and the USB memory inserted, the
system will turn on. If another audio source is
playing and the USB memory is inserted, press
the DISC-AUX button repeatedly until the center
display changes to the USB memory mode.
Switch to the movie playback mode. This
item is displayed only when the USB
memory contains movie files.
The shift lever must be in Park (P) with the
parking brake engaged to watch movies
from a USB device.
4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation keys:
●
Previous Chapter/Rewind:
Select the key to skip the chapter(s)
To operate the USB memory, select the desired
key displayed on the display screen.
of the disc backward. The chapters will go
back the number of times the key is selected.
Press and hold the key to rewind the chap-
ter.
●
Pause:
Select the
key to pause the movie file.
To resume playing the movie file, use
List:
the
key.
Select the “List” key on the movie file operation
screen to display the file list.
●
Play:
Select the
key to start playing the
LHA1380
movie file or resume the movie file if it has
been paused.
Settings:
Select the “Settings” key to adjust the following
settings:
●
●
Stop:
Select the
movie file.
key to stop playing the
●
Audio File Playback
Switch to the audio playback mode. This
item is displayed only when the USB
memory contains audio files.
Next Chapter/Fast Forward:
●
Play Mode
Choose between the “Normal” or “1 Track
Repeat” play modes.
Select the
key to skip the chapter(s)
of the disc forward. The chapters will ad-
vance the number of times the key is se-
lected. Press and hold the key to fast for-
ward the chapter.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
10 Key Search
tery will be charged while connected to the ve-
hicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position.
Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the
number entry screen. Input the number you
want to search for and the specified file or
folder will be played.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPodா can
only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
●
●
Display
To disconnect the iPodா from the vehicle, remove
the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on
the vehicle, then remove the cable from the
iPodா.
Adjust the image quality of the screen.
DRC
DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) auto-
matically adjusts the soundtrack volume
level to maintain a more even sound to the
speakers.
* iPodா is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
●
●
Audio
Compatibility
LHA1357
Choose the preferred language of the audio.
The following models are available:
iPodா* PLAYER OPERATION
Subtitle
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
●
●
●
●
●
●
iPodா 5th Generation version 1.2.1
iPodா Classic - version 1.1
Choose the preferred language of the sub-
titles.
●
Display Mode
Choose between the “Normal”, “Wide”,
“Cinema” or “Full” display modes.
Connecting iPodா
iPodா Touch - version 2.1.0
To connect an iPodா to the vehicle so that the
iPodா can be controlled with the audio system
controls and display screen, use the USB jack
located in the center console. Open the protec-
1
iPodா Nano - 1st generation version 1.3.1
iPodா Nano - 2nd generation version 1.1.3
iPodா Nano - 3rd generation version 1.0.2
tive cover
on the USB jack in the center
᭺
Make sure that your iPodா firmware is updated.
console. Then connect the iPodா-specific end of
the cable to the iPodா and the USB end of the
cable to the USB jack on the vehicle. If your iPodா
supports charging via a USB connection, its bat-
4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
●
●
●
●
Songs
RDM button:
Audio main operation
Press the RDM button while a track is playing to
change the play pattern as follows:
Podcasts
Genres
AUX button:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the AUX button repeatedly
until the iPodா mode is displayed on the screen.
TRK SHUFFLE
SHUFFLE OFF
→
ALBUM SHUFFLE
→
Composers
Audiobooks
ShuffleSongs
TRK SHUFFLE: the tracks in the current list will
be played randomly.
If another audio source is playing and the iPodா is
connected, press the AUX button repeatedly to
switch to the iPodா mode.
ALBUM SHUFFLE: the albums in the current list
will be played randomly.
SEEK/CAT buttons:
If the vehicle audio system is turned off while the
iPodா is playing, the iPodா will start when the
VOL/ON-OFF control knob is pressed.
Press the SEEK/CAT buttons
skip backward or forward one track.
or
to
SHUFFLE OFF: no random play pattern is ap-
plied.
Interface:
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons
or for 1.5 seconds while a track is playing
to reverse or fast forward the track being played.
The track plays at an increased speed while
reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is
released, the track returns to normal play speed.
The interface for iPodா operation shown on the
vehicle’s audio system display screen is similar to
the iPodா interface. Use the TUNE/SCROLL
knob and ENTER button to navigate the menus
on the screen. The iPodா MENU button on the
vehicle audio system is used to move up one level
in the iPodா menus.
RPT button:
Press the RPT button while a track is playing to
change the play pattern as follows:
Depending on the iPodா model, the following
items may be available on the menu list screen.
For further information about each item, see the
iPodா Owner’s Manual.
1 TRK RPT → ALL RPT → RPT OFF
1 TRK RPT: the current track will be repeated.
●
●
●
Playlists
Artists
ALL RPT: all songs in the current list are re-
peated.
RPT OFF: no repeat play pattern is applied.
Albums
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
tery will be charged while connected to the ve-
hicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPodா can
only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
To disconnect the iPodா from the vehicle, remove
the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on
the vehicle, then remove the cable from the
iPodா.
* iPodா is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
LHA1357
LHA1397
The following models are available:
Audio main operation
iPodா* PLAYER OPERATION WITH
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
iPodா 5th Generation version 1.2.1
iPodா Classic - version 1.1.1
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. Press the DISC·AUX button repeatedly
to switch to the iPodா mode.
iPodா Touch - version 2.0.0
Connecting iPodா
If the system has been turned off while the iPodா
was playing, pressing the VOL/ON·OFF control
knob will start the iPodா.
iPodா Nano - 1st generation version 1.3.1
iPodா Nano - 2nd generation version 1.1.3
iPodா Nano - 3rd generation version 1.1
iPodா Nano - 4thgeneration version 1.0.2
To connect an iPodா to the vehicle so that the
iPodா can be controlled with the audio system
controls and display screen, use the USB jack
located in the center console. Open the protec-
1
tive cover
on the USB jack in the center
᭺
console. Then connect the iPodா-specific end of
the cable to the iPodா and the USB end of the
cable to the USB jack on the vehicle. If your iPodா
supports charging via a USB connection, its bat-
Make sure that your iPodா firmware is updated.
4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISC·AUX button:
●
●
●
●
●
●
Songs
When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the
system off and the iPodா connected, the system
will turn on. If another audio source is playing and
the iPodா is connected, press the DISC·AUX
button repeatedly until the center display
changes to the iPodா mode.
Podcasts
Genres
Composers
Audiobooks
Shuffle Songs
The following keys shown on the screen are also
available:
●
●
Menu: returns to the previous screen.
: plays/pauses the music selected.
LHA1398
Interface:
The interface for iPodா operation shown on the
vehicle center display is similar to the iPodா in-
terface. Use the touchscreen to control your fa-
vorite settings.
The following items can be chosen from the menu
list screen. For further information about each
item, see the iPodா Owner’s Manual.
●
●
●
●
Now Playing
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the
or
side of the seeking
button is pressed for more than 1.5 seconds
while the iPodா is playing, the iPodா will play
while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the
button is released, the iPodா will return to the
normal play speed.
LHA1315
LHA1399
Scrolling menus:
Play mode:
While navigating long lists of artists, albums or
songs in the music menu, it is possible to scroll
the list by the first letter. To activate letter index-
ing, touch and hold the page up/down arrows on
the touchscreen.
While the iPodா is playing, touch the “Menu” key
to display the iPodா menu. Touch the “Play
Mode” key to display the Play Mode screen and
adjust the settings for Shuffle, Repeat and Audio-
books. For further information about each item,
see the iPodா Owner’s Manual.
To exit the scrolling by letter mode, perform one of
the following:
Seeking button:
●
Push the ENTER switch on the steering
wheel.
When the
or
side of the seeking
button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds while
the iPodா is playing, the next track or the begin-
ning of the current track on the iPodா will be
played.
●
Do not touch the controls for 2 seconds.
4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MUSIC BOX™ HARD DRIVE AUDIO
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The Music Box Hard Drive audio system can
store songs from CDs being played. The system
has a 9.3 gigabyte (GB) storage capacity and
can record up to 200 hours (approximately 2,900
songs).
The following CDs can be recorded in the Music
Box Hard Drive audio system:
●
●
CDs without MP3/WMA files.
Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio (Hybrid
CD-DA) specification in Super Audio CDs.
LHA1263
LHA1282
●
●
Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) speci-
fication in CD-Extras.
●
Individual tracks from a CD cannot be se-
lected to be recorded to the Music Box hard
drive.
Recording CDs
1. Operate the audio system to play a CD.
For information on playing CDs, see “Com-
pact Disc (CD) player operation” in this sec-
tion.
First session of multisession disc.
●
●
The fast forward and rewind features are
disabled while the CD is recording.
Extreme temperature conditions [below Ϫ4°F
(Ϫ20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)] could affect
the performance of the hard-disk.
The recording process can be stopped at
any time. All tracks that were played before
the CD was stopped are stored.
2. Touch the “Start REC” key. REC CD ap-
pears on the screen.
NOTE:
If the hard drive needs to be replaced due
to a malfunction, all stored music data will
be erased.
●
●
Individual tracks can be deleted from the
hard drive after the CD is recorded.
NOTE:
●
The system starts playing and recording the
1st track on the CD when the “Start REC”
key is selected.
The system records faster than it plays.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the title information of the track being recorded
is stored either in the hard drive or in the CD, the
title is automatically displayed on the screen. For
title acquisition from the hard drive, music recog-
nition technology and related data are provided
by Gracenoteா.
Stopping recording:
To stop the recording, touch the “Stop REC” key
on the screen. If the CD is ejected, the audio
system is turned off or the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position, the recording also
stops.
To view the details of the track, touch the “Text”
key on the screen. The track name and album title
are displayed on the screen.
If a track is not recorded successfully due to
skipping sounds, the
symbol is displayed
behind the track number.
LHA1283
The Music Box audio system cannot perform
recording under the following conditions:
Playing recorded songs
●
●
There is not enough space in the hard drive.
Select the Music Box audio system by using one
of the following methods:
The number of albums reaches the maximum
of 500.
●
Press the SOURCE select switch on the
steering wheel.
●
The number of tracks reaches the maximum
of 3,000.
For information, see “Steering wheel switch
for audio control” in this section.
Automatic recording:
●
Press the DISC·AUX button repeatedly until
the center display changes to the Music Box
mode.
If the “Automatic Recording” function is turned to
ON, recording starts when a CD is inserted. For
more information, see “Music Box settings”in this
section.
4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
Give voice commands.
TUNE/FOLDER knob:
For information, see “NISSAN Voice Recog-
nition system” in this section.
The TUNE/FOLDER knob skips from album to
album unless it is playing “All Songs” from the
Music Library menu. When playing “All Songs”,
the TUNE/FOLDER knob changes the track in-
stead of the album. The upper right corner of the
screen indicates if the TUNE/FOLDER knob is
changing by track or album.
Stopping playback:
The system stops playing when:
●
Another mode (radio, CD, USB, Bluetoothா
Audio or AUX) is selected.
●
●
The audio system is turned off.
The ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
Seeking button:
LHA1284
Press the
side of the seeking button while
Music Box menu
a track is playing to return to the beginning of the
There are some options available during play-
back. Select the “Menu” key, then select one of
the following that are displayed on the screen, if
necessary. Refer to the following information for
each item:
current track. Press the
side of the seeking
button while a track is playing to skip to the
beginning of the next track.
If you press and hold the
side of the seek-
●
Now Playing
ing button or the side of the seeking button
Lists the tracks stored in the Music Box
system. Touch the name of the track to begin
playing that track.
for more than approximately 1.5 seconds; the
track will play while rewinding or fast forwarding.
When the
the
side of the seeking button or
side of the seeking button is released,
●
Music Library
Lists the songs in the Music Library. Tracks
can be searched by Album, Artist or Genre.
the track will return to the normal playing speed.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1285
LHA1286
LHA1287
– Edit Name - changes the name of the
playlist.
●
My Playlists
Displays the playlists stored in the system.
Touch the “Edit” key next to a playlist to
perform the following operations for that
playlist:
– Delete Songs - deletes songs from the
playlist.
– Add Current Song - adds the song cur-
rently playing to the playlist.
– Add Songs by Album - adds songs to the
playlist by album.
– Add Songs by Artist - adds songs to the
playlist by artist.
– Edit Song Order - edits the order of the
songs in the playlist.
4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The “Transfer Missing Titles to USB” and “Up-
date Gracenote from HDD” options can be used
to update the titles of songs in the Music Library.
Visit www.nissanusa.com/gracenote for detailed
instructions on how to update the Gracenote
database.
LHA1288
LHA1289
●
Play Mode
●
Edit Music Information
Alters the play mode of the playlist. Touch
the key of the mode you wish to apply. The
modes change the play pattern as follows:
Edits the information of the songs in the
Music Library.
– Edit Information of Current Song
– Edit Information by Album
– Normal - no play pattern is applied.
– 1 Album Repeat - the songs in the current
album are repeated.
– Update Gracenote from USB Device
– Transfer Missing Titles to USB
– Update Gracenote from HDD
– 1 Track Repeat - the current track is re-
peated.
– 1 Album Random - the songs in the cur-
rent album are played randomly.
– All Random - all songs are played ran-
domly.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1290
LHA1291
LHA1292
●
●
Delete Songs from Music Box:
Delete music data stored on the hard drive.
Music Box settings
To set up the Music Box Hard Drive audio system
to your preferred settings, touch the “Menu” key
during playback, then touch the “Music Box Set-
tings” key.
Recording Quality:
Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132
kbps. The default is set to 132 kbps.
●
●
Music Box Used/Free Space:
Displays the number of tracks and albums
stored on the hard drive. The percentage of
hard drive space taken up and the amount of
remaining recording time left are also shown.
Automatic Recording:
When this item is turned to ON, the Music
Box Hard Drive audio system automatically
starts recording when a CD is inserted.
4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
CDDB Version:
Shows the version of CDDB (Compact Disc
Data Base).
tions. You may use Gracenote Data only by
means of the intended End-User functions of this
device.
The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow the Gracenote MusicID ser-
vice to count queries without knowing anything
about who you are. For more information, see the
web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for
the Gracenote MusicID Service.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for
your own personal non-commercial use only. You
agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to
any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
Gracenoteா
NOTE:
The Gracenote Software and each item of
Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or warran-
ties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy
of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote
Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete
data from the Gracenote Servers or to change
data categories for any cause that Gracenote
deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are
error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Soft-
ware or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted.
Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with
new enhanced or additional data types or cat-
egories that Gracenote may provide in the future
and is free to discontinue its online services at
any time.
●
The information contained in the
Gracenoteா Database is not fully guaran-
teed.
EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE
DATA,
THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE
SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMIT-
TED HEREIN.
●
The service of the Gracenoteா Database on
the Internet may be stopped without prior
notice for maintenance.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use
the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you vio-
late these restrictions. If your license terminates,
you agree to cease any and all use of the
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and
the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote
become liable for any payment to you for any
information that you provide. You agree that
Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this
Agreement against you directly in its own name.
End-User License Agreement
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEP-
TANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW.
Gracenoteா MusicID™ Terms of Use
This device contains software from Gracenote,
Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The
software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Soft-
ware”) enables this application to do online disc
identification and obtain music-related informa-
tion, including name, artist, track, and title infor-
mation (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers
(“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other func-
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-
CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RE-
SULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR
The Gracenote MusicID Service uses a unique
identifier to track queries for statistical purposes.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE
WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAM-
AGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST
REVENUES.
BLUETOOTHா STREAMING AUDIO
(if so equipped)
If you have a compatible Bluetoothா audio device
that is capable of playing audio files, the device
can be connected to the vehicle’s audio system
so that the audio files on the device play through
the vehicle’s speakers.
Copyright:
Music recognition technology and related data
are provided by Gracenoteா. Gracenote is the
industry standard in music recognition technol-
ogy and related content delivery. For more infor-
mation visit www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,
copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote.
This product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;
LHA1316
Connecting Bluetoothா audio
To connect your Bluetoothா audio device to the
vehicle, follow the procedure below:
#6,061,680;
#6,230,192,
#6,154,773,
#6,230,207,
#6,161,132,
#6,240,459,
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-
ment panel.
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend-
ing. Some services supplied under license from
Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks
of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype,
and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trade-
marks of Gracenote.
2. Select the “Bluetooth” key.
3. Select the “Connect Bluetooth” key.
4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1317
LHA1351
LHA1299
4. A screen will appear asking if you are con-
necting the device to use with the hands-
free phone system. Select the “No” key.
5. Enter a PIN of your choice. It will be needed
by your Bluetoothா audio device to com-
plete the connection process. See the
Bluetoothா audio device’s owner’s manual
for more information.
Audio main operation
To switch to the Bluetoothா audio mode, press
the DISC-AUX button repeatedly until the
Bluetoothா audio mode is displayed on the
screen.
The controls for the Bluetoothா audio are dis-
played on the screen.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1316
LHA1296
LHA1297
4. Select the “Audio Player” key.
5. A list of the connected Bluetoothா audio
players is displayed. Select the name of the
device you wish to edit.
Bluetoothா audio settings
To adjust the Bluetoothா audio settings, follow
the procedure below:
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-
ment panel.
2. Select the “Bluetooth” key.
3. Select the “Connected Devices” key.
4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.
LHA1298
LHA0049
6. The Device Name and Device Address are
displayed on the screen. Select the “Select”
key to make this device the active
Bluetoothா audio player. Select the “Edit”
key to edit the details of the player, such as
Device Name. Select the “Delete” key to
delete the device.
CD CARE AND CLEANING
●
●
●
Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the
disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.
Always place the discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.
To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion.
●
Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA0752
LHA0753
LHA0754
Type A
Type B
Type C
1. Source select and Power on switch
2. Tuning switch
3. Volume control switch
1. Source select and Power on switch
2. Tuning switch
3. Volume control switch
1. Source select and Power on switch
2. Menu control switch/ENTER button
3. Volume control switch
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)
POWER on switch
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi-
tion, push the SOURCE switch to turn the audio
system on.
4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type C Switch:
Next/Previous track (CD):
SOURCE select switch
AM → FM1 → FM2 → XM1 → XM2 → XM3
(satellite radio, if so equipped) → CD/DVD*→
Music Box** → USB/iPodா* → Bluetoothா Au-
dio* → AUX* → AM.
* These modes are only available when compat-
ible media storage is inserted into the device.
Push the source select switch to change the
mode in the following sequence:
Push the tuning switch
or
for less
than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the
present track or skip to the next track. Push
several times to skip back or skip through tracks.
Type A Switch:
PRESET BANK A → PRESET BANK B → PRE-
SET BANK C → CD* → AUX* → PRESET BANK
Menu control
switch/ENTER button
(Type C switch only)
A.
** This mode is only available when music has
been downloaded into the Music Box system.
* These modes are only available when compat-
ible media storage is inserted into the device.
Volume control switch
While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,
While the display is showing a map or audio
screen, tilt the Menu Control switch upward or
downward to select a station, track, CD or folder.
For most audio sources, tilting the switch
up/down for more than 1.5 seconds provides a
different function than a tilting up/down for less
than 1.5 seconds.
B or C), use the tuning switch
or
to
Push the volume control switch to increase or
decrease the volume.
select one of the preset radio stations (1 – 6).
Type B Switch:
Tuning (Type A and
AM → FM* → XM* (satellite radio, if so equipped)
→ CD** → USB/iPod** → AUX** → AM
Type B switches only)
* When using the SOURCE switch, the audio
mode switches to the FM preset bank (FM1 or
FM2) or XM preset bank (XM1 or XM2) that was
last active. To switch between the FM1 and FM2
preset banks or the XM1 and XM2 preset banks,
use the controls on the audio system.
AM and FM:
Memory change (radio):
●
●
●
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
While in one of the preset radio station banks,
push the tuning switch
than 1.5 seconds to change to the next preset
station in memory.
or
for less
Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
seek up or down to the next station.
** These modes are only available when compat-
ible media is connected to the system.
Press the ENTER button to show the list of
preset stations.
Seek tuning (radio):
Push the tuning switch
or
for more
than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous
radio station.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM (if so equipped):
DVD:
Bluetoothா Audio:
●
●
●
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
●
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
●
●
●
●
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
go to the next or previous category.
AUX:
Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the title number.
●
Press the ENTER button to show the AUX
Menu.
Press the ENTER button to show the XM
Menu.
Press the ENTER button to select an item
from the DVD display.
iPodா:
When the transparent operation menu ap-
pears, the switch will control the menu.
●
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
USB:
●
Press the ENTER button to show the iPod
Menu.
●
●
●
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
CD:
Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the folder number.
●
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
Press the ENTER button to show the USB
Menu.
●
●
Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the folder number (if
playing compressed audio files).
Music Box:
●
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
Press the ENTER button to show the CD
Menu.
●
Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the album (folder)
number (if playing compressed audio files).
●
Press the ENTER button to show the Music
Box Menu.
4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in
your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following
precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may
adversely affect the engine control system and
other electronic parts.
Window antenna
The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear
window.
CAUTION
WARNING
● Do not place metalized film near the
rear window glass or attach any metal
parts to it. This may cause poor recep-
tion or noise.
● A cellular telephone should not be used
while driving so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation. Some juris-
dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-
phones while driving.
● When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window antenna.
Lightly wipe along the antenna with a
dampened soft cloth.
● If you must make a call while your ve-
hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-
lar phone operational mode (if so
equipped) is highly recommended. Ex-
ercise extreme caution at all times so
full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
WHA0790
ANTENNA
The antenna cannot be shortened, but can be
removed. When you need to remove the antenna,
B
turn the antenna rod counterclockwise
.
᭺
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna rod
A
clockwise
and hand tighten.
᭺
CAUTION
Always properly tighten the antenna rod
during installation or the antenna rod may
break during vehicle operation.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BLUETOOTHா HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
CAUTION
WARNING
● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-
sible from the electronic control
modules.
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic con-
trol system harnesses. Do not route the
antenna wire next to any harness.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
as recommended by the manufacturer.
● Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the 12-volt battery,
use a phone when the Hybrid System is in
the READY mode.
● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.
4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position
with the previously connected cellular phone
turned on and carried in the vehicle.
You can connect up to 5 different Bluetoothா
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
Before using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
●
Set up the wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone
module before using the hands-free phone
system.
●
Some Bluetoothா enabled cellular phones may
not be recognized by the in-vehicle phone mod-
ule. Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
for a recommended phone list and connecting
instructions.
●
You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
WHA1042
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-
vice area.
make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetoothா
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have an ap-
proved Bluetoothா enabled cellular phone, you
can set up the wireless connection between your
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
With Bluetoothா wireless technology, you can
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive cellular signal; such as
in a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a moun-
tainous area.
Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-
vehicle phone module, no other phone connecting
procedure is required. Your phone is automatically
connected with the in-vehicle phone module when
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.
●
Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.
BLUETOOTH is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed to
Visteon.
●
●
When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-
ing a call.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
tions.
Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption.
USING THE SYSTEM
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
hands-free operation of the Bluetoothா Phone
System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may
not be available so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
●
While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetoothா wireless connection, the bat-
tery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetoothா
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
cellular phones.
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions:
1. This device may not cause interference and
Initialization
2. this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause un-
desired operation of the device.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
which takes a few seconds. If the
pressed before the initialization completes, the
system will announce “Hands-free phone system
not ready” and will not react to voice commands.
●
●
If the hands-free phone system seems to be
malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”
later in this section. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-
shooting help.
button is
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers. Stor-
ing the device in a different location may
reduce or eliminate the noise.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-
quirements of the Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Regulations.
4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
●
If a command is not recognized, the system
announces, “Command not recognized.
Please try again.” Repeat the command in a
clear voice.
●
To use the system faster, you may speak the
second level commands with the main menu
command on the main menu. For example,
Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN
Voice Recognition system, observe the following:
press the
button and after the tone
●
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing voice commands correctly.
say, “Call Redial.”
If you want to go back to the previous com-
mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-
tion” any time the system is waiting for a
response.
NOTE:
The combined command of Call and (a
Name) cannot be used.
You can cancel a command when the sys-
tem is waiting for a response by saying,
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces
“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can
●
Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command. Otherwise, the command will not
be received properly.
How to say numbers
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer
to the following rules and examples.
●
●
Start speaking a command within 5 seconds
after the tone sounds.
also press and hold the
button on the
steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to
end the VR session. Whenever the VR ses-
sion is cancelled, a double beep is played to
indicate you have exited the system.
●
Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.
Giving voice commands
–
“One eight oh oh six six two six two oh
oh”, or
●
●
If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, press the volume control switches
(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being
provided with feedback. You can also use
the radio volume control knob.
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press
and release the
steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a
command.
button located on the
–
“One eight zero zero six six two six two oh
oh”
●
Words can be used for the first 4 digits
places only.
The command given is picked up by the micro-
phone, and voice feedback is given when the
command is accepted.
In most cases you can interrupt the voice
feedback to speak the next command by
Example: 1-800-662-6200
pressing the
wheel.
button on the steering
●
If you need to hear the available commands
for the current menu again, say “Help” and
the system will repeat them.
– “One eight hundred six six two six two oh
oh”,
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty
two hundred,” and
Example: 1-555-1212 *123
– “One five five five one two one two star
one two three”
– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two
hundred”
●
●
Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using
the “Special Dialing” command).
●
Numbers can be spoken in small groups.
The system will prompt you to continue en-
tering digits, if desired.
Say “pause” for a 2-second pause (available
only when storing a phone book number).
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight zero zero”
NOTE:
For best results, say phone numbers as
single digits.
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
The voice command “Help” is available at any
time. Please use the “Help” command to get
information on how to use the system.
– “six six two”
LHA0757
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetoothா Hands-
Free Phone System are located on the steering
wheel.
– “six two zero zero”
●
Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (avail-
able when using the “Special Dialing” com-
mand and the “Send” command during a
call).
PHONE/SEND
Press the
button to initiate
a VR session or answer an incom-
ing call.
See “List of voice commands” and “Special
Dialing” in this section for more information.
4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE:
Choosing a language
You can also use the
button
to interrupt the system feedback
and give a command at once. See
“List of voice commands” and
“During a call” in this section for
more information.
You must press the
seconds to change the language.
button within 5
You can interact with the Bluetoothா Hands-Free
Phone System using English, Spanish or French.
5. If you decide not to change the language, do
not press either button. After 5 seconds, the
VR session will end, and the language will
not be changed.
To change the language, perform the following.
1. Press and hold the
than 5 seconds.
button for more
PHONE/END
While the voice recognition sys-
tem is active, press and hold
2. The system announces: “Press the
PHONE/SEND button for the
Connecting procedure
(
)
hands-free phone system to enter the
speaker adaptation mode or press the
NOTE:
the
button for 5 seconds to
The connecting procedure must be per-
formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the
vehicle starts moving during the procedure,
the procedure will be cancelled.
quit the voice recognition system
at any time.
TUNING SWITCH
While using the voice recognition
system, tilt the tuning switch up or
down to manually control the
phone system.
PHONE/END (
ferent language.”
) button to select a dif-
button.
3. Press the
Main Menu
For information on speaker adaptation, see
“Speaker adaptation (SA) mode”in this sec-
tion.
A
“Connect phone”
᭺
B
“Add phone”
᭺
4. The system announces the current language
and gives you the option to change the lan-
guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in
French). To select the current language,
C
Initiate from handset
᭺
D
Name phone
᭺
GETTING STARTED
The following procedures will help you get
started using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone
System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad-
ditional command options, refer to “List of voice
commands” in this section.
1. Press the
button on the steering
press the PHONE/SEND (
select a different language, tilt the tuning
switch ( or ) up or down.
) button. To
wheel. The system announces the available
commands.
A
2. Say: “Connect phone”
. The system ac-
᭺
knowledges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
3. Say: “Add phone” . The system acknowl-
four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than
10 digits or any special characters, say
“Special Dialing”. See “How to say num-
bers” in this section for more information.
᭺
Making a call by entering a phone
number
edges the command and asks you to initiate
connecting from the phone handset
C
.
᭺
Main Menu
The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone model. See the cellular phone Own-
er’s Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-
tions on connecting NISSAN recommended
cellular phones.
A
“Call”
᭺
B
“Phone Number”
᭺
5. When you have finished speaking the phone
number, the system repeats it back and an-
nounces the available commands.
C
Speak the digits
᭺
D
“Dial”
᭺
D
6. Say: “Dial”
. The system acknowledges
᭺
the command and makes the call.
1. Press the
button on the steering
For additional command options, see “List of
voice commands” in this section.
wheel. A tone will sound.
When prompted for a Passkey code, enter
“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code
“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and
cannot be changed.
A
2. Say: “Call”
. The system acknowledges
᭺
Receiving a call
the command and announces the next set of
available commands.
When you hear the ring tone, press the
button on the steering wheel.
4. The system asks you to say a name for the
Say: “Special Dialing” to dial more than 10
digits or any special characters.
D
phone
.
᭺
Once the call has ended, press the
on the steering wheel.
button
B
3. Say “Phone Number”
. The system ac-
If the name is too long or too short, the
system tells you, then prompts you for a
name again.
᭺
knowledges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.
NOTE:
If you do not wish to take the call when you
4. Say the number you wish to call starting with
Also, if more than one phone is connected
and the name sounds too much like a name
already used, the system tells you, then
prompts you for a name again.
hear the ring tone, press the
on the steering wheel.
button
C
the area code in single digit format . If the
᭺
system has trouble recognizing the correct
phone number, try entering the number in
the following groups: 3-digit area code,
3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-
ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five
five five” as the 1st group, then “one two
one” as the 2nd group, and “three three five
For additional command options, see “List of
voice commands” later in this section.
4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
(Speak Digits)
LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS
“Call”
᭺
When prompted by the system, say the number
you wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”
and “Making a call by entering a phone number”
in this section for more details.
Main Menu
Main Menu
“Call”
(Speak name)
“Call”
A
“Phonebook”
“Recent Calls”
“Connect Phone”
᭺
“Phone Number”
(Speak Digits)
C
“Special Number”
᭺
B
᭺
For dialing more than 10 digits or any special
characters, say “Special Number”. When the
system acknowledges the command, the system
will prompt you to speak the number.
C
“Special Number”
᭺
When you press and release the
button on
D
“Redial”
the steering wheel, you can choose from the
commands on the Main Menu. The following
pages describe these commands and the com-
mands in each sub-menu.
᭺
E
“Call Back”
᭺
D
“Redial”
᭺
Use the Redial command to call the last number
that was dialed.
A
(Speak Name)
᭺
If you have stored entries in the phonebook, you
can dial a number associated with a name and
location.
Remember to wait for the tone before
speaking.
The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing.
After the main menu, you can say “Help” to hear
the list of commands currently available any time
the system is waiting for a response.
See “Phonebook” in this section to learn how to
store entries.
If a redial number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to redial” and
ends the VR session.
When prompted by the system, say the name of
the phone book entry you wish to call. The system
acknowledges the name.
If you want to end an action without completing it,
you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the
system is waiting for a response. The system will
end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is
cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate
you have exited the system.
E
“Call back”
᭺
Use the Call Back command to dial the number of
the last incoming call within the vehicle.
If there are multiple locations associated with the
name, the system asks you to choose the loca-
tion.
The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing.
If you want to go back to the previous command,
you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time
the system is waiting for a response.
Once you have confirmed the name and location,
the system begins the call.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a call back number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to call back”and
ends the VR session.
●
“Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-
mand to transfer the call from the Bluetoothா
Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular
phone when privacy is desired.
“Phonebook” (phones without
automatic phonebook download
function)
During a call
The system announces, “Transfer call. Call
transferred to privacy mode.” The system
then ends the VR session.
NOTE:
During a call there are several command options
The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-
able when the vehicle is moving.
available. Press the
button on the steering
wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-
mands.
To reconnect the call from the cellular phone
to the Bluetoothா Hands-Free System,
Main Menu
●
“Help” — The system announces the avail-
able commands.
“Phonebook”
press the
button.
A
“Transfer Entry”
᭺
“Delete Entry”
●
“Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute
your voice so the other party cannot hear it.
Use the mute command again to unmute
your voice.
●
“Go back/Correction” — The system an-
nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session
and returns to the call.
B
᭺
C
“List Names”
᭺
For phones that do not support automatic down-
load of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetoothா pro-
file), the “Phonebook”command is used to manu-
ally add entries to the vehicle phonebook.
●
●
“Cancel/Quit” — The system announces
“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns
to the call.
NOTE:
If a call is ended or the cellular phone
network connection is lost while the Mute
feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset
to “off” for the next call so the other party
can hear your voice.
“Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send
command to enter numbers, “*”or “#”during
a call. For example, if you were directed to
dial an extension by an automated system:
The phonebook stores up to 40 names for each
phone connected to the system.
NOTE:
Each phone has its own separate phone-
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-
book if you are currently connected with
Phone B.
Say: “Send one two three four.”
The system acknowledges the command
and sends the tones associated with the
numbers. The system then ends the VR ses-
sion and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,
Say “pound” for “#”.
4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
“Transfer entry”
Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN
recommended cellular phones.
᭺
“Phonebook” (phones with automatic
phonebook download function)
Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new
name in the system.
NOTE:
When prompted by the system, say the name you
would like to give the new entry.
The system repeats the number and prompts you
for the next command. When you have finished
entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose
“Store.”
The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-
able when the vehicle is moving.
For example, say: “Mary.”
If the name is too long or too short, the system
tells you, then prompts you for a name again.
Main Menu
“Phonebook”
A
The system confirms the name, location and
number.
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name
already stored, the system tells you, then prompts
you for a name again.
“List Names”
᭺
B
“Transfer Entry”
B
“Delete Entry”
᭺
᭺
C
“Delete Entry”
᭺
Use the Delete Entry command to erase one
entry from the phonebook. After the system rec-
ognizes the command, speak the name to delete
or say “List Names” to choose an entry.
The system will ask you to transfer a phone
number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.
D
“Record Name”
᭺
Enter a phone number by voice command:
For phones that support automatic download of
the phonebook (PBAP Bluetoothா profile), the
“Phonebook” command is used to manage en-
tries in the vehicle phonebook. You can say the
name of an entry at this menu to initiate dialing of
that entry.
For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”
See “How to say numbers” in this section for
more information.
C
“List names”
᭺
Use the List Names command to hear all the
names in the phonebook.
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular
phone’s memory:
The system recites the phonebook entries but
does not include the actual phone numbers.
When the playback of the list is complete, the
system goes back to the main menu.
The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for
each phone connected to the system.
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges
the command and asks you to initiate the transfer
from the phone handset. The new contact phone
number will be transferred from the cellular
phone via the Bluetoothா communication link.
When a phone is connected to the system, the
phonebook is automatically downloaded to the
vehicle. This feature allows you to access your
phonebook from the Bluetoothா system and call
contacts by name. You can record a custom
voice tag for contact names that the system has
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
by pressing the button on the steering
wheel. The system ends the VR session.
The transfer procedure varies according to each
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
difficulty recognizing. For more information see
“Record Name” in this section.
The system repeats the number and prompts you
for the next command. When you have finished
entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose
“Store.”
For example, say: “Mary.”
If the name is too long or too short, the system
tells you, then prompts you for a name again.
NOTE:
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name
already stored, the system tells you, then prompts
you for a name again.
Each phone has its own separate phone-
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-
book if you are currently connected with
Phone B.
The system confirms the name, location and
number.
C
“Delete Entry”
᭺
The system will ask you to transfer a phone
number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.
Use the Delete Entry command to erase one
entry from the phonebook. After the system rec-
ognizes the command, speak the name to delete
or say “List Names” to choose an entry.
A
“List names”
᭺
Use the List Names command to hear all the
names and locations in the phone book.
Enter a phone number by voice command:
For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”
See “How to say numbers” in this section for
more information.
The system recites the phone book entries but
does not include the actual phone numbers.
When the playback of the list is complete, the
system goes back to the main menu.
D
“Record name”
᭺
The system allows you to record custom voice
tags for contact names in the phonebook that the
vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This feature can
also be used to record voice tags to directly dial
an entry with multiple numbers. Up to 40 voice
tags can be recorded to the system.
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular
phone’s memory:
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges
the command and asks you to initiate the transfer
from the phone handset. The new contact phone
number will be transferred from the cellular
phone via the Bluetoothா communication link.
by pressing the
button on the steering
wheel. The system ends the VR session. See the
“Record Name” command in this section for in-
formation about recording custom voice tags for
list entries that the system has difficulty pro-
nouncing.
“Recent Calls”
The transfer procedure varies according to each
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN
recommended cellular phones.
Main Menu
B
“Transfer entry”
᭺
Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new
name in the system.
“Recent Calls”
A
“Outgoing”
᭺
B
“Incoming”
᭺
C
“Missed”
᭺
When prompted by the system, say the name you
would like to give the new entry.
4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the Recent Calls command to access out-
going, incoming or missed calls.
Use the Connect Phone commands to manage
the phones connecting to the vehicle or to enable
the Bluetoothா function on the vehicle.
SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE
Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of-
dialect users to train the system to improve rec-
ognition accuracy. By repeating a number of
commands, the users can create a voice model of
their own voice that is stored in the system. The
system is capable of storing a different speaker
adaptation model for each connected phone.
A
“Outgoing”
᭺
Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing
calls made from the vehicle.
A
“Add Phone”
᭺
Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to
the vehicle. See “Connecting procedure” in this
section for more information.
B
“Incoming”
᭺
Use the Incoming command to list the incoming
calls made to the vehicle.
B
“Select Phone”
᭺
Training procedure
Use the Select Phone command to select from a
list of phones connected to the vehicle. The sys-
tem will list the names assigned to each phone
and then prompt you for the phone you wish to
select. Only one phone can be active at a time.
C
“Missed”
᭺
Use the Missed command to list the calls made to
the vehicle that were not answered.
The procedure for training a voice is as follows.
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet
outdoor location.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run-
ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-
sion in P (Park).
“Connect Phone”
C
“Delete Phone”
᭺
Use the Delete Phone command to delete a
phone that is connected to the vehicle. The sys-
tem will list the names assigned to each phone
and then prompt you for the phone you wish to
delete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle will also
delete that phonebook for that phone.
NOTE:
3. Press and hold the
than 5 seconds.
button for more
The Add Phone command is not available
when the vehicle is moving.
4. The system announces: “Press the
PHONE/SEND button for the
Main Menu
(
)
“Connect Phone”
hands-free phone system to enter the
speaker adaptation mode or press the
D
“Turn Bluetooth OFF”
᭺
Use the Turn Bluetooth OFF command to prevent
a wireless connection to your phone.
A
“Add Phone”
᭺
᭺
᭺
PHONE/END (
) button to select a dif-
B
“Select Phone”
“Delete Phone”
ferent language.”
C
D
“Turn Bluetooth OFF”
᭺
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
outgoing
5. Press the
button.
Training phrases
call three one nine oh two
nine seven pause pause three oh eight
cancel
For information on selecting a different lan-
guage, see “Choosing a language” in this
section.
During the SA mode, the system instructs the
trainer to say the following phrases. (The system
will prompt you for each phrase.)
6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected
automatically. If both memory locations are
already in use, the system will prompt you to
overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-
vided by the system.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
phonebook transfer entry
dial three oh four two nine
delete call back number
incoming
call back number
call star two zero nine five
delete phone
7. When preparation is complete and you are
dial eight three zero five one
record name
transfer entry
ready to begin, press the
button.
eight pause nine three two pause seven
delete all entries
call seven two four zero nine
phonebook delete entry
next entry
8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the
instructions provided by the system.
four three pause two nine pause zero
delete redial number
phonebook list names
call eight oh five four one
correction
9. When training is finished, the system will tell
you an adequate number of phrases have
been recorded.
10. The system will announce that speaker ad-
aptation has been completed and the sys-
tem is ready.
dial star two one seven oh
yes
connect phone
The SA mode will stop if:
dial seven four oh one eight
previous entry
no
●
The
button is pressed for more than 5
seconds in SA mode.
select
delete
●
●
The vehicle begins moving during SA mode.
missed
dial nine seven two six six
call seven six three oh one
The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or
LOCK position.
dial eight five six nine two
Bluetooth on
4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
●
go back
●
●
To select the current menu option, press the
PHONE/SEND ( ) button.
To go back to the previous menu, press the
PHONE/END ( ) button. If the current
menu is the Main Menu, pressing the
call five six two eight zero
dial six six four three seven
MANUAL CONTROL
PHONE/END (
Phone system.
) button will exit the
While using the voice recognition system, it is
possible to select menu options by using the
steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice
commands. The manual control mode does not
allow dialing a phone number by digits. The user
may select an entry from the Phonebook or Re-
cent Calls lists. To re-activate voice recognition,
exit the manual control mode by pressing and
●
To exit the manual control mode, press and
hold the PHONE/END (
seconds.
) button for 5
holding the PHONE/END (
) button. At that
time, pressing the PHONE/SEND (
) button
will start the Hands Free Phone System.
Operating tips
●
●
To enter manual control mode, start the
voice recognition system and tilt the tuning
) switch up or down. The system will
speak ЉShowing Manual OptionsЉ when
manual controls are initially activated.
(
To browse the menu options, tilt the tuning
(
) switch up or down. The system will
always speak the current menu option. De-
pending on the audio display, it will also
show the current menu option.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-
countered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try
each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until
the problem is resolved.
Symptom
Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too
noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
System fails to interpret the command correctly.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-
prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” in this section.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by
using the “List Names” command. See “Phonebook” in this section.
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the
phone book.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BLUETOOTHா HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
WARNING
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.
WHA1501
make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetoothா
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-
patible Bluetoothா enabled cellular phone, you
can set up the wireless connection between your
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
With Bluetoothா wireless technology, you can
Once your cellular phone is connected to the
in-vehicle phone module, no other phone con-
necting procedure is required. Your phone is
automatically connected with the in-vehicle
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
phone module when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position with the connected cellular
phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive cellular signal; such as
in a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a moun-
tainous area.
●
●
If the hands-free phone system seems to be
malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”
in this section. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-
shooting help.
You can register up to 5 different Bluetoothா
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers. Stor-
ing the device in a different location may
reduce or eliminate the noise.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.
NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the
phone commands, so dialing a phone number
using your voice is possible. For more details, see
“NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in this sec-
tion.
●
●
●
When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-
ing a call.
●
●
●
Refer to the cellular phone owner’s manual
regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.
Immediately after the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position, it may be impos-
sible to receive a call for a short period of
time.
Before using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
The signal strength display on the monitor
will not coincide with the signal strength
display of some cellular phones.
●
Set up the wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone
module before using the hands-free phone
system.
Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption.
If reception between callers is unclear, ad-
justing the incoming or outgoing call volume
may improve the clarity. See “Call volume” in
this section.
●
Some Bluetoothா enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
phone
module.
Please
visit
●
While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetoothா wireless connection, the bat-
tery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetoothா
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
cellular phones.
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-
mended phone list and connecting.
●
You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-
vice area.
4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
BLUETOOTH is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed to
Clarion.
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
tions.
VOICE COMMANDS
You can use voice commands to operate various
Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System features
using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For
more details, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition
System” in this section.
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions:
1. This device may not cause interference and
LHA1236
2. this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause un-
desired operation of the device.
CONNECTING PROCEDURE
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-
ment panel and select the “Bluetooth” key
on the display.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-
quirements of the Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Regulations.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1316
LHA1317
LHA1318
2. Select the “Connect Bluetooth” key.
3. A popup box will appear on the screen,
prompting you to confirm that the connec-
tion is for the phone system. Select the “Yes”
key.
4. When a PIN code appears on the screen,
operate the Bluetoothா cellular phone to
enter the PIN code.
The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or call the
NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for
instructions on connecting recommended
cellular phones.
When the connecting is complete, the
screen will return to the Bluetoothா settings
screen.
4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1320
LHA1321
LHA1381
2. Select the “Vehicle Phonebook” key
6. Select the “Voicetag” key to record a name
to speak when using the Voice Recognition
system.
VEHICLE PHONEBOOK
3. Select the “Add New” key at the top of the
screen.
This vehicle has two phonebooks available for
your use. Depending on your phone, the system
may automatically download your entire cell
phone’s phonebook into the “Handset Phone-
book”. For the details on downloading your
phonebook, see “Handset phonebook” in this
section. If your phonebook does not automati-
cally download, you may set up the vehicle
phonebook for up to 40 entries. This phonebook
allows you to record a name to speak while using
voice recognition.
7. Select the “Store” key and prepare to speak
the name after the tone.
4. Choose the method for entering the phone-
book entry. For this example, select “Enter
Number by Keypad”.
8. When the voicetag is successfully saved
5. Enter the digits and select the “OK” key. For
more information, see “How to use the touch
screen” in this section.
(
), select the “OK” key to save the
phonebook entry.
9. After the phonebook entry is saved, it will
show a screen that is ready to call the num-
ber. Select the “Back” key to return to the
Vehicle Phonebook.
1. Press the
wheel.
button on the steering
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
Copy from Call History
The system will show a list of your incoming,
outgoing or missed calls that were down-
loaded from your cell phone (depending on
your phone’s compatibility). You may select
one of these entries to save in the vehicle
phonebook.
Copy from the Handset
The system will show your cell phone’s
phonebook that was downloaded (depend-
ing on your phone’s compatibility). You may
select one of these entries to save in the
vehicle phonebook.
LHA1382
LHA1383
●
Editing the Vehicle Phonebook
5. Select the desired item to change.
The following editing items are available:
1. Press the
wheel.
button on the steering
●
Entry #
2. Select the “Vehicle Phonebook” key.
Changes the displayed number of the se-
lected entry.
3. Select the desired entry from the displayed
list.
●
●
●
Name
Edit the name of the entry using the keypad
displayed on the screen.
4. Select the “Edit” key.
Number
Edit the phone number using the keypad
displayed on the screen.
Type
Select the icon from the icon list.
4-106 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
Voicetag
To transfer the handset phonebook to the vehicle
manually, follow these steps:
Confirm and store the voicetag. Voicetags
allow easy dialing using the NISSAN Voice
Recognition system. For more information,
see “NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in
this section.
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-
ment panel.
2. Select the “Phone” key.
To delete an entry, select the “Delete” key at step
3.
3. Select the “Download Handset Phonebook”
key.
Once the handset phonebook is transferred to
the vehicle, it can be accessed by pressing
HANDSET PHONEBOOK
Many phones will support an automatic down-
load of the cellular phone’s phonebook. Since
this method allows for up to 1000 numbers to be
stored and entries are automatically assigned
voice tags by the system, this is a useful function
for easy dialing supported by the Voice Recogni-
tion system.
the
button on the steering wheel, then
selecting the “Handset Phonebook” key.
Whether the handset phonebook is transferred
manually or automatically, the process can take
up to five minutes to complete, depending on the
size of the handset phonebook. See the cellular
phone’s owner’s manual for more details.
LHA1319
Transferring the handset phonebook
If your cellular phone supports automatic down-
loading, the system transfers the handset phone-
book automatically by default. To ensure that this
feature is activated, press the SETTING button
on the instrument panel and select the “Phone”
key. The “Auto Downloaded” selection should
have the amber indicator next to the word ON
activated. Select the “Auto Downloaded” key to
toggle this feature on or off.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
Call History: Select the name from the in-
coming or outgoing call history.
Dial Number: Input the phone number manu-
ally using a keypad displayed on the screen.
For information on how to use the touch-
screen, see “How to use the touch screen”
in this section.
3. For all of the methods listed in Step 2 except
“Dial Number”, dialing commences when the
listed name is selected. Dialing commences
when “OK”is selected if the number is input-
ted manually. The screen changes to the
“Call in Progress” screen.
LHA1322
LHA1323
4. After the call is over, perform one of the
following to finish the call:
RECEIVING A CALL
MAKING A CALL
a. Select the “Hang up” key on the Call in
Progress screen.
When you hear a phone ring, the display will
change to phone mode. To receive a call, follow
one of the procedures listed below.
To make a call, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the button on the steering
b. Press the
wheel.
switch on the steering
wheel. The “Phone” screen will appear on
the display.
a. Select the “Answer” key on the display.
b. Press the phone
wheel switches.
button on the steering
2. Select one of the following options to make a
call:
There are some options available when receiving
a call. Select one of the following displayed on
the screen.
●
Vehicle Phonebook: Select the name from
an entry stored in the vehicle phonebook.
●
Handset Phonebook: Select the name from
an entry stored in the handset phonebook.
4-108 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Answer:
Accept an incoming call to talk.
Keypad:
Brings up a keypad; enter digits when needed.
For example, entering your PIN number for voice-
mail.
Hold Call:
Put an incoming call on hold.
NOTE:
Reject Call:
Reject an incoming call.
Pushing the TALK
switch on the
To finish the call, follow one of the procedures
listed below:
steering wheel during a call allows num-
bers and digits to be sent using Voice Rec-
ognition.
a. Select the “Reject Call” key on the display.
Cancel Mute:
This will appear after the “Mute” key is selected.
Mute will be cancelled.
b. Press and hold the phone
steering wheel switches.
button on the
LHA1324
To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or
quieter, press the volume control switch located
on the steering wheel switches or turn the volume
control knob on the instrument panel while talking
on the phone. This adjustment is also available in
the SETTING mode.
DURING A CALL
There are some options available during a call.
Select one of the following displayed on the
screen, if necessary:
Hang up:
Finish the call.
Use Handset:
Transfer the call to the cellular phone.
Mute:
Mute your voice to the person.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download Handset Phonebook:
See “Handset Phonebook” in this section for
adding, editing and deleting contacts in the
handset phonebook.
LHA1324
LHA1319
ENDING A CALL
PHONE SETTINGS
To finish the call, perform one of the following
procedures:
To set up the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone
System to your preferred settings, press the SET-
TING button on the instrument panel and select
the “Phone” key on the display.
●
Select the “Hang up” key on the “Call in
Progress” display.
Edit Vehicle Phonebook:
●
Push the
wheel.
switch on the steering
See “Vehicle Phonebook” in this section for add-
ing, editing and deleting contacts in the vehicle
phonebook.
Delete Phonebook:
Delete a phonebook stored on the system.
4-110 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Edit Bluetooth Info:
Check information about the device name, device
address and device PIN.
Replace Connected Phone:
Replace the phone currently connected to the
system. This option allows you to keep any voic-
etags that were recorded using the previous
phone.
LHA1325
LHA1316
Volume & Ringtone:
BLUETOOTH SETTINGS
Adjust the volume level of the ringtone, incoming
call sound and outgoing call sound. When the
“Automatic Hold” option is turned on, an incom-
ing call will be placed on hold automatically after
several rings. When the “Vehicle Ringtone” op-
tion is turned on, a specific ringtone that is differ-
ent from the cellular phone’s will sound when
receiving a call.
To set up the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone
System to your preferred settings, press the SET-
TING button on the instrument panel and select
the “Bluetooth” key on the display.
Bluetooth:
Turn the Bluetoothா system on or off.
Connect Bluetooth:
See “Connecting procedure” in this section for
more information about connecting a phone.
Auto Downloaded:
See “Handset Phonebook” in this section for
information about automatically downloading the
handset phonebook.
Connected Devices:
Display a list of the Bluetoothா devices con-
nected to the system.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
You can also adjust the volume of an incoming
voice during a call by pushing the volume control
switch on the steering wheel or by turning the
volume control knob on the instrument panel.
NISSAN Voice Recognition allows hands-free
operation of the systems equipped on this ve-
hicle, such as phone and vehicle information.
There are two voice recognition modes of opera-
tion available. They are:
●
●
Standard Mode
Alternate Command Mode
In Standard Mode (the factory default setting),
commands that are available are always shown
on the display and announced by the system. You
can complete your desired operation by simply
following the prompts given by the system. Not all
NISSAN Voice Recognition options are available
while in Standard Mode.
LHA1253
CALL VOLUME
For advanced operation, you can change to an
Alternate Command Mode that enables the op-
eration of the display, audio, and climate control
through NISSAN Voice Recognition. When this
mode is active, an expanded list of commands
can be spoken after pushing the TALK
switch on the steering wheel, and the voice com-
mand menu prompts are turned off.
Adjusting the incoming or outgoing call volume
may improve clarity if reception between callers is
unclear.
●
Incoming call — adjusting this setting allows
you to hear a difference in volume.
●
Outgoing call — adjusting this setting allows
the person you are talking with to hear a
difference in volume.
In Alternate Command Mode the recognition
success rate may be affected because the num-
ber of available commands and the ways of
speaking each command are increased. See
“NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate Com-
mand Mode” in this section.
To access the settings, press the SETTING but-
ton, then select “Volume & Beeps”.
4-112 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To improve the recognition success rate when
Alternate Command Mode is active, try using the
Speaker Adaptation Function available in that
mode. See “Speaker Adaptation Function” in this
section. Otherwise, it is recommended that Alter-
nate Command Mode be turned off and Standard
Mode be used for the best recognition perfor-
mance.
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
STANDARD MODE
The Standard Mode enables control of naviga-
tion, phone and vehicle information. With this
setting active, commands that are available are
always shown on the display and announced by
the system.
While using the NISSAN Voice Recognition sys-
tem for certain Phone and Navigation features,
you can switch to using manual controls (touch-
screen, steering wheel controls) and the informa-
tion you have already entered by voice control will
be retained. To switch to manual controls, select
the “Manual Controls” key on the display when it
appears. The system will respond by speaking
“Changing to manual operation. Please use
manual controls to continue.”
Displaying user guide
If you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition system
for the first time or you do not know how to
operate it, you can display the User Guide for
confirmation.
LHA1326
You can confirm how to use voice commands by
accessing a simplified User Guide, which con-
tains basic instructions and tutorials for several
voice commands.
1. Press the INFO button on the instrument
panel.
2. Select the “Others” key.
For the voice commands for the navigation sys-
tem, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s
Manual of your vehicle.
3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
NOTE:
For vehicles in the U.S., the factory default setting
is the Standard Mode. See “NISSAN Voice Rec-
ognition Standard Mode” in this section. For ve-
hicles in Canada, the factory default setting is the
Alternate Command Mode. See “NISSAN Voice
Recognition Alternate Command Mode” in this
section.
You can skip steps 1 to 3 by pressing
the
switch and saying “Help”.
4. Select the “User Guide” key.
5. Select an item.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Available items:
Tutorials on the operation of the Voice Rec-
ognition system
●
Getting Started
If you choose “Finding a Street Address”, “Using
the Address Book” or “Placing Calls”, you can
view tutorials on how to perform these operations
using Voice Recognition.
Describes the basics of how to operate the
Voice Recognition system.
●
Let’s Practice
Initiates a practice session that demon-
strates how to improve voice recognition by
the system.
●
●
Using the Address Book
Tutorial for using the Address Book
Finding a Street Address
LHA1329
Tutorial for entering a destination by street
address.
Getting started
Before using the Voice Recognition system for
the first time, you can confirm how to use com-
mands by viewing the Getting Started section of
the User Guide.
●
●
Placing Calls
Tutorial for making a phone call by voice
command operation.
1. Select the “Getting Started” key.
Help on Speaking
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the
screen.
Displays useful tips of speaking for correct
command recognition by the system.
4-114 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1327
LHA1328
LHA1330
To initiate a practice session, access the User
Guide and select the “Let’s Practice” key. Follow
the on-screen prompts until the session is com-
plete. After the session is completed, a screen
will be displayed that shows an analysis of differ-
ent elements of your speech. Select the “Try
Again” to repeat the session if improvement is
needed. Select the “Done” key to return to the
User Guide screen.
Let’s Practice
Useful tips for correct operation
The system is equipped with a tutorial that allows
you to practice saying commands and receive
feedback on the volume, speed and timing of your
speech.
You can display useful speaking tips to help the
system recognize your voice commands cor-
rectly.
1. Select “Help on Speaking”.
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the
screen.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
which takes a few seconds. When completed,
the system is ready to accept voice commands. If
the
switch is pressed before the initializa-
tion completes, voice commands will not be ac-
cepted. Please wait until the NISSAN Voice Rec-
ognition initialization is completed.
BEFORE STARTING
To get the best recognition performance from
Voice Recognition, observe the following:
LHA1331
LHA0768
Voice recognition settings
GIVING VOICE COMMANDS
●
The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to eliminate
the surrounding noises (traffic noise and vi-
bration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the
system from correctly recognizing the voice
commands.
The available settings of the NISSAN Voice Rec-
ognition system are described.
1. Press the
ing wheel.
switch located on the steer-
1. Select “Voice Recognition”.
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the
screen.
●
●
●
Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command.
Speak in a natural conversational voice with-
out pausing between words.
If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”, the fan
speed is automatically lowered so that your
commands can be recognized more easily.
4-116 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
Commands that are available are always
shown on the display and spoken through
voice menu prompts. Commands other than
those that are displayed are not accepted.
Please follow the prompts given by the system.
●
When saying the phone number 800-662-
6200, the system will accept “eight-hundred”
in addition to “eight zero zero”or “eight oh oh”.
500, 700, and 900 are also supported.
Examples:
1-800-662-6200
If the command is not recognized, the sys-
tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the
command in a clear voice.
●
– “One eight zero zero six six two six two
zero zero”
●
●
Press the
switch on the steering
– “One eight hundred six six two six two
zero zero”
wheel to return to the previous screen.
If you want to cancel the command, press
Improving Recognition of Phone numbers:
and hold the
switch. The message,
“Voice cancelled” will be announced.
You can improve the recognition of phone numbers
by saying the phone number in three groups of
numbers. For example, when you try to call 800-
662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, and the sys-
tem will then ask you for the next three digits. Then,
say “six six two”. After recognition, the system will
then ask for the last four digits. Say, “six two zero
zero”. Using this method of phone digit entry can
improve recognition performance.
LHA1333
●
If you want to adjust the volume of the sys-
tem feedback, push the volume control
switch on the steering wheel or use the
audio system volume knob while the system
is making an announcement.
2. A list of commands appears on the screen,
and the system announces, “Would you like
to access Phone, Navigation, Information,
Audio or Help?”
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the
screen changes from
a command.
to
, speak
How to speak numbers
Voice Recognition requires a certain way to
speak numbers when giving voice commands.
Refer to the following examples.
4. Continue to follow the voice menu prompts
and speak after the tone sounds until your
desired operation is completed.
NOTE:
When speaking a house number, speak the
number “0” as “zero” or “oh”. If the letter
“O” is included in the house number, it will
not be recognized as “0” even if you speak
“oh” instead of “zero”.
General rule:
Operating tips
●
Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.
●
Say a command after the tone. Voice com-
mands cannot be accepted when the icon
is
.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Standard Mode command list
Category Command:
COMMAND
Phone
ACTION
Displays Phone function commands.
Displays Navigation function commands.
Displays Vehicle Information.
Displays Audio commands.
Navigation
Information
Audio
Help
Displays User Guide.
Phone Command:
COMMAND
ACTION
Dial Number
Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.
Change Number
Vehicle Phonebook
Handset Phonebook
Call History
Corrects the phone number when it is not recognized (available during phone number entry).
Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the vehicle phonebook.
Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the handset phonebook.
Makes a call to a number in the incoming or outgoing call logs.
Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken, as well as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+).
International Call
4-118 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Navigation Command:
COMMAND
Home
ACTION
Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.
Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route (for continental US and Canada only).
Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.
Searches for a location stored in the Address Book.
Sets a route to a previous destination.
Address
Places
Address Book
Previous Destinations
Information Command:
COMMAND
Traffic Info.
ACTION
Turns the traffic information system on and off.
Displays current vehicle location.
Where am I?
Audio Command:
COMMAND
AM
ACTION
Changes the audio system mode to AM radio.
Changes the audio system mode to FM radio.
Changes the audio system mode to satellite radio.
Changes the audio system mode to Music Box.
Changes the audio system mode to CD.
FM
XM
Music Box
CD
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voice command examples
Some basic voice command examples are de-
scribed here.
For navigation system commands, see the sepa-
rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
LHA0768
LHA1333
Example 1 — Placing a call to the phone
number 800-662-6200:
2. The system announces, “Would you like to
access Phone, Navigation, Information, Au-
dio or Help?”
1. Press the
ing wheel.
switch located on the steer-
3. Say “Phone”.
4-120 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1334
LHA1335
LHA1336
4. Say “Dial Number”.
5. Say “800”.
6. The system announces, “Please say the next
three digits or dial, or say change number.”
7. Say “662”.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
You can only say a phone number using the
3-3-4 grouping, 7 digits, and 10 digits using
this command. Please use the “International
Call” command for all other formats, and
when special characters such as star (*),
pound (#), and plus (+) need to be entered.
If you say “Change Number” during phone
number entry, the system will automatically
request that you repeat the number using
the 3-3-4 format. In this case please say the
area code first and then follow the prompts.
●
●
Do not add a “1” in front of the area code
when speaking phone numbers.
LHA1337
LHA1338
If the system does not recognize your com-
mand, please try repeating the command
using a natural voice. Speaking too slowly or
too loudly may further decrease recognition
performance.
8. The system announces, “Please say the last
four digits or say change number.”
10. The system announces, “Dial or Change
Number?”
9. Say “6200”.
11. Say “Dial”.
12. The system makes a call to 800-662- 6200.
NOTE:
●
You can also speak “800-662-6200” (10
continuous digits) or “662-6200” (7 con-
tinuous digits), if the area code is not nec-
essary. However, the 3-3-4 digit grouping is
recommended for improved recognition.
See “How to speak numbers”in this section.
4-122 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA0768
LHA1333
LHA1334
Example 2 — Placing an international call
to the phone number 011-81-111-222-3333:
2. The system announces, “Would you like to
access Phone, Navigation, Information, Au-
dio or Help?”
4. Say “International Call”.
1. Press the
ing wheel.
switch located on the steer-
3. Say “Phone”.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
ALTERNATE COMMAND MODE
The Alternate Command Mode enables control
of the Audio, Climate Control and Display sys-
tems as well as additional commands for the
Vehicle Information, Phone and Navigation sys-
tems. With this setting active, the system does
not announce or display the available commands
at each step.
When Alternate Command Mode is activated, an
expanded list of commands can be used after
pushing the TALK
switch. Under this
mode, the screen for Standard Mode commands
is not available on the display. Please review the
expanded command list, available when this
mode is active, as some Standard Mode com-
mands are replaced. Please see examples of
Alternate Command Mode screens.
LHA1339
LHA1340
5. Say “011811112223333”.
6. Say “Dial”.
7. The system makes a call to 011-81-111-
222-3333.
NOTE:
Please note that in this mode the recognition
success rate may be affected as the number of
available commands and ways of speaking each
command are increased. You can turn this mode
ON or OFF. When this mode is activated, the
Voice Recognition Settings will change to show
more options.
Any digit input format is available in the
International Number input process, as
well as the special characters such as star
(*), pound (#), and plus (+).
4-124 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1403
LHA1331
LHA1341
4. Select the “Alternate Command Mode” key.
6. Alternate Command Mode is activated and
the setting menu is expanded to include the
Alternate Command Mode options. See
“Settings menu” in this section for an expla-
nation of the options.
Activating Alternate Command Mode
5. The confirmation message is displayed on
the screen. Select the “OK” key to activate
the Alternate Command Mode.
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-
ment panel.
2. Select the “Others” key on the display.
3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
Displaying the command list
If you are controlling the system by voice com-
mands for the first time or do not know the
appropriate voice command, perform the follow-
ing procedure for displaying the voice command
list (available only in Alternate Command Mode).
Press the
switch, listen for the tone and
say, “Help”. The system will respond by display-
ing the command list main menu.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1342
LHA1416
LHA1342
Only manual controls such as the touchscreen
can navigate the command list menu.
1. Press the INFO button on the instrument
panel.
5. Select a category. The command list for the
category selected is shown.
As an alternative to the voice command “Help”,
you may access the command list using the fol-
lowing steps:
2. Select the “Others” key.
6. If necessary, scroll the screen to view the
entire list.
3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
7. Select the “Back” key to return to the previ-
ous screen.
NOTE:
You can skip steps 1 through 3 if you say
“Help”.
4. Select the “Command List” key.
4-126 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alternate Command Mode command list
Phone Command:
COMMAND
ACTION
Dial Number
Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.
Makes a call to a contact in the vehicle phonebook.
Makes a call to a contact in the handset phonebook.
Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken, as well as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+).
Shows the last 5 incoming phone calls.
Vehicle Phonebook
Handset Phonebook
International Call
Incoming Calls
Outgoing Calls
Missed Calls
Shows the last 5 outgoing phone calls.
Shows the last 5 missed phone calls.
Navigation Command:
COMMAND
ACTION
Home
Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.
Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route (for continental US and Canada only).
Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.
Displays the first 5 entries of the Address Book.
Address
Places
Address Book
Previous Destinations
Previous Start Point
Minimize Freeway Route
Fastest Route
Shortest Route
Cancel Route
Delete Destination
Sets a route to a previous destination.
Calculates a route to your previous starting point of the last route.
Recalculates a route to the current destination while minimizing freeway usage.
Recalculates a route to the current destination using the fastest estimated time.
Recalculates a route to the current destination using the shortest distance.
Cancels the current route.
Deletes the current destination.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COMMAND
ACTION
Birdview Map
Changes the Map display to Birdview.
Planview Map
Changes the Map display to a 2-dimensional view.
Changes the Map display to keep north pointing up on the screen.
Changes the Map display to keep the direction of the vehicle pointing up on the screen.
Changes the map scale to a smaller number.
Changes the map scale to a larger number.
Turns the navigation voice guidance on or off.
Repeats the last navigation voice guidance.
North Up
Heading Up
Zoom In <1 to 13>
Zoom Out <1 to 13>
Guidance Voice ON/OFF
Guide Voice Repeat
Information Command:
COMMAND
ACTION
Traffic Information
Where am I?
Turns the traffic information system on and off.
Displays the current vehicle location.
Displays weather information.
Displays the current weather map.
Weather Information
Weather Map
4-128 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio Command:
COMMAND
ACTION
AM
Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.
Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.
Turns to the SAT band, selecting the station last played.
Turns to the Music Box hard-disk drive audio system.
Starts to play a CD.
FM
XM
Music Box
CD
USB
Turns to the USB audio input.
Bluetooth Audio
AUX
Turns to the Bluetoothா audio system.
Turns to the AUX input.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
Finding a Street Address
Tutorial for Finding a Street Address.
Placing Calls
Tutorial for making a phone call by voice
command operation.
●
Help on Speaking
Displays useful tips for how to correctly
speak commands in order for them to be
properly recognized by the system.
●
●
Voice Recognition Settings
LHA1343
LHA1344
Describes the available Voice Recognition
settings.
5. Select an item.
Displaying user guide
Adapting the System to Your Voice
Available items:
You can confirm how to use voice commands by
accessing a simplified User Guide, which con-
tains basic instructions and tutorials for several
voice commands.
Tutorial for adapting the system to your
voice.
●
Getting Started
Describes the basics of how to operate the
Voice Recognition system.
USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
1. Press the INFO button on the instrument
panel.
●
Let’s Practice
2. Select the “Others” key.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
which takes a few seconds. When completed,
the system is ready to accept voice commands. If
Initiates a practice session that demon-
strates how to improve recognition by the
system.
3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
4. Select the “User Guide” key.
●
Using the Address Book
the
switch is pressed before the initializa-
tion completes, the display will show the mes-
sage: “System not ready.” or a beep sounds.
Tutorial for using the Address Book.
4-130 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before starting
To get the best performance from NISSAN Voice
Recognition, observe the following:
●
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate the
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing the voice commands cor-
rectly.
●
When the climate control is in the AUTO
mode, the fan speed decreases automati-
cally for easy recognition.
LHA0768
LHA1345
●
●
Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a
command.
2. A list of commands appears on the screen,
and the system announces, “Please say a
command from the displayed list or say Help
to show all commands.”
Giving voice commands
Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.
1. Press and release the
on the steering wheel.
switch located
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the
screen changes from
a command.
to
, speak
4. Once a command is recognized, the system
will announce the recognized command and
perform the requested action.
If the command is not recognized, the sys-
tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the
command in a clear voice after the tone.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this method of
phone digit entry can improve recognition perfor-
mance.
Operating tips
How to speak numbers
●
Say a command after the tone. Voice com-
mands cannot be accepted when the icon
is
Voice Recognition requires a certain way to
speak numbers when giving voice commands.
Refer to the following examples.
.
NOTE:
●
If the command is not recognized, the sys-
tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the
command in a clear voice.
General rule:
When speaking a house number, speak the
number “0” as “zero” or “oh”. If the letter
“O” is included in the house number, it will
not be recognized as “0” even if you speak
“oh” instead of “zero”.
●
●
Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.
When saying the phone number 800-662-
6200, the system will accept “eight-
hundred” in addition to “eight zero zero” or
“eight oh oh”. 500, 700, and 900 are also
supported.
●
●
Press the
switch on the steering
wheel to return to the previous screen.
Settings menu
If you want to cancel the command, press
The content of the Settings Menu differs when
the system is in the Alternate Command Mode.
and hold the
switch. The message,
“Voice cancelled” will be announced.
Examples:
1-800-662-6200
Command List:
●
●
If you want to adjust the volume of the sys-
tem feedback, push the volume control
switch on the steering wheel or use the
audio system volume knob while the system
is making an announcement.
●
Displays the command list for Alternate Com-
mand Mode.
– “One eight zero zero six six two six two
zero zero”
User Guide:
– “One eight hundred six six two six two
zero zero”
To minimize the amount of prompts spoken
by the system in Alternate Command Mode,
use the Minimize Voice Feedback function.
To access the Minimize Voice Feedback
function press the SETTING button, then
select the “Others” key. Then select the
“Voice Recognition” key.
The user guide provides basic instructions for
using Voice Recognition and accessing some
voice commands.
Improving Recognition of Phone numbers:
You can improve the recognition of phone num-
bers by saying the phone number in three groups
of numbers. For example, when you try to call
800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, and
the system will then ask you for the next three
digits. Then, say “six six two”. After recognition,
the system will then ask for the last four digits.
NOTE:
The user guide can also be accessed from
within the INFO menu after pressing the
INFO button.
4-132 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker Adaptation:
Starts a system training procedure to learn the
specific sounds of your voice. See “Speaker ad-
aptation function” in this section.
Alternate Command Mode:
For advanced operation, an Alternate Command
Mode is provided. This setting enables control of
the Audio and Climate Control systems in addi-
tion to additional commands for the Phone and
Navigation systems. With this setting active, the
system does not announce or display the avail-
able commands at each step. When this mode is
activated, the Voice Recognition Settings will
change to show more options.
LHA1341
LHA1346
4. Select the user whose voice is to be memo-
rized by the system.
SPEAKER ADAPTATION FUNCTION
Minimize Voice Feedback:
The Voice Recognition system has a function to
learn the user’s voice for better voice recognition
performance. The system can memorize the
voices of up to three persons.
Reduces the amount of the information spoken
for each voice instruction.
Having the system learn the user’s
voice
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-
ment panel, select the “Others” key on the
display.
2. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
3. Select the “Speaker Adaptation” key.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1347
LHA1348
LHA1349
Speaker Adaptation function settings
Edit Name:
5. Select a category to be learned by the sys-
tem from the following list:
7. The system requests that you repeat a com-
mand after a tone. This command is also
displayed on the screen.
● Phone
Edit the user name using the keypad displayed on
the screen.
8. After the tone sounds and the icon on the
● Navigation
● Information
● Audio
screen changes from
to
, speak
Reset Result:
the command that the system requested.
Resets the user’s voice that the Voice Recogni-
tion system has learned.
9. When the system has recognized the voice
command, the voice of the user is learned.
● Help
Continuous Learning:
Press the
to return to the previous screen.
switch or select the “Back” key
The voice commands in the category are
displayed.
When this item is turned to ON, you can have the
system learn the voice commands in succession,
without selecting commands one by one.
If the system has learned the command correctly,
the voice command indicator on the screen turns
on.
6. Select a voice command to train.
The Voice Recognition system starts.
4-134 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-
countered, follow the solutions given in this guide
for the appropriate error.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try
each solution in turn, starting with number one,
until the problem is resolved.
Symptom/error message
Solution
Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOG-
NIZED” or the system fails to interpret
the command correctly.
1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see “Standard Mode command list” or “Alternate Command Mode command list” in this
section.
2. Speak clearly using your normal speech pattern and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.
NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
The system consistently selects the
wrong voicetag in the phonebook.
1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. See “Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation
System” in this section.
2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
4-136 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Traction Control System (TCS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Anti-freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Engine block heater (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Avoiding collision and rollover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Rapid air pressure loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Push-Button Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
NISSAN Intelligent key™ battery discharge . . . . . . . . 5-8
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Before starting the Hybrid System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Starting the Hybrid System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Electronically controlled Continuously
Variable Transmission (eCVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
● Do not attempt to test the vehicle on a
dynamometer (such as the dynamom-
eters used by some states for emissions
testing), or similar equipment. Doing so
may cause damage to the drivetrain or
the high voltage battery. Make sure you
inform test facility personnel that your
vehicle is a hybrid. Using the wrong test
equipment may result in drivetrain dam-
age or unexpected vehicle movement
which could result in serious vehicle
damage or personal injury.
● Do not park the vehicle with the ignition
switch in the ON position and the Hy-
brid System in the READY mode for any
extended length of time.
WARNING
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
● Keep the trunk lid closed while driving,
otherwise exhaust gases could be
drawn into the passenger compart-
ment. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open, follow these precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the
air recirculation but-
ton to off and the fan control dial to
high to circulate the air.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
● Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously in-
jured. Keep the car locked and the trunk
lid securely latched when not in use,
and prevent children’s access to car
keys.
● If electrical wiring or other cable con-
nections must pass to a trailer through
the seal on the trunk lid or the body,
follow the manufacturer’s recommen-
dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-
try into the vehicle.
WARNING
● Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-
ous. It can cause unconsciousness or
death.
● The exhaust system and body should be
● If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all win-
dows fully open, and have the vehicle
inspected immediately.
inspected by
whenever:
a
qualified mechanic
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are
● Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
entering
into
the
passenger
compartment.
5-2 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infla-
tion pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
c. You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-
tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
electrical systems can cause overrich
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,
causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-
ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-
able loss of performance or other un-
d. You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system, un-
derbody, or rear of the vehicle.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check all 4 tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
THREE-WAY CATALYST
usual
operating
conditions
are
The three-way catalyst is an emission control
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at
high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
detected. Have the vehicle inspected
promptly by a NISSAN dealer.
● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel could cause
the engine to misfire, damaging the
three-way catalyst.
WARNING
● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-
tem are very hot. Keep people, animals
or flammable materials away from the
exhaust system components.
● Do not race the engine while warming it
up.
● Do not push or tow your vehicle to start
the engine.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and in-
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label, located in the
driver’s door opening.
CAUTION
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
● Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline will seriously re-
duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to
help reduce exhaust pollutants.
Starting and driving 5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
mately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-
function exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alter-
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-
ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
●
The low tire pressure warning light does not
automatically turn off when the tire pressure
is adjusted. After all 4 tires are inflated to the
recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure
gauge to check the tire pressure.
WARNING
● If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Driving with under-
inflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an acci-
dent and could result in serious per-
sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label to turn the low tire pressure
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In case
of emergency” section for changing a
flat tire.)
●
Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation
and the outside temperature. Low outside
temperature can lower the temperature of
the air inside the tire which can cause a
lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause
the low tire pressure warning light to illumi-
nate. If the warning light illuminates in low
ambient temperature, check the tire pres-
sure for all four tires.
Additional information:
●
The TPMS does not monitor the tire
pressure of the spare tire.
●
The Tire and Loading Information label (also
referred to as the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label) is located in the
driver’s door opening.
●
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle
is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25
km/h). Also, this system may not detect a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a
flat tire while driving).
For additional information, see “Low tire pressure
warning light” in the “Instruments and controls”
section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.
5-4 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some examples are:
AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
indicated, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
– Facilities or electric devices using similar radio
frequencies are near the vehicle.
WARNING
– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
being used in or near the vehicle.
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss of
control or an accident.
– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a
DC/AC converter is being used in or near the
vehicle.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,
high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-
neuvers, because these driving practices could
cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with
any vehicle, loss of control could result in a
collision with other vehicles or objects or
cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if
the loss of control causes the vehicle to
slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and
avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under
the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-
scription or over-the-counter drugs which may
cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as
outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
FCC Notice:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment.
● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada.
CAUTION
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undes-
ired operation of the device.
Do not place metalized film or any metal
parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This
may cause poor reception of the signals
from the tire pressure sensors, and the
TPMS will not function properly.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily
interfere with the operation of the TPMS and
cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-
minate.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions
and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
or improperly belted person is significantly
more likely to be injured or killed than a
person properly wearing a seat belt.
Starting and driving 5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
If you decide that it is not safe to return the
vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,
road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the
vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
WARNING
While driving, the right side or left side wheels
may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this
occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-
ing the procedure below. Please note that this
procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle
must be driven as appropriate based on the con-
ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
The following actions can increase the
chance of losing control of the vehicle if
there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.
Losing control of the vehicle may cause a
collision and result in personal injury.
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur
if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to
hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss
can also be caused by driving on under-inflated
tires.
● The vehicle generally moves or pulls in
the direction of the flat tire.
● Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
● Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling
and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway
speeds.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
● Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not over react.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-
ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect
the tires for wear and damage. See “Wheels and
tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air
pressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintain
control of the vehicle by following the procedure
below. Please note that this procedure is only a
general guide. The vehicle must be driven as
appropriate based on the conditions of the ve-
hicle, road and traffic.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
4. When appropriate , slowly release the accel-
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-
hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed
is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-
hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle
speed is reduced.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location
off the road and away from traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually
stop the vehicle.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the
steering wheel until both tires return to the
road surface. When all tires are on the road
surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-
propriate driving lane.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
either contact a roadside emergency service
to change the tire or see “Changing a flat
tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.
5-6 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
WARNING
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
Do not operate the push-button ignition
switch while driving the vehicle except in
an emergency. (The Hybrid System will
turn off when the ignition switch is pushed
3 consecutive times in quick succession
or the ignition switch is pushed and held
for more than 2 seconds.) If the Hybrid
System turns off while the vehicle is being
driven, this could lead to a crash and seri-
ous injury.
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol
or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-
duces coordination, delays reaction time
and impairs judgement. Driving after
drinking alcohol increases the likelihood
of being involved in an accident injuring
yourself and others. Additionally, if you
are injured in an accident, alcohol can
increase the severity of the injury.
WSD0196
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,
you must choose not to drive under the influence
of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are
injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-
though the local laws vary on what is considered
to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol
affects all people differently and most people
underestimate the effects of alcohol.
When the ignition switch is pushed without de-
pressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch po-
sition will illuminate as follows:
With the shift selector in the P (Park) position
push the switch
●
●
●
once to change to ACC.
two times to change to ON.
three times to return to off.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And
that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-
scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your
ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-
hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.
If the ignition switch was repeatedly pushed on
and off over a short period of time, the start
function may not work properly. Wait 20 seconds
then restart the Hybrid System.
Starting and driving 5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
switch position cannot be switched to off until the
shift selector is moved to the P (Park) position.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
POSITIONS
CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition
switch in ACC or ON positions when the
Hybrid System is off for an extended pe-
riod. This can discharge the battery.
LOCK (Normal parking position):
When the ignition switch cannot be switched off,
proceed as follows:
The ignition switch can only be locked in this
position.
1. Move the shift selector into the P (Park)
position.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™
BATTERY DISCHARGE
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is
pushed to the ACC position while carrying the
Intelligent Key or with the Intelligent Key inserted
in the port.
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch
position will change to the ON position.
3. Push the ignition switch again to the off
position.
The ignition switch will lock when any door is
opened or closed with the ignition switched off.
The shift selector can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in
the ON position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
OFF:
The ignition switch is in the off position when the
Hybrid System is turned off using the ignition
switch. No lights will illuminate on the ignition
switch.
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,
the push-button ignition switch cannot be
activated.
ACC (Accessories):
Some indicators and warnings for operation are
displayed on the vehicle information display. See
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments
and controls” section.
This position activates electrical accessories
such as the radio, when the Hybrid System is off.
ON (Normal operating position):
This position turns on the ignition system and
electrical accessories.
5-8 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
● Never place anything except the Intelli-
gent Key in the Intelligent Key port. Do-
ing so may cause damage to the
equipment.
● Make sure the Intelligent Key is in the
correct direction when inserting it to
the Intelligent Key port. The engine may
not start if it is in the wrong direction.
● Remove the Intelligent Key from the
Intelligent Key port after the ignition
switch is pushed to the LOCK position.
WSD0232
WSD0233
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
If the battery of the Intelligent Key is almost dis-
To remove the Intelligent Key from the port, push
the ignition switch to the LOCK position and pull
A
charged, the guide light
of the Intelligent Key
᭺
C
port blinks and the indicator appears on the ve-
hicle information display. See “Vehicle informa-
tion display” in the “Instruments and controls”
section.
the Intelligent Key out of the port
.
᭺
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer system will not
allow the engine to start without the use of the
registered key.
NOTE:
The Intelligent Key port does not charge
the Intelligent Key battery. If you see the
low battery indicator, replace the battery as
soon as possible. See “Battery replace-
ment” in the “Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key
(for example, when interference is caused by
another registered key, an automated toll road
device or automatic payment device on the key
ring), restart the engine using the following pro-
cedure:
In this case, inserting the Intelligent Key into the
B
port
allows you to start the engine. Make sure
᭺
the Intelligent Key is placed in the correct direc-
tion: The front side faces upward and the key ring
side faces downward as illustrated.
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position
for approximately 5 seconds.
Starting and driving 5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BEFORE STARTING THE HYBRID
SYSTEM
STARTING THE HYBRID SYSTEM
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately 10
seconds.
●
●
Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift selector to P (Park).
Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-
ant, brake fluid, and windshield–washer fluid
as frequently as possible, or at least when-
ever you refuel.
The Hybrid System is designed not to
operate if the shift selector is not in the
P (Park) position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
Depress the brake pedal and push the igni-
tion switch to start the Hybrid System. The
READY light will illuminate on the meter.
●
●
Check that all windows and lights are clean.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-
ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-
rate key ring to avoid interference from other
devices.
Visually inspect tires for their appearance
and condition. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
NOTE:
●
●
●
●
Lock all doors.
When starting the Hybrid System at very
low outside temperatures, the READY light
will flash and it may take longer for the
READY light to illuminate.
Position seat and adjust head restraints.
Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to
do likewise.
● The engine may not start even with the
READY light illuminated. Once the
READY light is illuminated you may begin
driving the vehicle.
●
Check the operation of warning lights when
the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position. See “Warning/indicator lights and
audible reminders” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
● You may hear a sound in the engine com-
partment when the brake pedal is de-
pressed with the Hybrid System off. This
does not indicate a problem.
5-10 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
● When the Hybrid System is started or
stopped, you may hear a sound coming
from the high voltage battery located un-
der the rear seats. This does not indicate
a problem.
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (eCVT)
CAUTION
When stopping the vehicle on an uphill
grade, do not hold the vehicle by depress-
ing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake
should be used for this purpose.
WARNING
● When the Hybrid System is started or
stopped, or while the vehicle is idling, you
may hear a sound coming from the trans-
mission. This does not indicate a prob-
lem.
● Do not attempt to test the vehicle on a
dynamometer (such as the dynamom-
eters used by some states for emissions
testing), or similar equipment. Doing so
may cause damage to the drivetrain or
the high voltage battery. Make sure you
inform test facility personnel that your
vehicle is a hybrid. Using the wrong test
equipment may result in drivetrain dam-
age or unexpected vehicle movement
which could result in serious vehicle
damage or personal injury.
The eCVT in your vehicle is electronically con-
trolled to produce maximum power and smooth
operation.
The recommended operating procedures for this
transmission are shown on the following pages.
Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle
performance and driving enjoyment.
● When the gasoline engine is started or
stopped with the Hybrid System on, you
may feel a vibration and hear a rattling
sound. This does not indicate a problem.
Starting the vehicle
4. To turn off the Hybrid System, shift the shift
selector to the P (Park) position and place
the ignition switch to the OFF position.
1. After starting the Hybrid System, fully de-
press the foot brake pedal before moving the
shift selector out of the P (Park) position.
● Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-
tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or B
(Brake). Always depress the brake
pedal until shifting is completed. Fail-
ure to do so could cause you to lose
control and have an accident.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and
move the shift selector into a driving gear.
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start
the vehicle in motion.
4. Stop the vehicle completely before shifting
the selector to the P (Park) position.
● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving. This could
cause an accident.
The eCVT is designed so the foot brake
pedal MUST be depressed before shifting
from P (Park) to any drive position while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Starting and driving 5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The shift selector cannot be moved out of P
(Park) and into any of the other gear posi-
tions if the ignition switch is pushed to the
LOCK or ACC position.
WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift selec-
tor is in any position while the READY
light is OFF. Failure to do so could cause
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll
away and result in serious personal injury
or property damage.
P (Park):
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when
the vehicle is completely stopped.
LSD0189
To move the shift selector:
Use the P (Park) selector position when the ve-
hicle is parked or when turning the Hybrid Sys-
tem ON. Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped. The brake pedal must be de-
pressed to move the shift selector from N
(Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park).
Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill,
apply the parking brake first, then shift the shift
selector into the P (Park) position.
Push the button while depressing the brake
pedal
Push the button to shift
Shift without pushing button
Shifting
After starting the vehicle, fully depress the brake
pedal and move the shift selector from P (Park) to
any of the desired shift positions.
5-12 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R (Reverse):
D (Drive):
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
B (Brake) low gear:
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when
the vehicle is completely stopped.
Downshift into the B position with your foot off
the accelerator pedal to use engine braking while
driving.
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make
sure the vehicle is completely stopped before
selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake
pedal must be depressed to move the shift
selector from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any
drive position to R (Reverse).
You may feel that engine braking is less effective
than a conventional vehicle when driving at higher
speeds.
Driving with the transmission in the B position for
long periods of time may cause a decrease in fuel
economy.
N (Neutral):
LSD0190
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. Do
not leave the shift selector in the N (Neutral)
position for a long period of time. In the N (Neu-
tral) position, the gasoline engine operates but
electricity cannot be generated. The high voltage
battery will be discharged requiring unnecessary
engine power to recharge.
Shift lock release
If the battery charge is low or discharged, the
shift selector may not be moved from the P (Park)
position even with the brake pedal depressed
and the shift selector button pushed.
It will be necessary to jump start or have your
battery charged, see “Jump starting” in the “In
case of emergency” section. Contact your
NISSAN dealer or a professional towing service.
Depending on the status of the engine before
shifting into the N (Neutral) position, the engine
may not operate.
Starting and driving 5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARKING BRAKE
To move the shift selector, complete the following
procedure:
WARNING
WARNING
If the shift selector cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position while the engine is
running and the brake pedal is depressed,
the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-
ing stop lights could cause an accident
injuring yourself and others.
● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-
leased before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion.
2. Apply the parking brake.
● Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
3. For cap removal it must be used or if it is
available a plastic trim tool can be used
● Do not use the shift selector in place of
the parking brake. When parking, be
sure the parking brake is fully engaged.
4. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a 3 mm
screwdriver, remove the shift lock release
cover.
● Do not leave children unattended in a
vehicle. They could release the parking
brake and cause an accident.
● If available, a plastic trim tool can also be
used.
5. Insert the small screwdriver in the shift lock
release slot and push down.
6. Move the shift selector to the N (Neutral)
position while holding down the shift lock
release.
7. Push the ignition switch to the ON position
to unlock the steering wheel. Now the ve-
hicle may be moved to the desired location.
If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P
(Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the trans-
mission as soon as possible.
5-14 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CRUISE CONTROL
●
The SET indicator light may blink when the
cruise control switch is turned ON while
pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or
CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise
control system, use the following proce-
dures.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving
under the following conditions:
● When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed.
● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in
speed.
LSD0158
LSD0184
To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.
1. CANCEL switch
2. ACCEL/RES switch
3. COAST/SET switch
4. ON/OFF switch
● On winding or hilly roads.
● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).
● In very windy areas.
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-
tion.
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.
3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it
will release.
●
If the cruise control system malfunctions, it
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
cancels automatically. The SET indicator
light in the instrument panel then blinks to
warn the driver.
The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-
tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without
keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning
light goes out.
●
If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the
cruise control switch off and have the sys-
tem checked by a NISSAN dealer.
To turn on the cruise control, push the
ON/OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator light in
the instrument panel comes on.
Starting and driving 5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to
the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch
and release it. The SET indicator light in the
instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set
speed.
●
●
the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH
(13 km/h) below the set speed.
To resume the preset speed, push and re-
lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-
turns to the last set cruising speed when the
vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).
you move the shift selector to N (Neutral).
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods.
●
To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-
celerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously
set speed.
●
●
●
Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and
release the COAST/SET switch.
Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
When the vehicle attains the speed you de-
sire, release the switch.
●
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
when going up or down steep hills. If this
happens, drive without the cruise control.
Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed in-
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods.
●
●
●
Push the CANCEL switch; the SET indicator
light in the instrument panel goes out.
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods.
Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light
goes out.
●
●
●
Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-
hicle attains the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch and release it.
Push the ON/OFF switch off. Both the
CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator
light in the instrument panel go out.
Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-
lease the switch when the vehicle slows to
the desired speed.
The cruise control is automatically canceled and
the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:
Push and release the COAST/SET switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed de-
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
●
you depress the brake pedal while pushing
the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch.
The preset speed is deleted from memory.
5-16 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
●
Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain
cruising speeds with a constant accelerator
position.
●
Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.
See “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-
tions” in “Technical and consumer informa-
tion” later in this manual.
CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to obtain
maximum engine performance and en-
sure the future reliability and economy of
your new vehicle. Failure to follow these
recommendations may result in short-
ened engine life and reduced engine
performance.
●
●
Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.
Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.
Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.
Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-
hicles.
●
●
Keep your engine tuned up.
●
●
●
●
Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
Avoid quick starts.
Follow the recommended periodic mainte-
nance schedule.
Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
●
●
●
●
Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-
sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles
(800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.
Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-
proper alignment increases tire wear and
lowers fuel economy.
Air conditioner operation lowers fuel
economy. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
When cruising at highway speeds, it is more
economical to use the air conditioner and
leave the windows closed to reduce drag.
Starting and driving 5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into
traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good
practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
A
●
●
●
HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:
᭺
Turn the wheels into the curb and move the
vehicle forward until the curb side wheel
gently touches the curb.
B
HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:
᭺
Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
WSD0050
HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
C
CURB:
᭺
● Never leave the Hybrid System in the
READY mode while the vehicle is
unattended.
WARNING
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road
so the vehicle will move away from the cen-
ter of the road if it moves.
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
tion.
●
Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park). Fail-
ure to do so could cause the vehicle to
move unexpectedly or roll away and re-
sult in an accident. Make sure the shift
selector has been pushed as far forward
as it can go and cannot be moved without
depressing the foot brake pedal.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift selector to the P (Park)
position.
5-18 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POWER STEERING
BRAKE SYSTEM
wheel operations that could cause the power
steering system to overheat.
WARNING
WARNING
● If the Hybrid System is not in the READY
mode or is turned off while driving, the
power assist for the steering will not
work. Steering will be harder to
operate.
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the hydraulic brake warning
light and the electronically controlled
brake system warning light is on. Driving
could be dangerous. If you judge it to be
safe, drive carefully to the nearest service
station for repairs. Otherwise, have your
vehicle towed because driving it could be
dangerous.
You may hear a sound when the steering wheel is
operated quickly. However, this is not a malfunc-
tion.
If the power steering warning light PS illuminates
while the Hybrid System is in the READY mode, it
may indicate the power steering system is not
functioning properly and may need servicing.
Have the power steering system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
● When the power steering warning light
illuminates with the Hybrid System in
the READY mode, there will be no
power assist for the steering. You will
still have control of the vehicle but the
steering will be harder to operate. Have
the power steering system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Regenerative brake
When the power steering warning light illumi-
nates with the Hybrid System in the READY
mode, there will be no power assist for the steer-
ing but you will still have control of the vehicle. At
this time, greater steering effort is required to
operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp
turns and at low speeds.
The Hybrid System changes vehicle motion into
electricity. The electricity is used to recharge the
high voltage battery. When applying the brakes,
you may hear a sound coming from the regenera-
tive braking system. This is a normal operating
characteristic of a hybrid vehicle.
The power steering system is designed to pro-
vide power assist while driving to operate the
steering wheel with light force.
When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly
or continuously while parking or driving at a very
low speed, the power assist for the steering
wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent over-
heating of the power steering system and protect
it from getting damaged. While the power assist
is reduced, steering wheel operation will become
heavy. When the temperature of the power steer-
ing system goes down, the power assist level will
return to normal. Avoid repeating such steering
For additional information see “Electric Power
steering warning light” in the “Instruments and
controls” section.
The regenerative braking works in the following
conditions:
1. When the accelerator pedal is released, the
Hybrid System makes electricity while the
vehicle slows down during coasting.
2. When the brake pedal is depressed with the
shift selector in “D” or “B”.
Starting and driving 5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
●
When the brake pedal is depressed repeat-
edly.
Hydraulic system
WARNING
The brake system has separate hydraulic circuits.
If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have brak-
ing at other wheels.
While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or acceler-
ating could cause the wheels to skid and
result in an accident.
When the Hybrid System is in the READY
mode.
When the Hybrid System is turned off.
However, the brake pedal will have to be de-
pressed harder and your stopping distance will
increase. The brake system warning light will also
come on.
It may be hard to depress the brake pedal or the
pedal stroke may be short with the Hybrid System
OFF. This is not a malfunction.
Parking brake break-in
Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the
stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened
or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or
drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the
best brake performance.
Brake actuator
Using the brakes
The brake actuator uses a pump to provide
power assisted braking.
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while
driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the
brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.
The brake warning light comes on if the actuator
is not functioning properly. The brake pedal will
be hard to depress and stopping distance will
increase. Depress the brake pedal firmly to stop
the vehicle in a safe place and contact a NISSAN
dealer.
This procedure is described in the vehicle service
manual and can be performed by a NISSAN
dealer.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and
downshift to a lower gear before going down a
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may
reduce braking performance and could result in
loss of vehicle control.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your
braking distance will be longer and the vehicle
may pull to one side during braking.
If the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly, the
brake warning light may turn on. However this is
normal if the light turns off after a few seconds.
When applying the brakes, you may hear a sound
coming from the braking system. This is normal.
Noise may be heard in the engine room under the
following conditions. This is a normal operating
characteristic and does not indicate a malfunc-
tion.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to
heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return
to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high
speeds until the brakes function correctly.
●
●
When you open a door.
When the brake pedal is depressed firmly.
5-20 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
(ABS)
Using the system
– When installing a spare tire, make
sure that it is the proper size and type
as specified on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See “Tire and
Loading Information label” in the
“Technical and consumer informa-
tion” section of this manual.
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-
press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,
but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-
ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
WARNING
● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a
sophisticated device, but it cannot pre-
vent accidents resulting from careless
or dangerous driving techniques. It can
help maintain vehicle control during
braking on slippery surfaces. Remem-
ber that stopping distances on slippery
surfaces will be longer than on normal
surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-
tances may also be longer on rough,
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you
are using tire chains. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you. Ultimately, the driver is respon-
sible for safety.
– For detailed information, see
“Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping
distances.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the
brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard
braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.
The system detects the rotation speed at each
wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-
vent each wheel from locking and sliding. By
preventing each wheel from locking, the system
helps the driver maintain steering control and
helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-
pery surfaces. When the ABS is operating the
SLIP indicator light in the instrument panel will
blink.
Self-test feature
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that
tests the system each time you start the engine
and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or
reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear
a “clunk” noise. This is normal and does not
indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a
malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illumi-
nates the ABS warning light on the instrument
panel. The brake system then operates normally,
but without anti-lock assistance.
● Tire type and condition of tires may also
affect braking effectiveness.
– When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the
self-test or while driving, have the vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Starting and driving 5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)
When accelerating on slippery surfaces the tire
may spin or slip. With the vehicle Traction Control
System (TCS), sensors detect these movements
and control the braking and engine output to help
improve vehicle road traction.
Normal operation
● If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not stan-
dard equipment or are extremely dete-
riorated, the Traction Control System
may not operate properly and the VDC
warning light may come on.
The ABS operates at speeds above 4 - 6 MPH (7
- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road
conditions.
When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are
close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies
and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is
similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You
may hear a noise from under the hood or feel a
vibration from the actuator when it is operating.
This is normal and indicates that the ABS is
operating properly. However, if the SLIP indica-
tor light blinks, the road conditions are hazardous
and extra care is required while driving.
●
When the TCS is operating, the slip indica-
tor in the instrument panel blinks.
● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
If suspension parts such as shock ab-
sorbers, struts, springs, bushings and
wheels are not standard equipment or
are extremely deteriorated, the Traction
Control System may not operate prop-
erly and the VDC warning light may
come on.
●
If the slip indicator blinks, the vehicle is may
be under slippery conditions. Be sure to
drive carefully.
●
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
VDC warning light illuminates in the instru-
ment panel.
● If wheels or tires other than the recom-
mended ones are used, the Traction
Control System may not operate prop-
erly and the VDC warning light may
come on.
As long as the VDC warning light is on, the
traction control function is canceled. The vehicle
will behave like a vehicle without the system.
WARNING
● The Traction Control System is not a
substitute for winter tires or tire chains
on a snow covered road.
● The Traction Control System is de-
signed to help maintain traction with
the road surface but does not prevent
accidents due to abrupt steering opera-
tion at high speeds or by careless or
dangerous driving techniques. Reduce
vehicle speed and be especially careful
when driving and cornering on slippery
surfaces and always drive carefully.
5-22 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses
various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve-
hicle motion. Under certain driving situations, the
system will control braking and engine output to
help keep the vehicle on its steered path.
The computer has a built in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start the
engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse
at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you
may hear a clunk noise. This is not an indication of
a malfunction and indicates that the VDC system
is working properly.
● If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not stan-
dard equipment or are extremely dete-
riorated, the Vehicle Dynamic Control
system may not operate properly and
the VDC warning light may come on.
●
When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
system is operating, the SLIP indicator in
the instrument panel blinks.
● When driving on extremely inclined sur-
faces such as higher banked corners,
the Vehicle Dynamic Control system
may not operate properly and the VDC
warning light may come on. Do not drive
on these types of roads.
WARNING
●
If the SLIP indicator blinks, the road condi-
tions may be slippery. Be sure to adjust your
speed and driving to these conditions. See
“Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle Dynamic
Control warning light” in the “Instruments
and controls” section.
● The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is
designed to help improve driving stabil-
ity but does not prevent accidents due
to abrupt steering operation at high
speeds or by careless or dangerous
driving techniques. Reduce vehicle
speed and be especially careful when
driving and cornering on slippery sur-
faces and always drive carefully.
● When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
ramp, the VDC warning light may illumi-
nate. This is not a malfunction. Restart
the engine after driving onto a stable
surface.
●
Indicator light
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
VDC warning light comes on in the instru-
ment panel.
● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
If suspension parts such as shock ab-
sorbers, struts, springs, bushings and
wheels are not standard equipment or
are extremely deteriorated, the Traction
Control System may not operate prop-
erly and the VDC warning light may
come on.
As long as this warning light is on, the trac-
tion control and the Vehicle Dynamic Control
functions are canceled.
● If wheels or tires other than the recom-
mended ones are used, the Vehicle Dy-
namic Control system may not operate
properly and the VDC warning light may
come on.
When the VDC system is operating, you may
hear a noise or vibration from under the hood.
This is normal and indicates that the VDC system
is working properly.
● The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is
not a substitute for winter tires or tire
chains on a snow covered road.
Starting and driving 5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-
mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL
SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please
consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,
size, speed rating and availability informa-
tion.
●
●
A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
Extra windshield–washer fluid to refill the
reservoir tank.
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-
icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes
frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key
hole or use the remote keyless entry function on
the intelligent key.
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some U.S.
states and Canadian provinces prohibit their
use. Check local, state and provincial laws
before installing studded tires.
ANTI-FREEZE
● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” under
these conditions. Try to avoid driving on
wet ice until the road is salted or
sanded.
In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-
perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the
anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.
For details, see “Engine cooling system” and
“Inverter cooling system” in the “Maintenance
and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-
tion. Accelerate and slow down with
care. If accelerating or downshifting too
fast, the drive wheels will lose even
more traction.
3. Tire chains may be used. For details, see
“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-
freeze, drain the cooling system, including the
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.
For details, see “Changing engine coolant” and
“Changing inverter coolant” in the “Maintenance
and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
● Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
It is recommended that the following items be
carried in the vehicle during winter:
●
●
A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove
ice and snow from the windows and wiper
blades.
● Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry pave-
ment. However, the performance of these
tires will be substantially reduced in snowy
and icy conditions. If you operate your ve-
A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the
jack to give it firm support.
5-24 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. The engine block heater must be plugged in
for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside
temperatures, to properly warm the engine
coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the
engine block heater on.
● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of
ice is seen ahead, brake before reach-
ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,
and avoid any sudden steering
maneuvers.
● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-
tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug
the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded
110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the
proper extension cord or a grounded
outlet can result in a fire or electrical
shock and cause serious personal
injury.
6. Before turning the Hybrid System ON, un-
plug and properly store the cord to keep it
away from moving parts.
● Do not use the cruise control on slip-
pery roads.
Engine block heaters are available through
NISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperature
starting. The engine block heater should be used
when the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) or
lower.
● Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
clear of the exhaust pipe and from
around your vehicle.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the Hybrid System OFF.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block
heater cord.
WARNING
● Do not use your engine block heater
with an ungrounded electrical system
or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-
riously injured by an electrical shock if
you use an ungrounded connection.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a
grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension
cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-
volt AC (VAC) outlet.
● Disconnect and properly store the en-
gine block heater cord before turning
the Hybrid System ON. Damage to the
cord could result in an electrical shock
and can cause serious injury.
Starting and driving 5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
5-26 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 In case of emergency
Flat tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Hybrid system stops operating while driving . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Vehicle does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Confirm battery is discharged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Emergency Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Towing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle). . . . . . . . .6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FLAT TIRE
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
WARNING
● If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Driving with under-
inflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an acci-
dent and could result in serious per-
sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label to turn the low tire pressure
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-
sure of all tires except the spare. When the low
tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of
your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the
vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the
TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low
tire pressure warning light. This system will acti-
vate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds
above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For more details, refer
to “Warning/indicator lights and audible remind-
ers” in the “Instruments and controls” section,
and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
in the “Starting and driving” section.
● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-
low:
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
brake. Move the shift selector to P (Park).
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
4. Turn Hybrid System OFF.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to
signal professional road assistance person-
nel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
and clear of the vehicle.
6-2 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
● Make sure the parking brake is securely
applied and the transmission is shifted
into P (Park).
● Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
● Never change tires if oncoming traffic is
close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-
sional road assistance.
WCE0044
LCE0141
Blocking wheels
Getting the spare tire and tools
1
Place suitable blocks
at both the front and
Open the trunk. Lift the trunk floor carpeting.
᭺
1
2
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire
Remove the jack
and wheel nut wrench
᭺
᭺
2
to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is
from the holder. Lift the molded tool holder to
remove the spare tire.
᭺
jacked up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.
In case of emergency 6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for jack
support.
● Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
● Never use blocks on or under the jack.
● Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the
vehicle to move. This is especially true
for
vehicles
with
limited
slip
differentials.
● Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
WCE0202
CE1089
Turn the clamp to remove the spare tire.
Jacking up vehicle and removing the
damaged tire
● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off
the ground. It may cause the vehicle to
move.
WARNING
● Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is nec-
essary to work under the vehicle, sup-
port it with safety stands.
● Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the
jack provided with your vehicle on other
vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting
only your vehicle during a tire change.
6-4 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LCE0020
WCE0056
notches in the front or the rear as shown.
Also fit the groove of the jack head between
the notches as shown.
Always refer to the proper illustrations for the
correct placement and jack-up points for your
specific vehicle model and jack type.
Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. See specific instructions under the
heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
The jack should be used on firm and
level ground.
Carefully read the caution label attached to
the jack body and the following instruc-
tions.
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever
and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the
vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re-
move the wheel nuts, and then remove the
tire.
1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by
turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut
wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts
until the tire is off the ground.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-
tween the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten
the wheel nuts finger tight.
2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
point as illustrated so the top of the jack
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
Align the jack head between the two
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel
nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until
they are tight.
In case of emergency 6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HYBRID SYSTEM STOPS
OPERATING WHILE DRIVING
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
WARNING
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
● If the Hybrid System stops operating
while driving, the power assist for the
brakes and steering will not work. Brak-
ing and steering will be harder.
A
B
C
D
in the sequence illustrated (
,
,
᭺ ᭺ ᭺ ᭺
,
,
E
). Lower the vehicle completely.
᭺
COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire
and loading information label affixed to the
driver side center pillar.
WARNING
● If the Hybrid System stops operating
while driving, do not open any door until
the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
Opening a door will lock the steering
wheel. This may cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle and could result in
serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.
● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-
ment in the vehicle.
6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor
carpeting over the damaged tire.
● Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts
to become loose.
7. Close the trunk.
The Hybrid System may stop operating while
driving if the high voltage battery becomes dis-
charged, the 12-volt battery becomes dis-
charged or the fuel tank is empty. If the Hybrid
System stops operating while driving, perform
the following:
● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-
hicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).
WARNING
● Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly se-
cured after use. Such items can become
dangerous projectiles in an accident or
sudden stop.
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts
to the specified torque with
wrench.
a
torque
1. Reduce your speed gradually. Pull to the
side of the road to a safe area.
● The spare tire is designed for emer-
gency use. See specific instructions un-
der the heading “Wheels and tires” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
3. Set the “POWER” switch at ACC or OFF,
and try to start the Hybrid System.
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to
specification at all times. It is recom-
mended that wheel nuts be tightened to
specifications at each lubrication interval.
4. If the Hybrid System will not start, see “Ve-
hicle does not start” in this section.
6-6 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE DOES NOT START
JUMP STARTING
Before attempting to jump start the vehicle, make
sure the fuel tank is not empty and the correct
starting procedure is followed. See “Starting the
Hybrid System” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
tion. Do not drive the vehicle on battery power
only if the fuel tank is empty. The high voltage
battery will become discharged and the Hybrid
System will turn off.
2. If the 12-volt battery terminals are tight and
clean, try to jump start the vehicle. See
“Jump starting” in this section.
To start the Hybrid System with a booster battery,
the instructions and precautions below must be
followed.
EMERGENCY START
WARNING
When the Hybrid System cannot be started, the
following procedure can be used if the Hybrid
System and “POWER” switch function normally:
● The engine may start at any time with-
out warning when the ignition is on and
the Hybrid System is in the READY
mode. When Jump starting keep your
hands, clothing, hair and tools away
from fans, belts and any other parts that
can move to avoid personal injury.
1. Put the transmission in P (Park) position.
CONFIRM BATTERY IS
DISCHARGED
2. Push the ignition switch to the ACC posi-
tion.
Confirm the battery is discharged by pushing the
ignition switch to the ON position. Confirm the
instrument cluster or head lights come on at the
normal brightness levels or that other accesso-
ries such as the audio system come on. Push the
ignition switch to turn the Hybrid System on.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
● If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting in
severe injury or death. It could also
damage your vehicle.
4. Push and hold the ignition switch for about
15 seconds. Even if the Hybrid System
starts using this procedure, the system may
be malfunctioning. Do not continue to use
this emergency procedure to start the sys-
tem. Have the vehicle checked by your
NISSAN dealer.
● Explosive hydrogen gas is always
present in the vicinity of the battery.
Keep all sparks and flames away from
the battery.
●
If the lights do not dim or the accessories do
not turn off, see “Emergency start” in this
section.
●
If the lights become dim or the accessories
turn off, check the following:
If the Hybrid System still does not start, contact
you NISSAN dealer.
● Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-
rosive sulfuric acid solution which can
cause severe burns. If the fluid should
come into contact with anything, imme-
diately flush the contacted area with
water.
1. Check that the 12-volt battery terminals are
tight and clean. See “12-volt Battery” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
The battery is located on the right hand side
of the trunk behind an access panel. If the
12-volt battery terminals are loose, contact
your NISSAN dealer.
In case of emergency 6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Locate the fusible link box behind the engine
air cleaner.
● Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
A
2. Push the tab in and lift up
to remove the
᭺
● The booster battery must be rated at 12
volts. Use of an improperly rated battery
can damage your vehicle.
lid and expose the remote positive battery
B
terminal
.
᭺
● Whenever working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protectors (for
example, goggles or industrial safety
spectacles) and remove rings, metal
bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean
over the battery when jump starting.
● Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause se-
rious injury.
● Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any
time. Keep hands and other objects
away from it.
● Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage
to the charging system and cause per-
sonal injury.
LCE0143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-8 In case of emergency
8. Hold down the brake pedal and press the
START button. The vehicle instruments and
gauges will light up, and the green ЉREADYЉ
light will come ON.
CAUTION
If the green READY light does not come
on, press the START button to turn the
Hybrid System OFF. Carefully disconnect
the negative cable then the positive cable.
Have vehicle taken to dealership for
repair.
9. After the green READY light in the meter
display comes ON, carefully disconnect the
negative cable and then the positive cable.
LCE0144
6. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-
3. If the booster battery is in another vehicle
A
B
C
᭺ ᭺ ᭺ ᭺
D
F
E
F
lustrated (
,
,
,
).
, position the two vehicles,
bring their batteries near each other.
and , to
10. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be
sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover
the vent holes as it may be contaminated
with corrosive acid.
᭺
᭺
᭺
CAUTION
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
● Always connect positive (ϩ) to positive
(ϩ) and negative (Ϫ) to body ground (for
example, strut mounting bolt, engine
lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.
4. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se-
lector to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary
electrical systems (lights, heater, air condi-
tioner, etc.).
● Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine com-
partment and that the cable clamps do
not contact any other metal.
5. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so
equipped) of the vehicle with battery for
F
booster
G
cloth
᭺
. Cover the battery with an old
᭺
to reduce explosion hazard.
7. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and
let it run for a few minutes.
In case of emergency 6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PUSH STARTING
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by the
high temperature warning light), or if you feel a
lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc.
take the following steps.
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator
before opening the hood. (If steam or cool-
ant is escaping, turn the Hybrid System off.)
Do not open the hood further until no steam
or coolant can be seen.
WARNING
Do not push start this vehicle. The three-
way catalyst may be damaged.
WARNING
CAUTION
4. Open the engine hood.
● Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause engine
damage or a vehicle fire.
Hybrid models cannot be push-started or
tow-started. Attempting to do so may
cause electrical or transmission damage.
WARNING
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator cap while the
engine and/or inverter is still hot. When
the radiator cap is removed, pressur-
ized hot water will spurt out, possibly
causing serious injury.
If steam or water is coming from the en-
gine and/or inverter, stand clear to pre-
vent getting burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is
running. The radiator hoses and radiator
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,
the water pump belt is missing or loose, or
the cooling fan does not run, turn the Hybrid
System off.
● Do not open the hood if steam is com-
ing out.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply
the parking brake and move the shift selector
to P (Park).
WARNING
Do not turn the Hybrid System off.
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or the
engine cooling fan. The engine or engine
cooling fan can start at any time.
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air conditioner
temperature control to maximum hot and fan
control to high speed.
6-10 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
For information about towing your vehicle behind
a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”
in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-
tion of this manual.
6. After the engine and inverter cools down,
check the coolant level in the engine and
inverter coolant reservoir tank with the en-
gine running. Add coolant to the engine and
inverter coolant reservoir tank if necessary.
Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN
dealer.
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in
Canada) and local regulations for towing must be
followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-
age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-
able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-
tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure proper
towing and to prevent accidental damage to your
vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service
operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have
the service operator carefully read the following
precautions:
WARNING
● Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
● Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
● When towing, make sure that the trans-
mission, axles, steering system and
powertrain are in working condition. If
any of these conditions apply, dollies or
a flatbed tow truck must be used.
● Always attach safety chains before
towing.
In case of emergency 6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
If your vehicle needs to be towed, do it
with the front wheels raised. If the front
wheels are on the ground when towing,
the traction motor may generate electric-
ity. This may damage the Hybrid System
components and cause a fire.
CAUTION
● Never tow this vehicle with the front
wheels on the ground or four wheels on
the ground (forward or backward), as
this may cause serious and expensive
damage to the transmission. If it is nec-
essary to tow the vehicle with the rear
wheels raised always use towing dollies
under the front wheels.
● When towing with the front wheels on
towing dollies:
– Push the ignition switch to the OFF
position, and secure the steering
wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a rope or similar device.
ACE0511
SCE0199A
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
– Move the shift selector to the N (Neu-
tral) position.
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed
with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or
place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.
6-12 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● When towing hybrid vehicles with the
rear wheels on the ground (if you do not
use towing dollies): Always release the
parking brake.
● Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow
or free a stuck vehicle.
● Only use devices specifically designed
for vehicle recovery and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.
● Always pull the recovery device straight
out from the front of the vehicle. Never
pull at an angle.
● Route recovery devices so they do not
touch any part of the vehicle except the
attachment point.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use a tow strap or other device designed specifi-
cally for vehicle recovery. Always follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery de-
vice.
LCE0145
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck
vehicle)
Pulling a stuck vehicle
Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing or
vehicle recovery.
WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-
sonal injury or death when recovering a
stuck vehicle:
● Contact a professional towing service
to recover the vehicle if you have any
questions regarding the recovery
procedure.
In case of emergency 6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55
km/h).
Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
4. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few
tries, contact a professional towing service
to remove the vehicle.
● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
● Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and
result in serious injury. Parts of your
vehicle could also overheat and be
damaged.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use the following procedure:
1. Make sure the area in front and behind the
vehicle is clear of obstructions.
2. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear
an area around the front tires.
3. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-
ward.
● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
and D (Drive).
● Apply the accelerator as little as possible
to maintain the rocking motion.
● Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R (Reverse) and D
(Drive).
6-14 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Waxing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Tire dressings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
High voltage battery air vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Corrosion protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Most common factors contributing to vehicle
corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Environmental factors influence the rate of
corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-
hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas
must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the
drain holes in the lower edge of the door are
open. Spray water under the body and in the
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away
road salt.
CAUTION
● Do not use car washes that use acid in
the detergent. Some car washes, espe-
cially brushless ones, use some acid for
cleaning. The acid may react with some
plastic vehicle components, causing
them to crack. This could affect their
appearance, and also could cause them
not to function properly. Always check
with your car wash to confirm that acid
is not used.
To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your
vehicle as soon as you can:
●
after a rainfall to prevent possible damage
from acid rain.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to
avoid water spots.
●
●
after driving on coastal roads.
WAXING
when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-
pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get
on the paint surface.
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is
recommended to remove built-up wax residue
and to avoid a weathered appearance before
re-applying wax.
● Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical deter-
gents, gasoline or solvents.
●
when dust or mud builds up on the surface.
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle
inside a garage or in a covered area.
● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-
light or while the vehicle body is hot, as
the surface may become water-spotted.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
proper product.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body
cover.
●
Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-
ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the
wax.
● Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-
stances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface
when putting on or removing the body
cover.
●
Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
cutting compounds or cleaners that may
damage the vehicle finish.
WASHING
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean
water.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of
water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild
soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose
dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm
(never hot) water.
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to
7-2 Appearance and care
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to
become coated with a film after the vehicle is
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft
cloth will easily remove this film.
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,
and tree sap as quickly as possible from the
surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or
staining. Special cleaning products are available
at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory
store.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows,
do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive
cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant
cleaners. They could damage the electri-
cal conductors, radio antenna elements or
rear window defroster elements.
UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is
necessary to clean the underbody regularly in
order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-
derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-
riod and again in the spring, the underseal must
be checked and, if necessary, retreated.
WAI0005
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS
GLASS
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-
ened in a mild soap solution, especially during
winter months in areas where road salt is used. If
not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.
When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier
to clean if the high-mounted stop light (if so
equipped) is removed first.
Be careful when removing the high-mounted
stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the
high-mounted stop light wires.
CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
To remove the high-mounted stop light:
● Do not use a cleaner that uses strong
acid or alkali contents to clean the
wheels.
1
Push toward rear of vehicle.
᭺
2
Lift to remove.
᭺
The high-mounted stop light must be properly
reinstalled before driving your vehicle.
Appearance and care 7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLEANING INTERIOR
●
Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to
remove).
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-
ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a
dry, soft cloth.
● Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The wheel
temperature should be the same as am-
bient temperature.
●
●
Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-
pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.
● Rinse the wheel to completely remove
the cleaner within 15 minutes after the
cleaner is applied.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to
maintain the appearance of the leather.
Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-
mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.
CHROME PARTS
Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-
facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-
tectors contain chemicals that may stain or
bleach the seat material.
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-
abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
TIRE DRESSINGS
Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean
the meter and gauge lens.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire
dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-
ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may
react with the coating and form a compound. This
compound may come off the tire while driving and
stain the vehicle paint.
WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classifica-
tion sensor. This can also affect the opera-
tion of the air bag system and result in
serious personal injury.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
●
Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-
ing on the tire dissolves more easily than
with an oil-based tire dressing.
7-4 Appearance and care
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AIR FRESHENERS
CAUTION
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect
the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,
take the following precautions:
● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-
lar material.
● Small dirt particles can be abrasive and
damaging to leather surfaces and
should be removed promptly. Do not
use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,
oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents or ammonia-based cleaners as
they may damage the leather’s natural
finish.
●
Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per-
manent discoloration when they contact ve-
hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh-
ener in a location that allows it to hang free
and not contact an interior surface.
●
Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on
the vents. These products can cause imme-
diate damage and discoloration when
spilled on interior surfaces.
● Do not clean the interior or trunk using
water. If water contacts the high voltage
battery, it may cause a short circuit and
damage the battery.
LHV0004
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-
structions before using the air fresheners.
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY AIR VENT
● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-
ommended by the manufacturer.
CAUTION
FLOOR MATS
● Do not place objects over or into the air
vent. The high voltage battery may over-
heat and be damaged.
The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-
tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it
easier to clean the interior. No matter what
mats are used, be sure they are fitted for
your vehicle and are properly positioned in
the footwell to prevent interference with
pedal operation. Mats should be maintained
with regular cleaning and replaced if they be-
come excessively worn.
● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-
age the lens cover.
● Do not allow any liquid to get on or in
the air vent. It may cause a short circuit
and damage the high voltage battery.
● Clean the air vent regularly to prevent
the high voltage battery from
overheating.
A
Regularly clean the air vent
with a dry cloth to
᭺
prevent the vent from being blocked.
Appearance and care 7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CORROSION PROTECTION
SEAT BELTS
MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.
Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade
before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”
in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-
tal restraint system” section of this manual.
●
The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt
and debris in body panel sections, cavities,
and other areas.
●
Damage to paint and other protective coat-
ings caused by gravel and stone chips or
minor traffic accidents.
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,
since these materials may severely
weaken the seat belt webbing.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
LPD0477
Floor mat positioning aid
Moisture
This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to
act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor
mats have been specially designed for your ve-
hicle model. The driver’s and passenger’s side
floor mats have a grommet hole incorporated in
them. Position the mat by placing the floor mat
bracket hook through the floor mat grommet hole
while centering the mat in the footwell.
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-
hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.
Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside
the vehicle and should be removed for drying to
avoid floor panel corrosion.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high
relative humidity, especially those areas where
the temperatures stay above freezing and where
atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is
used.
Periodically check to make certain the mats are
properly positioned.
7-6 Appearance and care
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature
CAUTION
High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-
sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.
● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-
bris from the passenger compartment
by washing it out with a hose. Remove
dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-
ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-
erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.
● Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE
FROM CORROSION
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion
and deterioration of underbody components
such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,
brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
●
●
●
●
Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the
vehicle clean.
Always check for minor damage to the paint
and repair it as soon as possible.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors
open to avoid water accumulation.
For additional protection against rust and corro-
sion, which may be required in some areas, con-
sult a NISSAN dealer.
Check the underbody for accumulation of
sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
as soon as possible.
Appearance and care 7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Inverter cooling system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Checking inverter coolant level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Changing inverter coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Electronically controlled Continuously Variable
Transmission (eCVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Windshield–washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
12-volt battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
In-cabin microfilter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Brake pad wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Front park/turn/sidemarker light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36
Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37
Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini-
mum maintenance requirements with long ser-
vice intervals to save you both time and money.
However, some day-to-day and regular mainte-
nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’s
good mechanical condition, as well as its emis-
sions and engine performance.
Performing general maintenance checks requires
minimal mechanical skill and only a few general
automotive tools.
During the normal day-to-day operation of the
vehicle, general maintenance should be per-
formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a
NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you
should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that
repairs are required.
These checks or inspections can be done by you,
a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN
dealer.
Where to go for service
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general
maintenance, is performed.
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle
appears to malfunction, have the systems
checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.
When performing any checks or maintenance
work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-
tions” later in this section.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who
can ensure that your vehicle receives proper
maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-
nance chain.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists
who are kept up-to-date with the latest service
information through technical bulletins, service
tips, and in-dealership training programs. They
are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-
hicles before they work on your vehicle, rather
than after they have worked on it.
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with “ * ”is found later in this section.
Scheduled maintenance
For your convenience, both required and optional
scheduled maintenance items are described and
listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide”. You must refer to that guide to ensure
that necessary maintenance is performed on your
NISSAN at regular intervals.
Outside the vehicle
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s
service department performs the best job to meet
the maintenance requirements on your vehicle —
in a reliable and economical way.
The maintenance items listed here should be
performed from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
Doors and engine hood Check that the doors
and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure
that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,
latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.
Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the
hood from opening when the primary latch is
released.
General maintenance
General maintenance includes those items which
should be checked during normal day-to-day op-
eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-
eration. It is your responsibility to perform these
maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When driving in areas using road salt or other
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at
normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-
tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur-
ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the
vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see a
NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat
away from the pedal.
Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all
operating properly and installed securely. Also
check headlight aim.
●
For additional information regarding tires,
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in
the Warranty Information Booklet.
Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the
vehicle to one side when applied.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checking
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if
necessary.
Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular
basis. Check the windshield at least every six
months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-
aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair
facility.
Electronically controlled Continuously
Variable Transmission (eCVT) P (Park) po-
sition mechanism: On a fairly steep hill check
that the vehicle is held securely with the shift
selector in the P (Park) position without applying
any brakes.
Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every
7,500 miles (12,000 km).
Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or
wear if they do not wipe properly.
Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-
tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely held
on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake
applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,
see a NISSAN dealer.
Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often
and always prior to long distance trips. If neces-
sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the
spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully
for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked on a regular basis, such as when per-
forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-
hicle, etc.
Seats Check seat position controls such as seat
adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they
operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in
every position. Check that the head restraints
move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so
equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components Replace the TPMS
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap
when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.
Additional information on the following
items with an “*” is found later in this sec-
tion.
Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle
should pull to either side while driving on a
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel
Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth
operation and make sure the pedal does not bind
or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away
from the pedal.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt
system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters
and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,
and are installed securely. Check the belt web-
bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Electronically controlled Continuously
Variable Transmission (eCVT) fluid* Check
under the vehicle for leaks after the vehicle has
been parked for a while.
Inverter coolant level* Check the coolant level
when the inverter is cold.
Radiator and hoses Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,
etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the
hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose
connections.
Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level
when the engine is cold.
Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-
ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard
steering or strange noises.
Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts
are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-
posed to corrosive substances such as those
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very
important to remove these substances from the
underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor
pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the
end of winter, the underbody should be thor-
oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas
where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See
the “Appearance and care” section of this
manual.
Warning lights and chimes Make sure all
warning lights and chimes are operating properly.
Engine oil level* Check the level after parking
the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.
Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain
back into the oil pan.
Windshield wiper and washer* Check that
the wipers and washer operate properly and that
the wipers do not streak.
Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose
supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of
exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust
system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the
“Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
Windshield defroster Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in
sufficient quantity when operating the heater or
air conditioner.
Windshield washer fluid* Check that there is
adequate fluid in the reservoir.
Under the hood and vehicle
Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,
water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. Water dripping from the
air conditioner after use is normal. If you should
notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,
check for the cause and have it corrected imme-
diately.
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked periodically (for example, each time you
check the engine oil or refuel).
Brake fluid level* Make sure that the brake fluid
level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the
reservoir.
8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance
work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent
serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to
the vehicle. The following are general precau-
tions which should be closely observed.
● Never try to remove the service discon-
nect located in the trunk on the lower
right-hand side. The service disconnect
is used only when the vehicle is ser-
viced by trained technicians wearing
personal protection equipment and is
part of the high voltage system. Touch-
ing the service disconnect can cause
severe burns or electric shock that may
result in serious injury or death.
● The engine can start at any time without
warning when the Hybrid System is in
the READY mode. If you must work with
the Hybrid System in the READY mode,
keep your hands, clothing, hair and
tools away from fans, belts and any
other parts that can move.
WARNING
● This vehicle has high voltage DC and AC
systems as well as a 12-volt system. DC
and AC high voltage is very dangerous
and can cause severe burns and electric
shock that may result in serious injury
or death.
● It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and remove any jewelry,
such as rings, watches, etc. before
working on your vehicle.
● The hybrid system uses high voltage up
to 650 V. The system can be hot while
and after starting. Be careful of both the
high voltage and the high temperature.
Obey the caution labels attached to the
vehicle.
● Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.
● Never touch, disassemble, remove or
replace the high voltage parts, cables
and their connectors. High voltage
cables are orange. Touching, disassem-
bling, removing or replacing those parts
and cables can cause severe burns or
electric shock that may result in serious
injury or death.
● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-
matic engine cooling fan. It may come
on at any time without warning, even if
the ignition key is in the OFF position
and the engine is not running. To avoid
injury, always disconnect the negative
battery cable before working near the
fan.
● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-
ply the parking brake securely and
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle
from moving. Move the shift selector to
P (Park).
● Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
or LOCK position when performing any
parts replacement or repairs.
● If you must run the engine in an en-
closed space such as a garage, be sure
there is proper ventilation for exhaust
gases to escape.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is neces-
sary to work under the vehicle, support
it with safety stands.
● Never connect or disconnect the battery
or any transistorized component while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
gives instructions regarding only those items
which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.
● Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from the fuel tank and
battery.
A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-
able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-
der information” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
● On gasoline engine models, the fuel
filter or fuel lines should be serviced by
a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines
are under high pressure even when the
engine is off.
You should be aware that incomplete or improper
servicing may result in operating difficulties or
excessive emissions, and could affect warranty
coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,
have it done by a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
● Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.
● Avoid contact with used engine oil and
coolant. Improperly disposed engine
oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
fluids can damage the environment. Al-
ways conform to local regulations for
disposal of vehicle fluid.
● Never leave the engine or the transmis-
sion related component harness con-
nector disconnected while the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
1. Brake fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Air cleaner
4. Fuse/Fusible link box/Jump-start
location
5. Fuse box
6. Inverter coolant reservoir
7. Engine oil dipstick
8. Radiator cap
9. Drive belt location
10. Engine coolant reservoir
11. Windshield–washer fluid reservoir
LDI0577
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory
with Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant to provide
year-round anti-freeze and coolant protection.
The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corro-
sion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system
additives are not necessary.
CAUTION
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure
to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent with the
proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze
and 50% demineralized or distilled water.
The use of other types of coolant solu-
tions other than Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent,
may damage the engine cooling system.
WARNING
● Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool
down. Serious burns could be caused
by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator. See precautions in “If your
vehicle overheats” found in the “In case
of emergency” section of this manual.
Outside temperature
down to
Genuine
NISSAN
Demineral-
ized or dis-
tilled water
Long Life
Antifreeze/
Coolant or
equivalent
LDI0554
°C
°F
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
● The radiator is equipped with a pres-
sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-
-35
-30
50%
50%
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
the engine and inverter are cold. If the cool-
ant level is below the MIN level , add coolant to
the MAX level . If the reservoir is empty, check
gine damage, use only
NISSAN radiator cap.
a
genuine
B
᭺
A
᭺
the coolant level in the radiator when the en-
gine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the
radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler
opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the
A
MAX level
.
᭺
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INVERTER COOLING SYSTEM
The inverter cooling system is filled at the factory
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
CAUTION
with
Genuine
NISSAN
Long
Life
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.
The service procedure can be found in the
NISSAN Service Manual.
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure
to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent with the
proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze
and 50% demineralized or distilled water.
The use of other types of coolant solu-
tions other than Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent,
may damage the inverter cooling system.
Antifreeze/Coolant to provide year-round anti-
freeze and coolant protection. The anti-freeze
solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors.
Additional inverter cooling system additives are
not necessary.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheat-
ing.
WARNING
WARNING
● The temperature of the inverter rises to
140° F (60° C). Never remove the coolant
reservoir cap when the engine and in-
verter are hot. Wait until the engine and
inverter cool down. Serious burns could
be caused by high pressure fluid escap-
ing from the reservoir.
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the en-
gine is hot.
Outside temperature
down to
Genuine
NISSAN
Demineral-
ized or dis-
tilled water
Long Life
Antifreeze/
Coolant or
equivalent
● Never remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. Serious burns could be
caused by high pressure fluid escaping
from the radiator.
°C
°F
● The inverter reservoir is equipped with a
pressure type cap. To prevent engine
and inverter damage, use only a genu-
ine NISSAN inverter reservoir cap.
-35
-30
50%
50%
● Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-
dren and pets.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE OIL
CHANGING INVERTER COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the inverter cool-
ant. The service procedure can be found in the
NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in inverter
overheating.
WARNING
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the in-
verter is hot.
● Never remove the cap when the inverter
is hot. Serious burns could be caused
by high pressure fluid escaping from
the inverter coolant reservoir.
LDI0583
LDI0555
CHECKING INVERTER COOLANT
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
● Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
the engine and inverter are cold. If the cool-
ant level is below the MIN level , add coolant to
2. Start the vehicle and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature.
B
᭺
A
the MAX level
.
᭺
● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-
dren and pets.
3. Turn off the vehicle. Wait more than 10
minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan.
If the inverter cooling system frequently
requires coolant, have it checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-
insert it all the way.
8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-
erating the engine with an insufficient
amount of oil can damage the engine, and
such damage is not covered by warranty.
WDI0597
WDI0214
A
Oil filler cap
Oil drain plug
Oil filter
᭺
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil
level. It should be between the H (High) and
B
᭺
B
L (Low) marks
. This is the normal oper-
᭺
C
᭺
ating oil level range. If the oil level is below
A
CHANGING ENGINE OIL
the L (Low) mark , remove the oil filler cap
᭺
and pour recommended oil through the
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
C
opening. Do not overfill
.
᭺
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
2. Start the vehicle and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature, then turn it off.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the
break-in period, depending on the severity
of operating conditions.
A
3. Remove the oil filler cap
counterclockwise.
by turning it
᭺
4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug
B
.
᭺
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
5. Remove the drain plug
with a wrench by
Drain plug tightening torque:
22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)
᭺
turning it counterclockwise and completely
drain the oil.
7. Refill engine with recommended oil through
the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler
cap securely.
If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and
replace it at this time. See “Changing engine
oil filter” later in this section.
See “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-
sumer information”section of this manual for
drain and refill capacity.
●
●
Waste oil must be disposed of prop-
erly.
Check your local regulations.
The drain and refill capacity depends on the
oil temperature and drain time. Use these
specifications for reference only. Always use
the dipstick to determine when the proper
amount of oil is in the engine.
WARNING
● Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
WDI0597
A
Oil filler cap
Oil drain plug
Oil filter
᭺
● Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
8. Start the vehicle. Check for leakage around
the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-
quired.
B
᭺
C
᭺
9. Turn the vehicle off and wait more than 10
minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.
Add engine oil if necessary.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
● Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
CAUTION
2. Turn the vehicle off.
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
C
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter
.
᭺
C
4. Loosen the oil filter
with an oil filter
wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then
remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.
᭺
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new
washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with
a wrench. Do not use excessive force.
8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (eCVT) FLUID
BRAKE FLUID
For further brake fluid specification information,
refer to “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
● Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic W ATF.
Do not mix with other fluids.
● Using transmission fluid other than
Genuine NISSAN Matic W ATF will dam-
age the transmission, which is not cov-
ered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited
warranty.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with
a clean rag.
WARNING
● Use only new fluid from a sealed con-
tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake system.
The use of improper fluids can damage
the brake system and affect the vehi-
cle’s stopping ability.
CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket material
remaining on the sealing surface of the
engine. Failure to do so could lead to
engine damage.
When checking or replacement is required, we
recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.
● Clean the filler cap before removing.
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean
engine oil.
● Brake fluid is poisonous and should be
stored carefully in marked containers
out of reach of children.
7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance
is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.
CAUTION
8. Start the vehicle and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-
faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is
spilled, immediately wash the surface
with water.
9. Turn the vehicle off and wait more than 10
minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if
necessary.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving
conditions require an increased amount of
windshield-washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-
shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-
freeze or equivalent.
CAUTION
● Do not substitute engine anti-freeze
coolant for windshield-washer solution.
This may result in damage to the paint.
● Do not fill the windshield-washer reser-
voir tank with washer fluid concen-
trates at full strength. Some methyl al-
cohol based washer fluid concentrates
may permanently stain the grille if
spilled while filling the windshield-
washer reservoir tank.
LDI0578
LDI0579
BRAKE FLUID
WINDSHIELD–WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR
Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the
fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake
warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN
Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT
3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added
frequently, the system should be checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodi-
cally. Add windshield-washer fluid when the low
windshield-washer fluid warning light comes on
(if so equipped).
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recom-
mended levels before pouring the fluid
into the windshield-washer reservoir
tank. Do not use the windshield-washer
reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid
concentrate and water.
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift
the cap off the reservoir tank and pour the
windshield-washer fluid into the tank opening.
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield-
washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-
structions for the mixture ratio.
8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-VOLT BATTERY
DRIVE BELT
The 12-volt battery is located on the right hand
side of the trunk behind an access panel.
● The Hybrid vehicle uses a special 12-
volt battery. If the 12-volt battery needs
to be replaced, use a battery of the
same design. Using the wrong battery
can cause hydrogen gas to build up in
the vehicle, which could lead to an ex-
plosion and personal injury.
●
Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of baking
soda and water.
●
●
Make certain the terminal connections are
clean and securely tightened.
● When working on or near a battery, al-
ways wear suitable eye protection and
remove all jewelry.
If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or
longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery
terminal cable to prevent discharge.
● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-
cessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds. Wash hands after handling.
WARNING
LDI0581
● Do not expose the battery to flames or
electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas gener-
ated by the battery is explosive. Do not
allow battery fluid to contact your skin,
eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. After
touching a battery, do not touch or rub
your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands.
If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or
clothing, immediately flush with water
for at least 15 minutes and seek medi-
cal attention.
● Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
1. Auto tensioner pulley
2. Water pump
3. Idler pulley
JUMP STARTING
4. Crankshaft
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”
in the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual. If the Hybrid System does not start by
jump starting, the battery may have to be re-
placed. Contact a NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or
LOCK position before servicing drive belt.
The engine could rotate unexpectedly.
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual
wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is
in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced
or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPARK PLUGS
2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-
tion and tension in accordance with the
maintenance schedule found in the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are
off and that the parking brake is engaged
securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to re-
move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket
can damage the spark plugs.
If replacement is required, see your NISSAN
dealer for assistance.
SDI1895
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
A
It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped
᭺
spark plugs as frequently as conventional type
spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-
low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service
iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regap-
ping.
●
Always replace spark plugs with rec-
ommended or equivalent ones.
8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AIR CLEANER
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
CLEANING
WARNING
If your windshield is not clear after using the
windshield–washer or if a wiper blade chatters
when running, wax or other material may be on
the blade or windshield.
● Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or oth-
ers to be burned. The air cleaner not
only cleans the air, it stops the flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and
the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed, and be careful when working
on the engine with the air cleaner
removed.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer
solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is
clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear
water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked
in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then
rinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-
shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades
and using the wiper, install new windshield wiper
blades.
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body or
attempt to start the engine with the air
cleaner removed. Doing so could result
in serious injury.
LDI0580
The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and
reused. Replace it according to the maintenance
log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-
nance Guide.”When replacing the filter, wipe the
inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the
cover with a damp cloth.
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
CAUTION
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-
borne dust and pollen particles and reduces
some objectionable outside odors. The filter is
located behind the glove box. Refer to the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for
change intervals.
Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-
age the windshield and impair driver
vision.
To remove the air cleaner filter, push the tabs and
pull the unit upward.
If replacement is required, see your NISSAN
dealer.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Return the wiper to its original position and
release it until it has made contact with the
windshield.
CAUTION
● After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when the
hood is opened.
● Make sure the wiper blades contact the
glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-
aged from wind pressure.
WDI0594
REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
2
Push the release tab, then move the wiper
blade down the wiper arm to remove.
᭺
3
Remove the wiper blade.
WDI0570
᭺
If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not
to let wax get into the windshield–washer nozzle
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper
arm until it clicks into place.
A
. This may cause clogging or improper wind-
᭺
5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in the
groove.
shield–washer operation. If wax gets into the
B
nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin
.
᭺
8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BRAKES
FUSES
If the brakes do not operate properly, have the
brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For more information regarding
brake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-
nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-
vice and Maintenance Guide”.
SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust
every time the brake pedal is applied.
WARNING
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system
check if the brake pedal height does not
return to normal.
LDI0455
A
Two types of fuses are used. Type
is used in
BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATORS
᭺
the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible
wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-
placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-
ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in
motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the
brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.
B
is used in the passenger compartment fuse
᭺
box.
Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They
are stored in the passenger compartment fuse
box.
Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-
partment and passenger compartment fuse
boxes.
Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-
sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may
be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to
moderate stops is normal and does not affect the
function or performance of the brake system.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not come on,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.
LDI0457
3. Locate the two fuse blocks. All Hybrid Sys-
tem component fuses are located in fuse
If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,
the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse
pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not
affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the
fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.
A
B
panel , all other fuses are located in
.
᭺
᭺
4. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the
tab and lifting the cover up.
Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under-
hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in the
underhood fuse boxes.
5. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The
fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse
block in the passenger compartment.
LDI0582
8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WDI0452
WDI0402
A
6. If the fuse is open
, replace it with a new
᭺
B
fuse
.
᭺
7. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.
Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not operate and
fuses are in good condition, check the fusible
links. If any of these fusible links are melted,
replace with only genuine NISSAN parts.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
WDI0452
LDI0456
2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.
3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.
Type A
A
Type B
4. If the fuse is open
, replace it with an
.
᭺
B
equivalent good fuse
᭺
5. Push the fuse box cover to install.
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.
8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
CAUTION
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-
lows:
Be careful not to allow children to swallow
the battery or removed parts.
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-
gent Key.
A
B
2. Insert a small screwdriver
into the slit
᭺
᭺
of the corner and twist it to separate the
upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to
protect the casing.
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2032 or equiva-
lent.
● Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-
tric terminals as doing so could cause a
malfunction.
● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding
the battery across the contact points will
seriously deplete the storage capacity.
● Make sure that the + side faces the bot-
tom of the case.
WDI0567
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23
LIGHTS
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undes-
ired operation of the device.
HEADLIGHTS
Replacing the halogen headlight bulb
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which
uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be-
cause the headlight assembly must be removed
from the vehicle for bulb replacement, see your
NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
● Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is
necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.
● Do not leave the headlight assembly
open without a bulb installed for a long
period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,
etc. entering the headlight body may
affect bulb performance. Remove the
bulb from the headlight assembly just
before a replacement bulb is installed.
WDI0568
C
᭺ ᭺
D
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated
.
5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.
See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for
replacement.
FCC Notice:
● Only touch the base when handling the
bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.
Touching the glass could significantly
affect bulb life and/or headlight
performance.
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment.
● High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is scratched
or the bulb is dropped.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada.
8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
● Use the same number and wattage as
shown in the chart.
Item
Wattage (W)
Bulb *1
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the
exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A
temperature difference between the inside and
the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not
a malfunction. If large drops of water collect
inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.
Headlight assembly
Low (Halogen)
High
55
60
H1
HB3 (9005)
1157NA
194
Park/Turn
8/27
—
Step light
Rear combination light
Tail/Stop
FRONT PARK/TURN/SIDEMARKER
LIGHT
8/27
27
13
5
3157KX
3156
912
Turn
Bulb replacement requires the removal of the
headlight assembly. If replacement is required,
see your NISSAN dealer.
Backup (reversing)
Sidemarker
168
License plate light
High-mounted stop light
Inside
5
W5W
18
921
LED
See a NISSAN dealer
for assistance.
Spoiler (if so equipped)
Front map light
Rear map light
Trunk light
8
8
B5
B5
3.4
—
—
158
Vanity mirror light
Glove box light*2
HTU-14V
—
*1 Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.
*2 See a NISSAN dealer for assistance.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Rear map light
2. Front map light
3. Step light
4. Headlamp assembly
5. High-mount stoplight (if so equipped)
6. Trunk light
7. Spoiler mounted stoplight
(if so equipped)
8. Rear combination light
9. License plate light
WDI0722
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Indicates bulb installation
WDI0340
Vanity mirror light
1
Use a cloth
to protect the light housing.
᭺
WDI0263
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When
replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp
and/or cover.
Indicates bulb removal
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LDI0341
WDI0723
WDI0585
Step light
to protect the light housing.
Personal light
to protect the light housing.
Front map light
Use a cloth to protect the light housing.
1
1
Use a cloth
Use a cloth
᭺
᭺
8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the
“In case of emergency” section of this
manual.
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It
monitors tire pressure of all tires except
the spare. When the low tire pressure
warning light is lit, one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
WDI0320
WDI0343
Trunk light
High-mounted stoplight (rear window)
The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-
tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example a flat tire while driving).
For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-
sure warning light”in the “Instruments and
controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In
case of emergency” section.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Incorrect tire pressure, including un-
der inflation, may adversely affect
tire life and vehicle handling.
Tire inflation pressure
● Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge
to ensure that the tire pressures
are at the specified level.
Check the tire pressures (including the
spare) often and always prior to long dis-
tance trips. The recommended tire pres-
sure specifications are shown on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label
or the Tire and Loading Information label
under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.
The Tire and Loading Information label is
affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire
pressures should be checked regularly
because:
WARNING
● Improperly inflated tires can fail
● For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
suddenly and cause an accident.
● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-
tion label. The vehicle weight ca-
pacity is indicated on the Tire and
Loading Information label (if so
equipped). Do not load your ve-
hicle beyond this capacity. Over-
loading your vehicle may result in
reduced tire life, unsafe operat-
ing conditions due to premature
tire failure, or unfavorable han-
dling characteristics and could
also lead to a serious accident.
Loading beyond the specified ca-
pacity may also result in failure of
other vehicle components.
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
● Most tires naturally lose air over time.
● Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other objects
or if the vehicle strikes a curb while
parking.
The tire pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold. The tires are
considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate
speeds.
8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
᭺
Spare tire size.
LDI0549
4
Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to
this pressure when the tires are cold.
Tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or more
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km) at moderate speeds. The recom-
mended cold tire inflation is set by the
manufacturer to provide the best bal-
ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,
driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the
vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire and loading information label
᭺
1
᭺
Seating capacity: The maximum num-
ber of occupants that can be seated
in the vehicle.
2
᭺
Vehicle load limit: See “Vehicle load-
ing information” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section.
3
᭺
Original tire size: The size of the tires
originally installed on the vehicle at
the factory.
5
᭺
Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” later
in this section.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge
stem and compare to the specifica-
tion shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too
much air is added, press the core of
the valve stem briefly with the tip of
the gauge stem to release pressure.
Recheck the pressure and add or
release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
LDI0393
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,
including the spare.
Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the
tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely
onto the valve stem. Do not press too
hard or force the valve stem side-
ways, or air will escape. If the hissing
sound of air escaping from the tire is
heard while checking the pressure,
reposition the gauge to eliminate this
leakage.
3. Remove the gauge.
8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Size
Cold Tire Inflation Pres-
sure
Front and Rear Original
Tire
P215/60/R16
T135/90R16
240 kPa, 35 PSI
420 kPa, 60 PSI
Spare Tire
WDI0394
Example
TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information iden-
tifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also pro-
vides the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in case of a
recall.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not
drive the vehicle faster than the tire
speed rating.
WDI0395
Example
1
᭺
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)
5. Two-digit number (15): This number
is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-
signed for passenger vehicles (not all
tires have this information).
6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This
number is the tire’s load index. It is a
measurement of how much weight
each tire can support. You may not
find this information on all tires be-
cause it is not required by law.
2. Three-digit number (215): This num-
ber gives the width in millimeters of
the tire from sidewall edge to side-
wall edge.
3. Two-digit number (65): This number,
known as the aspect ratio, gives the
tire’s ratio of height to width.
8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
᭺
Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rubber-
coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-
ers also must indicate the materials in the
tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and others.
4
sure
Maximum permissible inflation pres-
᭺
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should be put in the tire. Do
not exceed the maximum permissible in-
flation pressure.
WDI0396
Example
5
᭺
Maximum load rating
2
᭺
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional).
TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX
XXXX)
This number indicates the maximum load
in kilograms and pounds that can be car-
ried by the tire. When replacing the tires
on the vehicle, always use a tire that has
the same load rating as the factory in-
stalled tire.
5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-
ture.
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-
ment Of Transportation”. The symbol
can be placed above, below or to the
left or right of the Tire Identification
Number.
6. Four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For ex-
ample, the numbers 3103 means the
31st week of 2003. If these numbers
are missing, then look on the other
sidewall of the tire.
6
᭺
Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
Indicates whether the tire requires an in-
ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
3. Two-digit code: Tire size.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
᭺
The word “radial”
TYPES OF TIRES
Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models
to provide superior performance on dry roads.
Summer tire performance is substantially re-
duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have
the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.
The word “radial” is shown if the tire has
radial structure.
WARNING
● When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and
construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
able to help you with information about
tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.
8
᭺
Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is shown.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy
conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of
SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four
wheels.
Other Tire-related Terminology
In addition to the many terms that are
defined throughout this section, Intended
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the
other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-
ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must
always face outward when mounted on a
vehicle.
● Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory equipped
tires, and may not match the potential
maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed
the maximum speed rating of the tire.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and load rating to the
original equipment tires. If you do not, it can
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-
formation”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings
than factory equipped tires and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-
ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
All season tires
If you install snow tires, they must be the same
size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all
four wheels.
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-
els to provide good performance all year, includ-
ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season
tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S
on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow
traction than All Season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires
may be used. However, some U.S. states and
Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check
local, state and provincial laws before installing
8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of
studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
A tire chain that provides the specified amount of
space will provide the necessary clearance be-
tween the tire and the closest vehicle suspension
or body component. The minimum clearances are
determined using the factory-equipped tires.
Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain
tensioners when recommended by the tire chain
manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links
of the tire chain must be secured or removed to
prevent the possibility of whipping action dam-
age to the fenders or underbody. If possible,
avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire
chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed.
Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or
vehicle handling and performance may be ad-
versely affected.
TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION
Only certain SAE class “S” tire chains can
be used on this vehicle. Using the wrong
Class “S” chains on this vehicle will cause
damage to the vehicle. If you plan to use
tire chains/cables, you should use a tire
chain that meets the minimum clearances
for your vehicle.
LDI0574
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to
location. Check the local laws before installing
tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure
they are the proper size for the tires on your
vehicle and are installed according to the chain
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use a tire chain that
Tire chains must be installed only on the
front wheels and not on the rear wheels.
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire.
A
is designed to provide the specified space
᭺
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with
tire chains in such conditions can cause damage
to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to
some overstress.
1
between the installed tire chain
and where the
᭺
2
tire meets the rim
Wheel size
as shown on the chart.
Minimum space required
.7 in (17 mm)
᭺
16 in
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (112 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tight-
ened to specifications at all times. It
is recommended that wheel nuts be
tightened to specification at each
tire rotation interval.
WARNING
● After rotating the tires, check and
adjust the tire pressure.
● Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
WDI0258
WDI0259
1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
Tire wear and damage
● Do not include the spare tire in
NISSAN recommends rotating the tires
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
the tire rotation.
WARNING
● For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
● Tires should be periodically in-
spected for wear, cracking, bulg-
ing or objects caught in the tread.
If excessive wear, cracks, bulging
or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)
should be replaced.
See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-
gency” section of this manual for tire re-
placing procedures.
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing wheels and tires
● If the wheels are changed for any rea-
son, always replace with wheels which
have the same off-set dimension.
Wheels of a different off-set could
cause premature tire wear, degrade ve-
hicle handling characteristics, affect
the VDC system (if so equipped) and/or
● The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When the
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread
design, speed rating and load carrying capacity
as originally equipped. Recommended types and
sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.
● Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician because
some tire damage may not be ob-
vious. Replace the tires as neces-
sary to prevent tire failure and
possible personal injury.
interference
with
the
brake
discs/drums. Such interference can
lead to decreased braking efficiency
and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Re-
fer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Techni-
cal and consumer information” section
of this manual for wheel off-set
dimensions.
WARNING
● The use of tires other than those recom-
mended or the mixed use of tires of
different brands, construction (bias,
bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns
can adversely affect the ride, braking,
handling, VDC system (if so equipped),
ground clearance, body-to-tire clear-
ance, tire chain clearance, speedom-
eter calibration, headlight aim and
bumper height. Some of these effects
may lead to accidents and could result
in serious personal injury.
● Improper service of the spare tire
may result in serious personal in-
jury. If it is necessary to repair the
spare tire, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, the TPMS (if so equipped)
will not function and the low tire pres-
sure warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute. The light will remain
on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN
dealer as soon as possible for tire re-
placement and/or system resetting.
● For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
● If your vehicle was originally equipped
with 4 tires that were the same size and
you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires ,
install the new tires on the rear axle.
Placing new tires on the front axle may
cause loss of vehicle control in some
driving conditions and cause an acci-
dent and personal injury.
“Tire
Safety
Information”
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS (if so
equipped).
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-
mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-
formation Booklet.
Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire)
● Do not install a damaged or deformed
wheel or tire even if it has been re-
paired. Such wheels or tires could have
structural damage and could fail with-
out warning.
Observe the following precautions if the TEM-
PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or
involved in an accident:
Care of wheels
● The use of retread tires is not
recommended.
●
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle
to maintain their appearance.
WARNING
● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-
formation”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet.
●
Clean the inner side of the wheels when the
wheel is changed or the underside of the
vehicle is washed.
● The spare tire should be used for emer-
gency use only. It should be replaced
with the standard tire at the first oppor-
tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-
tial damage.
●
●
Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing
the wheels.
Wheel balance
● Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid
sharp turns and abrupt braking while
driving.
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling
and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get
out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-
anced as required.
Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
●
NISSAN recommends waxing the road
wheels to protect against road salt in areas
where it is used during winter.
● Periodically check spare tire inflation
pressure. Always keep the pressure of
the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).
Wheel balance service should be per-
formed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
● With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire installed do not drive the vehicle at
speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).
8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on the
rear wheels and the original tire used
on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use
tire chains only on the front (original)
tires.
CAUTION
● Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains
will not fit properly and may cause dam-
age to the vehicle.
● Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire is smaller than the original
tire, ground clearance is reduced. To
avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive
the vehicle through an automatic car
wash since it may get caught.
● Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate
than the standard tire. Replace the
spare tire as soon as the tread wear
indicators appear.
● Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
● Do not use more than one spare tire at
the same time.
● Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
When traveling or registering your vehicle in
another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Vehicle identification number
Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . .9-25
Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . .9-26
In the event of a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate)
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
US measure
20 gal
Imp measure
Liter
75.6
Fuel
16-5/8 gal
Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91)*1
Engine oil *7
Drain and Refill
With oil filter change
4-7/8 qt
4-1/2 qt
4 qt
4.6
4.3
• Engine oil with API Certification Mark *2
• Viscosity SAE 0W-20 *2, *3
Without oil filter
change
3-3/4 qt
Cooling system
With reservoir
2 gal
7/8 gal
—
1-3/4 gal
3/4 gal
—
50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent
50% Demineralized or distilled water
7.7
3.2
Inverter unit cooling system
50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent
50% Demineralized or distilled water
Electronically controlled Continuously Variable Transmis-
sion (eCVT) fluid
—
Genuine NISSAN Matic W ATF *4
Brake fluid
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *5 or equivalent DOT 3
NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)
Multi-purpose grease
Air conditioning system refrigerant
Air conditioning system oil
Windshield washer fluid
HFC-134a (R-134a) *6
Compressor oil ND OIL-11 *6
Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze
or equivalent
*1: For further details, see “Fuel recommendation.”
*2: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations.”
*3: SAE 5W-20 or 5W-30 engine oil may also be used. However, SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for optimum fuel economy and optimum starting in cold weather.
*4: Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic W ATF. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic W ATF will damage the eCVT.
*5: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.
*6: For further details, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations.”
*7: For further details, see “Engine Oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
9-2 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
If an oxygenate-blend other than
methanol blend is used, it should con-
tain no more than 10% oxygenate.
(MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%.)
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Reformulated gasoline
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-
ber (Research octane number 91).
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-
lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN
supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-
gests that you use reformulated gasoline when
available.
If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable amount
of appropriate cosolvents and corro-
sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-
lated with appropriate cosolvents and
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol
blends may cause fuel system damage
and/or vehicle performance problems.
At this time, sufficient data is not avail-
able to ensure that all methanol blends
are suitable for use in NISSAN ve-
hicles.
CAUTION
● Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect the
warranty coverage.
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-
genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol
with or without advertising their presence.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of
which the oxygenate content and the fuel com-
patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-
termined. If in doubt, ask your service station
manager.
● Under no circumstances should
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
a
● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is not designed to run on
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage
the fuel system components and is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-
ited warranty.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take
the following precautions as the usage of such
fuels may cause vehicle performance problems
and/or fuel system damage.
If any driveability problems such as engine stall-
ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after
using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a
low blend of MTBE.
Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets
the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-
cations where it is available. Many of the automo-
bile manufacturers developed this specification
to improve emission control system and vehicle
performance. Ask your service station manager if
the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.
●
The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-
eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can
cause paint damage.
Technical and consumer information 9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the
condition. Failure to correct the condition
is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN
is not responsible.
E–85 fuel
● U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-
fied by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbrevia-
tion or the appropriate percentage for
that region.
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can
only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do
not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government
regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange
and black label with the common abbreviation or
the appropriate percentage for that region.
Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark
knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may
cause excessive fuel consumption or engine
damage. If any of the above symptoms are en-
countered, have your vehicle checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
Aftermarket fuel additives
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a
cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any
aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-
tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit
removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.
Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish
or deposit removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel
system and engine.
CAUTION
Octane rating tips
● Your vehicle is not designed to run on
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehicle
not specifically designed for E-85 fuel
can damage fuel system components
and is not covered by the NISSAN new
vehicle limited warranty.
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can cause
persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark
knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-
vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you
detect a persistent heavy spark knock even
when using gasoline of the stated octane
rating, or if you hear steady spark knock
while holding a steady speed on level
● E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%
fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded
gasoline.
9-4 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes
with temperature. Because of this, it is important
to select the engine oil viscosity based on the
temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-
ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil
viscosity other than that recommended could
cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-
placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its
equivalent for the reason described in “Change
intervals.”
WTI0186
Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-
cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-
tion mark on the front of the container. Oils which
do not have the specified quality label should not
be used as they could cause engine damage.
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATIONS
Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your
engine are based on the use of the specified
quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters
that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding
recommended oil and filter change intervals
could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine
caused by improper maintenance or use of incor-
rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-
ranty.
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality
and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory Oil additives
engine life and performance. See “Capacities
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
and recommended fuel/lubricants” earlier in this
section. NISSAN recommends the use of an
energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel
economy.
additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-
sary when the proper oil type is used and main-
tenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been
previously used should not be used.
Select only engine oils that meet the American
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-
tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Technical and consumer information 9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine
oil when it was built. You do not have to change
the oil before the first recommended change
interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend
upon how you use your vehicle.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil will
cause severe damage to the air condition-
ing system and will require the replace-
ment of all air conditioner system
components.
Operation under the following conditions may
require more frequent oil and filter changes:
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone
layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the
earth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-
tions require the recovery and recycling of any
refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-
tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained
technicians and equipment needed to recover
and recycle your air conditioner system refriger-
ant.
●
repeated short distance driving at cold out-
side temperatures
●
●
●
●
driving in dusty conditions
extensive idling
towing a trailer
stop and go commuting
Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide” for the maintenance schedule.
Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air
conditioner system.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
vehicle must be charged with the refriger-
ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, com-
pressor oil ND OIL-11.
9-6 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model
QR25DE
Type
Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
4-cylinder in-line
Cylinder arrangement
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Firing order
in (mm) 3.5 x 3.9 (89.0 x 100.0)
cu in (cm3) 151.82 (2,488)
1–3–4–2
Idle speed
eCVT (in “N” position)
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)
CO % at idle
No adjustment is necessary.
Spark plug
DILKAR6A-11
in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)
Timing chain
Spark plug gap (Nominal)
Camshaft operation
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.
Technical and consumer information 9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHEELS AND TIRES
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Wheel type
Aluminum
Size
Offset in (mm)
1.77 (45)
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
Front track
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
190.7 (4,844)
70.7(1,795.7)
58.3 (1,481)
61.4 (1,560)
61.2 (1,555)
109.3 (2,775)
16 x 7JJ
16 x 4T
T type (Spare)
1.57 (40)
Tire size
P215/60R16
T135/90R16
Rear track
Spare tire
Wheelbase
Gross vehicle weight rat-
ing
lb (kg)
See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label” on the center
pillar between the driver’s side
front and rear doors.
Gross axle weight rating
Front
Rear
lb (kg)
lb (kg)
9-8 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER
COUNTRY
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-
hicle in another country, you should first find
out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-
cle’s engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low
may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles
must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-
fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where
appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province
or district, it may be necessary to modify the
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
LTI0025
LTI0070
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-
sion control and safety standards vary according
to the country, state, province or district; there-
fore, vehicle specifications may differ.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)
The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is
attached as shown. This number is the identifica-
tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle
registration.
The vehicle identification number is located as
shown.
When any vehicle is to be taken into an-
other country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, transpor-
tation, and registration are the responsibil-
ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible
for any inconvenience that may result.
Technical and consumer information 9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WTI0096
STI0349
WTI0189
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-
bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-
able vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle
Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review
it carefully.
The emission control information label is at-
tached to the underside of the hood as shown.
9-10 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
WTI0174
WTI0178
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. The label is located as
shown.
The air conditioner specification label is affixed to
the underside of the hood as shown.
WTI0179
Technical and consumer information 9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
WARNING
Use the following steps to mount the front license
plate:
● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight of
passengers and cargo.
● It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In
a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
1
Make a shallow hole in each plastic finisher
at the location mark (small dimple) using a
0.39 in (10 mm) drill. To avoid damaging the
threads behind the finisher, apply only light
pressure to the drill.
᭺
● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
ing)
-
maximum total combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-
sengers, luggage, hitch, trailer
tongue load and any other optional
equipment. This information is lo-
cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
2
● Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seat
belts.
Mount the license plate bracket using two 10
mm slotted Phillip head screws.
᭺
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.
● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -
maximum weight (load) limit specified
for the front or rear axle. This informa-
TERMS
tion
is
located
on
the
It is important to familiarize yourself with
the following terms before loading your
vehicle:
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
● GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
rating) - The maximum total weight
rating of the vehicle, passengers,
cargo, and trailer.
● Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:
standard and optional equipment, flu-
ids, emergency tools, and spare tire
assembly. This weight does not in-
clude passengers and cargo.
9-12 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, To get “the combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo”, add the weight of all
occupants, then add the total luggage
weight. Examples are shown in the follow-
ing illustration.
Total load capacity - maximum total
weight limit specified of the load
(passengers and cargo) for the ve-
hicle. This is the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo that
can be loaded into the vehicle. If the
vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the
trailer tongue weight must be in-
cluded as part of the cargo load. This
information is located on the Tire and
Loading Information label (if so
equipped).
● Cargo capacity - permissible weight
of cargo, the subtracted weight of
occupants from the load limit.
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-
hicle shown as “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo” on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do not exceed
the number of occupants shown as
“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-
ing Information label.
Technical and consumer information 9-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steps for determining correct load
limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capac-
ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150)
= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =
300 kg.)
LTI0152
Example
9-14 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
LOADING TIPS
● Overloading not only can shorten
the life of your vehicle and the
tire, but can also cause unsafe
vehicle handling and longer brak-
ing distances. This may cause a
premature tire failure which
could result in a serious accident
and personal injury. Failures
caused by overloading are not
● The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
● Do not load the front and rear axle to
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the
GVWR.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be trans-
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this re-
duces the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity of your vehicle.
covered
by
the
vehicle’s
warranty.
WARNING
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
● Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seat-
backs. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
Secure loose items to prevent weight
shifts that could affect the balance of your
vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive
to a scale and weigh the front and the rear
wheels separately to determine axle
loads. Individual axle loads should not ex-
ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-
ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads
should not exceed the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are
given on the vehicle certification label. If
weight ratings are exceeded, move or re-
move items to bring all weights below the
ratings.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.
See “Measurement of Weights” later in
this section.
● Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear GAWRs.
If you do, parts of your vehicle
can break, tire damage could oc-
cur, or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could result
in loss of control and cause per-
sonal injury.
Also check tires for proper inflation pres-
sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label.
Technical and consumer information 9-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOWING A TRAILER
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
Maximum trailer loads
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading of a
trailer and its cargo can adversely affect
vehicle handling, braking and perfor-
mance and may lead to accidents.
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the
value
specified
in
the
“Towing
Load/Specification” chart found later in this sec-
tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weight
plus its cargo weight.
CAUTION
●
When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lbs.
(454 kg) or more, trailers with a brake
system must be used.
● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load
for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your
engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
● For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other
parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
LTI0164
The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle
(including passengers and cargo) plus the total
trailer load. Towing loads greater than these or
using improper towing equipment could ad-
versely affect vehicle handling, braking and per-
formance.
Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-
marily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember
that towing a trailer places additional loads on
your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-
ing and other systems.
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not
only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also
the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-
priate for level highway driving may have to be
reduced for low traction situations (for example,
on slippery boat ramps).
A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available
on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This
guide includes information on trailer towing ca-
pability and the special equipment required for
proper towing.
9-16 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature conditions can also affect towing.
For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside
temperatures on graded roads can affect engine
performance and cause overheating. The engine
protection mode, which helps reduce the chance
of engine damage, could activate and automati-
cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may
decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully
to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather
and road conditions.
WARNING
Overheating can result in reduced engine
power and vehicle speed. The reduced
speed may be lower than other traffic,
which could increase the chance of a col-
lision. Be especially careful when driving.
If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-
ing speed, pull to the side of the road in a
safe area. Allow the engine to cool and
return to normal operation. See “If your
vehicle overheats”in the “In case of emer-
gency” section of this manual.
WTI0160
TI1012M
Tongue load
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW)/Maximum Gross Axle Weight
Keep the tongue load between 10 - 15 percent of
the total trailer load or use the trailer tongue load (GAW)
specified by the trailer manufacturer. The tongue
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed
load must be within the maximum tongue load
limits shown in the following “Towing
Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue load be-
comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for
proper tongue load.
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label. The GVW equals the combined weight of
the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,
hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must
not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
CAUTION
Vehicle damage resulting from improper
towing procedures is not covered by
NISSAN warranties.
Technical and consumer information 9-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Towing capacities are calculated assuming a
base vehicle with driver and any options required
to achieve the rating. Additional passengers,
cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the
trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and
reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity
and trailer tongue load.
To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh
your trailer on a scale with all equipment and
cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is
towed. Make sure the Gross Trailer Weight is not
more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown
on the trailer and is not more than the calculated
available maximum towing capacity.
4,203 lb. (1906 kg)
GVWR
GVW
– 4,103 lb. (1861 kg)
= 100 lb. (45 kg)
Available for tongue
weight
1,000 lb. (454 kg) Capacity available for
towing
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to
confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front
GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight
Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to
make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear
Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front
Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight
on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to
be moved or removed to meet the specified rat-
ings.
100 lb. (45 kg) Available tongue weight
All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured
using platform type scales commonly found at
truck stops, highway weigh stations, building
supply centers or salvage yards.
/ 1,000 lb. (454 kg)
=
Available capacity
10 % tongue weight
The available towing capacity may be less than
the maximum towing capacity due to the passen-
ger and cargo load in the vehicle.
To determine the available payload capacity for
tongue load, use the following procedure.
Example:
●
●
●
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed
on a scale - including passengers, cargo and
hitch - 4,103 lb. (1861 kg).
Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-
tween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the
trailer tongue load specification recommended
by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load
becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to ob-
tain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the
maximum tongue weight specification shown in
the “Towing load/specification” chart even if the
calculated available tongue weight is greater
than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less
than 10% , reduce the total trailer weight to
match the available tongue weight.
1. Locate
the
GVWR
on
the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of
the passengers and cargo that are normally
in the vehicle when towing a trailer.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -
4,203 lb. (1906 kg).
3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the
GVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-
able maximum tongue load.
Maximum Towing Load from “Towing
Load/SpecificationЉ chart - 1,000 lb. (454
kg).
9-18 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Always verify that available capacities are within
the required ratings.
●
The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be
long enough to be properly secured to the
ball mount. There should be at least 2
threads showing beyond the lock washer
and nut.
WARNING
Trailer hitch components have specific
weight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-
pable of towing a trailer heavier than the
weight rating of the hitch components.
Never exceed the weight rating of the
hitch components. Doing so can cause
serious personal injury or property
damage.
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION
TOWING LOAD / SPECIFICATION
UNIT: lb (kg)
Sway control device
MAXIMUM TOWING
1,000 (454)
LOAD
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting
caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han-
dling. Sway control devices may be used to help
control these affects. If you choose to use one,
contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make
sure the sway control device will work with the
vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake sys-
tem. Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer for installing and using the sway
control device.
MAXIMUM TONGUE
100 (45)
LOAD
Hitch ball
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight
rating for your trailer:
TOWING SAFETY
Trailer hitch
●
The required hitch ball size is stamped on
most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also
have the size printed on the top of the ball.
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer.
Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to
the vehicle, to help avoid personal injury or prop-
erty damage due to sway caused by crosswinds,
rough road surfaces or passing trucks.
●
●
Choose the proper class hitch ball based on
the trailer weight.
Class I hitch
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers
of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).
The diameter of the threaded shank of the
hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount
hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should
be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole
in the ball mount.
You may add Class I trailer hitch equipment that
has a 2,000 lb (909 kg) maximum weight rating to
the vehicle, but your vehicle is only capable of
towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the
Towing Load/Specification chart earlier in this
section.
Technical and consumer information 9-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Trailer tire condition, size, load rating
and proper inflation pressure should
be in accordance with the trailer and
tire manufacturer’s specifications.
Trailer lights
CAUTION
● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.
CAUTION
● The hitch should not be attached to or
affect the operation of the impact-
absorbing bumper.
When splicing into the vehicle electrical
system, a commercially available power-
type module/converter must be used to
provide power for all trailer lighting. This
unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct
power source for all trailer lights while
using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and
turn signal circuits as a signal source. The
module/converter must draw no more
that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail
lamp circuits. Using a module/converter
that exceeds these power requirements
may damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-
tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-
tain the proper equipment and to have it
installed.
Safety chains
● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-
tem, brake system, etc. to install a
trailer hitch.
Always use suitable safety chains between your
vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should
be crossed and should be attached to the hitch,
not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave
enough slack in the chains to permit turning
corners.
● To reduce the possibility of additional
damage if your vehicle is struck from
the rear, where practical, remove the
receiver when not in use.
● After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt
holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water
or dust from entering the passenger
compartment.
● Regularly check that all trailer hitch
mounting bolts are securely mounted.
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or
local regulations. For assistance in hooking up
trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-
table trailer dealer.
Tire pressures
● When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-
hicle tires to the recommended cold
tire pressure indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,
make sure it conforms to federal and/or local
regulations and that it is properly installed.
9-20 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to
all federal, state or local regulations. If not,
install any mirrors required for towing before
driving the vehicle.
●
When backing up, hold the bottom of the
steering wheel with one hand. Move your
hand in the direction in which you want the
trailer to go. Make small corrections and
back up slowly. If possible, have someone
guide you when you are backing up.
WARNING
Never connect a trailer brake system di-
rectly to the vehicle brake system.
Determine the overall height of the vehicle
and trailer so the required clearance is
known.
Pre-towing tips
●
Be certain your vehicle maintains a level
position when a loaded and/or unloaded
trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it
has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down
condition; check for improper tongue load,
overload, worn suspension or other possible
causes of either condition.
Always block the wheels on both vehicle and
trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not
recommended; however, if you must do so:
Trailer towing tips
In order to gain skill and an understanding of the
vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,
stopping and backing up in an area which is free
from traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-
mance will be somewhat different than under
normal driving conditions.
CAUTION
If you move the shift selector to the P
(Park) position before blocking the
wheels and applying the parking brake,
transmission damage could occur.
●
●
Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
Keep the cargo load as low as possible in
the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity
low.
●
Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill
side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.
●
Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or
lock to prevent the coupler from inadvert-
ently becoming unlatched.
●
●
Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the
trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in
the back half. Also make sure the load is
balanced side to side.
3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly
release the brake pedal until the blocks ab-
sorb the vehicle load.
●
●
●
Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.
Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
4. Apply the parking brake.
5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).
6. Turn off the engine.
Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-
hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and
trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a
trailer to the vehicle.
Always drive your vehicle at a moderate
speed.
Technical and consumer information 9-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To drive away:
●
●
●
Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first
500 miles (805 km).
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the
brakes and pull to the side of the road in a
safe area.
1. Start the vehicle.
For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do
tow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into gear.
4. Release the parking brake.
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-
anced as described earlier in this section.
Have your vehicle serviced more often than
at intervals specified in the recommended
Maintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-
vice and Maintenance Guide”.
●
Be careful when passing other vehicles.
Passing while towing a trailer requires con-
siderably more distance than normal pass-
ing. Remember, the length of the trailer must
also pass the other vehicle before you can
safely change lanes.
5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are
clear from the blocks.
●
●
When making a turn, your trailer wheels will
be closer to the inside of the turn than your
vehicle wheels. To compensate for this,
make a larger than normal turning radius
during the turn.
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.
●
●
Downshift the transmission to a lower gear
for engine braking when driving down steep
or long hills. This will help slow the vehicle
without applying the brakes.
●
While going downhill, the weight of the
trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may de-
crease overall stability. Therefore, to main-
tain adequate control, reduce your speed
and shift to a lower gear. Avoid long or
repeated use of the brakes when descend-
ing a hill, as this reduces their effectiveness
and could cause overheating. Shifting to a
lower gear instead provides “engine brak-
ing” and reduces the need to brake as fre-
quently.
Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely
affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-
ing vehicle sway. When being passed by
larger vehicles, be prepared for possible
changes in crosswinds that could affect ve-
hicle handling.
Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long
or too frequently. This could cause the
brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced
braking efficiency.
Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:
●
●
Increase your following distance to allow for
greater stopping distances while towing a
trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to
allow the vehicle to coast and steer as
straight ahead as the road conditions allow.
This combination will help stabilize the ve-
hicle.
●
●
If the engine coolant temperature rises to a
high temperature, refer to “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this owner’s manual.
NISSAN recommends that the cruise con-
trol not be used while towing a trailer.
Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal
circumstances.
– Do not correct trailer sway by steering or
applying the brakes.
9-22 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
●
Some states or provinces have specific
regulations and speed limits for vehicles that
are towing trailers. Obey the local speed
limits.
DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
CAUTION
● Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
● DO not tow your vehicle with four
wheels on the ground. This may cause
serious damage to your vehicle.
●
●
●
Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-
nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50
miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
● DO NOT tow this vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground (flat towing). Do-
ing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmis-
sion parts due to lack of transmission
lubrication.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-
ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or
rear bumper.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times
as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights
before backing the trailer into the water or
the trailer lights may burn out.
● For emergency towing procedures refer
to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”
in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.
When towing a trailer, eCVT fluid should be
changed more frequently. For additional
information, see the “Maintenance and do-
it-yourself” section earlier in this manual.
Electronically controlled Continuously
Variable Transmission (eCVT)
FLAT TOWING
To tow a vehicle equipped with an eCVT, an
appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under
the towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow
the dolly manufacturer’s recommendations when
using their product.
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground is sometimes called flat towing. This
method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle
behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor
home.
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-
sured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Your vehicle is not designed to be flat towed with
all four wheels on the ground.
Technical and consumer information 9-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following
emission warranties:
WARNING
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
The temperature grade for this tire is es-
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-
ther separately or in combination, can
cause heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.
If you did not receive a Warranty Information
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-
ment by writing to:
Temperature A, B and C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
●
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canada
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.
If you did not receive a Warranty Information
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-
ment by writing to:
●
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5
9-24 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US
only)
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
Always check with local I/M testing requirements
for Hybrid vehicles before taking your vehicle for
testing.
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-
corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-
ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR
is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
vehicle is designed to record such data as:
If you believe that your vehicle has a de-
fect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immedi-
ately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
tion to notifying NISSAN.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it
is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,
the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary
usage of the vehicle.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-
come involved in individual problems be-
tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or
the 12-volt battery is disconnected, the vehicle
may be reset to a “not ready” condition. Before
taking the I/M test, check the vehicle’s
inspection/maintenance test readiness condi-
tion. Turn the ignition switch ON without starting
the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then
blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is
“not ready”. If the MIL does not blink after 20
seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready.” If your
vehicle does not pass an I/M test the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) may not come on. Contact a
NISSAN dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-
testing.
●
●
●
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-
hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
●
●
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Sounds are not recorded.
These data can help provide a better understand-
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by
your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our
Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at
1-800-NISSAN-1.
Technical and consumer information 9-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
source of service and repair information for your
vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations
and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-
cedures, this manual is the same one used by the
factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN
dealerships. Also available are genuine NISSAN
Owner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service
and Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-
vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contact
your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-
ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area
call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-
387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-
tive will assist you.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-
ment is required and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-
facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have ac-
cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only
be accessed with the consent of the vehicle
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-
mitted by law.
Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and
Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model
year and later contact:
IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION
Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely
event, there is some important information you
should know.
1-800-450-9491
www.nissan-techinfo.com
Many insurance companies routinely authorize
the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to
cut costs, among other reasons.
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model
year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:
1-800-247-5321
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model year
and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:
1-800-247-5321
9-26 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN
collision parts!
Why should you take a chance?
In over 40 states, the law says you must be
advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair
your vehicle. And some states have enacted laws
that restrict insurance companies from authoriz-
ing the use of non-genuine collision parts during
the new vehicle warranty. These laws help pro-
tect you, so you can take action to protect your-
self.
If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts
made to NISSAN’s original exacting specifica-
tions – if you want to help it to last and hold its
resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your
insurance agent and your repair shop to
only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.
NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,
nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damage
caused by a non-genuine part.
It’s your right!
If you should need further information visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers).
Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect
your personal safety, preserve your warranty pro-
tection and maintain the resale value of your
vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using
Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un-
necessary excess wear and tear expenses at the
end of your lease.
NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to
minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the
windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-
genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such
built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts of-
ten show premature wear, rust and corrosion.
Technical and consumer information 9-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
9-28 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 Index
12-volt battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)
Bluetoothா audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-78
Bluetoothா hands-free phone
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-86, 4-101
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-21
Brake fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-25
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . .2-10, 2-12
Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-17, 8-19
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Brightness control
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
FM/AM/SAT radio with CD/DVD player. .4-48
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
A
(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
Air bag
Audio System
(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . .1-34
Air bag system
iPodா Player . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66, 4-68
Music Box hard-disk drive audio
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71
Front (See supplemental front impact
air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-49, 2-15
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Air conditioner
Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11
Air conditioner system refrigerant and
oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
Heater and air conditioner controls . . . .4-20
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Alarm system
(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-25
Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-85
Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . . . . . . .2-10
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-21
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Bluetoothா audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-78
Compact disc (CD)
Audio system
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Audio System
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Audio system
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60, 4-62
Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Automatic
Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-42
Transmission selector lever lock
release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-24
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
AUX jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41, 4-47
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Brightness/contrast button. . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
C
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-85
Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-12
CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-81
CD player
(See audio system) . . . .4-40, 4-46, 4-52, 4-58
Child restraint with top tether strap . . . . . .1-21
Child restraints. . . . . . .1-16, 1-16, 1-17, 1-19
B
Battery
Charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-11, 2-13
Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Block heater
player . . . . . . . . . .4-40, 4-46, 4-52, 4-58
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions on child
Engine
Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
D
restraints. . . . . . . . .1-17, 1-23, 1-28, 1-31
Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-21
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39, 4-44
(models with navigation system) . . . . . . .4-8
(models without navigation system) . . . .4-39
Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8, 4-39
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40, 4-46, 4-52, 4-58
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
Transmission selector lever lock release . .5-13
Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . .4-12
Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Controls
Capacities and recommended
Daytime running light system (Canada only) . .2-31
Defroster switch
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-8
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Engine compartment check locations . . . .8-7
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-5
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-12
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . .5-2
Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) player . . . . . . .4-57
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-32
Display controls (see control panel buttons) . .4-2
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Driving
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Driving with Electronically controlled
Continuously Variable Transmission
(eCVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2
E
Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Electronically controlled Continuously Variable
Transmission (eCVT)
F
Heater and air conditioner controls. . . . .4-20
Coolant
Flashers
Driving with Electronically controlled
Continuously Variable Transmission
(eCVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Electronically controlled Continuously
Capacities and recommended
(See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . . . .2-33
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
Fluid
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-8
Checking inverter coolant level . . . . . . .8-10
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Variable Transmission (eCVT) fluid . . . . .8-13
Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-10
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-24
Energy flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HEV-4
Energy/fuel history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HEV-5
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Electronically controlled Continuously
Variable Transmission (eCVT) fluid . . . . .8-13
Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
10-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Inverter coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Front air bag system
(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . .1-42
Front seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Fuel
Indicator lights and audible reminders
(See warning/indicator lights and audible
H
reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Inside automatic anti-glare mirror. . . . . . . .3-24
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-32
Intelligent Key system
Key operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Remote keyless entry operation. . . . . . .3-13
Troubleshooting guide. . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Inverter
Hands-free phone system,
Bluetoothா . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-86, 4-101
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . .2-33
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . .2-29
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Heated seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Heater
Heater and air conditioner controls. . . . .4-20
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
High voltage battery status meter . . . .2-5, HEV-4
High voltage components . . . . . . . . . . .HEV-8
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver. . . . . . . .2-47
Hood release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Hybrid System
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . . . .3-21
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Checking inverter coolant level . . . . . . .8-10
Inverter cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
iPodா Player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66, 4-68
ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Energy flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HEV-4
Energy/fuel history . . . . . . . . . . . . .HEV-5
Stops operating while driving. . . . . . . . .6-6
Vehicle does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Hybrid vehicle characteristics. . . . . . . . .HEV-9
G
Garage door opener, HomeLinkா Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Gauge
J
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
High voltage battery status meter . .2-5, HEV-4
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Power meter . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4, HEV-4
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
I
Ignition Switch
K
Push-Button Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . .5-7
Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . .2-26, 3-3, 5-9
Important vehicle information label . . . . . . .9-10
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
Keyless entry
With Intelligent Key system
(See Intelligent Key system). . . . . . . . .3-13
Keys, For Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . .3-2
10-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Lights
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Lock
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . . . .3-21
Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Trunk lid lock opener lever. . . . . . . . . .3-18
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . .2-13, 2-14, 2-24
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . .2-13
Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . .2-24
Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-12
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Music Box hard-disk drive audio system . . . .4-71
L
Labels
Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10
Emission control information label . . . . .9-10
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . .9-10
Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-11
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . .9-9
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-48
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
License plate
N
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26, 3-3, 5-9
NISSAN voice recognition system . . . . . .4-112
O
Installing the license plate. . . . . . . . . .9-11
Light
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . . . . .9-4
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Oil
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-49, 2-15
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-25
Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . . .2-9
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . .2-11, 2-13
Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-29
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-13
Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . .2-24
Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-43
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . .2-46
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
M
Capacities and recommended
Maintenance
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-5
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Overheat
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4
Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Manual front seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Map pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . .2-32
Mirror
If your vehicle overheats. . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Owner’s manual/service manual order
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . . . . .3-24
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
10-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
Readiness for inspection maintenance
Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Seats
P
Parking
(I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Recorders
Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
Registering your vehicle in another country . . .9-9
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . .9-25
Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Front seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Heated seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Manual front seat adjustment. . . . . . . . .1-2
Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer
system), engine start . . . . . . . . .2-26, 3-3, 5-9
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Shift lock release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Shifting
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Phone, Bluetoothா hands-free
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-86, 4-101
Power
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Power meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4, HEV-4
Precautions
S
Electronically controlled Continuously
Safety
Variable Transmission (eCVT). . . . . . . .5-12
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-14
Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-48
Starting
Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . .5-10
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Steering
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Child seat belts . . . . .1-17, 1-23, 1-28, 1-31
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . .9-25
Seat adjustment
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-4
Seat belt
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Precautions on child
restraints. . . . . . . . .1-17, 1-23, 1-28, 1-31
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . .1-9
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2
Programmable features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Infants and small children . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . .1-9
Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-14
Three-point type with retractor . . . . . . .1-12
R
Radio
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-85
FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
FM/AM/SAT radio with CD/DVD player . .4-48
10-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Sunroof (see Moonroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-49, 2-15
Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-42
Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels . . . . . . .1-48
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34
Supplemental restraint system
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . .9-23
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Vehicle
Tire pressure
Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . .5-10
Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . .9-8
Vehicle does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system. . . . .5-23
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
(Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-13
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . .5-3
Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . .1-21
Towing
Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Tow truck towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
Transceiver
(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . . . .1-34
Switch
Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Automatic power window switch . . . . . .2-42
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-33
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-29
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-28
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver. . . . . .2-47
Transmission
Driving with Electronically controlled
Continuously Variable Transmission
(eCVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Electronically controlled Continuously
immobilizer system), engine start . .2-26, 3-3, 5-9
Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . . . .4-112
Variable Transmission (eCVT) fluid . . . . .8-13
Selector lever lock release . . . . . . . . .5-13
Travel (See registering your vehicle in
another country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Trunk lid lock opener lever. . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
T
W
Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),
engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26, 3-3, 5-9
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Tire
Warning
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-49, 2-15
Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-10
Battery charge warning light . . . . .2-11, 2-13
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-10, 2-12
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-12
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-33
Low fuel warning light . . . . .2-13, 2-14, 2-24
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-13
Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . .2-24
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 8-40
Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-11
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37
Tire placard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
U
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
USB interface
Audio file operation . . . . . . . . . .4-61, 4-63
Video file operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64
10-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-43
Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-48
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Washer switch
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-28
Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . . .9-8
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
When traveling or registering your vehicle
in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Windows
Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-41
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-28
Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Wiper
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-28
Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
10-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GAS STATION INFORMATION
RECOMMENDED FUEL:
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-
ber (Research octane number 91).
●
Engine oil with API Certification Mark
Viscosity SAE 0W-20
●
See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations”in
the “Technical and consumer information” sec-
tion of this manual.
CAUTION
● Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect the
warranty coverage.
COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
See Tire and Loading Information label.
The label is typically located on the driver side
center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional
information, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
● Under no circumstances should
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
a
● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is not designed to run on
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage
the fuel system components and is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-
ited warranty.
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle
use, follow the recommendations outlined in the
“Break-in schedule” information found in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual. Fol-
low these recommendations for the future reli-
ability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure
to follow these recommendations may result in
vehicle damage or shortened engine life.
For additional information, see “Capacities and
recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
